USER’S MANUALDBK Options

Part 2 of 2

Option Cards and Modules
DBK41 through DBK609

DBK Option Cards & Modules
457-0912 rev 8.3 (Part 2 of 2)*372414B-01*
372414B-01

IOtech25971 Cannon Road
Cleveland, OH 44146-1833(440) 439-4091
Fax: (440) 439-4093
sales@iotech.com
productsupport@iotech.com

www.iotech.com

ii

DBK Cards & Modules
Part 2 of 2

DBK Cards & Modules

DBKs Covered in Part 2 of 2 (with exception of DBK70)
DBK41, 10-Slot Expansion Module
DBK42, 16-Slot 5B Signal Conditioning Module
DBK43A and DBK43B, 8-Channel Strain-Gage Modules
DBK44, 2-Ch. 5B Signal-Conditioning Card
DBK45, 4-Ch. SSH and Low-Pass Filter Card
DBK46, 4-Channel Analog Output Card
DBK48, Multipurpose Isolated Signal-Conditioning Module (supports up to 16 8B Modules)
DBK50 and DBK51, Voltage Input Modules
DBK55, 8-Channel Frequency-to-Voltage Input Module
DBK60, 3-Slot Expansion Chassis
DBK65, 8-Channel Transducer Interface Module
DBK70, Vehicle Network Interface, Analog Multiplexer Module (see p/n 1056-0901)
DBK80, 16-Ch. Differential Voltage Input Card with Excitation Output
DBK81, 7-Ch. T/C Card
DBK82, 14-Ch. T/C Card
DBK83, 14-Ch. T/C Card, uses external connection pod
DBK84, 14-Ch. T/C Module
DBK85, 16-Ch. Differential Voltage Module
DBK90, 56-Ch. T/C Module
DBK100 Series, (DBK100/D, 100/T,101)
In-Vehicle Thermocouple Measurement System
DBK200 Series Matrix
DBK200, P4-to-P1 Adapter Board
DBK202, DBK203, DBK204 Series
P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapters
DBK206, P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board with Screw Terminals
DBK207 and DBK207/CJC, 16-Channel,
5B Carrier Boards
DBK208, Relay Carrier Board,
Opto-22 Compatible
DBK209, P4 to P1/P2/P3 Mini-Adapter Board
DBK210, 32-Ch. Digital I/O Carrier Board
DBK213, Screw-Terminal & Expansion Module
3-Card Slot, P1/P2/P3/P4 Compatibility
DBK214, 16-Connector BNC Interface Module
P1/P2/P3/P4 Compatibility
DBK215, 16-Connector BNC Connection Modulewith 68-Pin SCSI Adaptability
DBK601 thru DBK609, Termination Panels

967194

DBK Cards & Modules

Discontinued DBKs

The following DBKs have been discontinued.
However, documentation for them may be read or downloaded from our website.
DBK12 and DBK13, A/I Multiplexer Cards
DBK19, 14-Channel Thermocouple Card
DBK33, Triple-Output Power Supply Card
DBK34, Vehicle UPS Module
DBK40, 18-Connector BNC Analog Interface
DBK52, 14-Ch. Thermocouple Input Module
DBK53 and DBK54, Analog Multiplexing Modules
DBK201, P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board
DBK603, Termination Panel, Safety Jacks, SE
DBK605-B, Termination Panel, T/C, B Type, DE
DBK605-R, Termination Panel, T/C, R Type, DE
DBK605-S, Termination Panel, T/C, S Type, DE
DBK605-U, Termination Panel, T/C, U Type, DE
DBK609, Termination Panel, 5-Pin DIN

iv

917594

DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s ManualDBK41

10-Slot Expansion Module
Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Card Configuration …… 2
Power Configuration …… 2
Card Insertion …… 3

EMI Shield Plates for CE Compliance …… 4
System Connection …… 5
DBK41 – Specifications …… 5
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK41 is a metal enclosure that holds up to 10 DBK cards. The exterior front panel has a male DB37
connector that leads to the LogBook or Daq device or further expansion via a CA-37-x cable. On theinside of the front panel, a backplane printed circuit board (PCB) uses 10 female DB37s with their pins
connected in parallel to distribute the P1 interface (can also be used with P2 or P3). From the rear panel,
the DBKs’ signal input lines exit to their respective transducers.
An optional EMI kit provides shield plates for the rear panel to make the DBK41 CE-compliant andprevent EMI from DBKs entering the test environment (or vice-versa). The EMI kit also functions as anelectrical safety barrier.
Some DBK cards require a lot of power, in relation to other cards, and the use of power is an importantconcern. DBK cards can obtain power externally from a LogBook, DaqBook, DaqBoard; or internallyfrom a DBK32A or DBK33 card. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section, as well as thesections for the DBK32A and/or DBK33, as applicable.
A power card in any slot (other than the slot leftmost from rear view) will power theother cards via the backplane. A front panel LED will light whenever power from any
source is on the backplane. DBK41’s JP1 jumper can be positioned to disable the +5 V
power line from the external DB37. This prevents a DBK33 power supply frominterfering with other devices.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

877095

DBK41, pg. 1

Hardware Setup
Setup concerns include card and power configuration, proper card insertion, the use of EMI shields for CE
compliance, and mounting [or stacking] of hardware components.
In regard to mounting: metal splice plates can be used to rigidly mount a LogBook or DaqBook on top of a
DBK41 or other device that shares the same footprint. For applications in which temporary mounting isconvenient: a LogBook, DaqBook or notebook PC can be temporarily mounted to a DBK41 with the useof industrial-strength dual-lock pads or strips.

Card Configuration
Each DBK card should be checked for proper configuration, and re-configured if needed, before being
inserted into the DBK41. Refer to the individual DBK Document Modules that are applicable to yoursystem.

Power Configuration
Power must be configured to prevent multiple power supplies from interfering with each other via the P1
interface. DBK41, LogBook/360, DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series, and ISA-type DaqBoard each have
JP1 jumpers that must be properly configured in regard to power. Details for each follow.
JP1 in the DBK41
On the DBK41 backplane, JP1 is a 3-pin jumper positioned between
DB37 connectors for card number 4 (CN4) and card number 5(CN5). Two settings are possible, as follows:
ENABLE +5 VDC JP1 1-2
When JP1 pins 1 and 2 are jumpered, the +5 VDC line to theexternal P1 connector is enabled. The 5 V (VCC) is externallysupplied to pin 1 for cards 1 through 10 (CN1 through CN10). The+5 VDC power can come from a LogBook, DaqBook, or DaqBoard
through a CA-37-x cable on pin 1 of P1. If not using a DBK33, JP1should be enabled.
DISABLE +5 VDC JP1 2-3
When JP1 pins 2 and 3 are jumpered, the +5 VDC line to theexternal P1 connector is disabled. When using a DBK33 powercard in the DBK41, the JP1 jumper must be set on pin 2 and 3. The
JP1 2-3 setting prevents the DBK33’s +5 V from interfering withexternal devices via the P1 interface.

JP1 in the DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type]

CAUTION
DBK power cards must not be connected until JP1
jumpers have been removed. Otherwise, equipment
damage could result.
If a DBK32A or DBK33 is used, you must remove the shunt jumpers
from the JP1 header located inside the DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series
device or DaqBoard [ISA type]. DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series
devices and DaqBoards [ISA type] are shipped with these shunts
positioned to deliver ±15 V analog power to P1.
Note: The jumpers can be placed on the -OCTOUT and -OCLKIN pins but should be removed if there isinterference with card operation (counter-timer).

DBK41, pg. 2877095DBK Option Cards and Modules

JP1 and JP2 in LogBook/360
Proper jumper configuration limits LogBook/360’s P1 bus to one power source. There should never bemore than one power source. The jumpers are located inside the chassis, on the unit’s P1 Interconnect
Board.

JP1. Only remove LogBook/360’s JP1 jumper if a DBK33 is used with the system.
JP2. Only remove the LogBook/360’s JP2 jumper if DBK cards are to be powered from LogBook/360’sinternal PCB.
Reference Note:
Refer to the LogBook User’s Manual, 461-0901 for information regarding LogBook systems.

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No jumper configurations are required for these /2000 series devices.

Card Insertion
Each DBK card has a DB37 male connector which mates with the DB37 female connectors inside theDBK41 chassis. To insert DBK cards into the DBK41 chassis, refer to the figure and perform thefollowing steps.
Note: Cards using screw-connectors for signal input lines must be wired before insertion.
1.

Disconnect power from all units to be connected.

2.

Place the DBK41 on a flat surface; loosen the two thumbscrews on rear of the case; and remove the
top cover by sliding it off.

3.

Align the DBK card with the DBK41 connector to be used (CN1 to CN10). The first slot must always
be occupied; however, a DBK32A or DBK33 power card may not occupy the first slot. Any of theremaining 9 slots can be used or unused.

4.

To clear the lip on the rear panel, tilt the rear of the card upward. Engage the P1 connectors of thecard and chassis, and press together gently to avoid damage to the pins.

5.

Press down the rear of the card, aligning it within the metal dimples at the rear of the DBK41.

6.

After cards are in place, reassemble the DBK41’s top cover and attach optional shield plates(described next); then re-connect and power up the system.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

877095

DBK41, pg. 3

EMI Shield Plates for CE Compliance
To reduce electro-magnetic interference (EMI) escaping from (or entering into) the enclosure, a CE kit
provides shield plates that attach to the rear of the DBK41. The kit also functions as an electrical safetybarrier. With shield plates attached (a combination of 3 types supplied), the system meets CE standards.
The kit includes:•

Full shield plates to cover empty (unused) slots•

Partial shield plates to surround DBKs in a slot (except a power card)•

Partial shield plates to surround a DBK32A or DBK33 power card•

Screws and star washers to secure the shields to the chassis

Note: The CE kit is included with the DBK41/CE and an optional accessory for a DBK41.
The shields have a support tab that slides over the edge of the bottom plate and a screw hole forattachment to the top plate. When tightened, the screws cause the washers to pierce the surface
coating into the metal to make a good contact with chassis ground.

Reference Note:
The Signal Management chapter contains additional information pertaining to CE Compliance.

DBK41, pg. 4877095DBK Option Cards and Modules

System Connection
A short ribbon cable (CA-37-x) attaches the DBK41 to the main unit. Connecting the DBK41 to any portother than P1 may damage devices in the system. Likewise, only analog expansion cards may be installedin the DBK41.
Note: For CE compliance, the CA-37-x cable must be replaced with a CA-143-7 orCA-143-18. Multiple chassis require a “T” connector (part # CN-143) for branching.

Examples of DBK41 Connections [with DBK32A] and Cascading Power

DBK41 - Specifications
Name/Function: 10-Slot Analog Expansion Module
Card Capacity: 10 slots to hold standard DBK option cards
Weight: 4 lb (with no cards installed)
Cable (optional): 8" ribbon with DB37 female to DB37 female (CA-37-x)
Power Indicator: LED powered by external device’s 5 VDCConnection: Male DB37, mates via CA-37-x cable with P1

DBK Option Cards and Modules

877095

DBK41, pg. 5

DBK41, pg. 6877095DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK42

16-Slot 5B Signal Conditioning Module
Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

DBK42 Connection …… 2
DBK42 Configuration …… 2
5B Module Connection …… 2
Power Considerations …… 2
Terminal Block Connections …… 3
DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series Connections …… 5
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and ISA-Type DaqBoard Configuration …… 5
DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 5

Software Setup …… 6
DBK42 – Specifications …… 8
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
oIn regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK42 allows LogBook or Daq device systems to work with up to 16 5B signal conditioning
modules. Modules are available for various signal types (e.g., low-level thermocouple signals, strain-gage
signals, etc). The DBK42 offers 500 V isolation from the system and between channels. The DBK42 iscompatible with all 5B output modules, and the configuration is very flexible. You can select the type ofsignal attached to each channel.

An accessory cable connects the DBK42’s output to the P1 analog input connector. One LogBook or Daq
device can support up to 16 DBK42 units with a maximum of 256 isolated analog input channels. The

LogBook or Daq device scans the DBK42 channels at the same 10 µs/channel rate as other DBKs (256scans in 2.56 ms in a full system).
The DBK42 can obtain power from an included AC adapter, an optional DBK30A rechargeable battery
module, or directly from a 12 VDC source (such as a car battery). The built-in power supply can serve afully-configured system using bridge excitation.
For DaqBoard/2000 Series applications, DBK42 is typically powered from an included AC adapter. The
unit’s built in power supply can serve a fully-configured system using bridge excitation.
DBK Option Cards and Module

967694

DBK42, pg. 1

Each terminal block contains 4 terminals (per channel) for access to input and excitation features of 5B
modules.
The optional CN-71 and CN-72 signal connection blocks provide a convenient way of connecting analog
signals to the DBK42.
•

The CN-71 is for non-thermocouple use.

•

The CN-72 (with cold junction sensors) is for thermocouple use. The CN-72 has a clear
plastic shield over its screw terminals to protect you from high voltage on the input terminals.

Hardware Setup
DBK42 Connection
The DBK42 has screw-terminal connectors for easy access to the analog inputs. 2-wire and 4-wirehookups are shown later in this section.
Note: Analog channels are isolated from each other, and no analog ground is provided.

DBK42 Configuration
Up to 16 DBK42s can connect to a LogBook or a Daq device. As a daisy-chain interface,each module must appear unique and use a different channel.
To configure the module, locate the 16×2-pin header (JP1) near the front of the DBK42
board. Note the 16 jumper locations labeled CH0 through CH15 representing the baseAnalog Input Channels. Place the jumper on the channel you wish to use.

Only one jumper is used on a single DBK42. No two cards in a system
can use the same JP1 setting.

5B Module Connection
Each input of the DBK42 is processed through a user-installed 5B signal-conditioning module. Different
5B modules are used with different transducer and signal sources. To install the modules:
1.

Match the footprint of the module with the footprint on the circuit board (see figure).

2.

Gently place the module into the footprint, and screw it down.

3.

When installing current input modules (SC-5B32 series), install the supplied current-sense resistor(SC-AC-1362) in the resistor footprint adjacent to the module mounting footprint.

4.

Record the module’s channel number; label all units and connectors for identification.

Power Considerations
The DBK42 has an internal, isolated switching-type power supply that operates on 10-20 VDC at varying
input currents depending on the input voltage and 5B-module loading. The power drain at a given output
load is constant; input current will vary inversely with the input voltage.

DBK42, pg. 2967694

DBK Option Cards and Modules

A DBK42 populated with strain-gage modules will draw more current than with other types of input
modules. The table shows the DC input requirements for the worst-case setup (with 16 strain-gage
modules or 16 thermocouple modules).
Input Volts

Input Amperes
With Strain-Gage Modules

With Thermocouple Modules

10 VDC

3.0 A

0.60 A

11 VDC

2.7 A

0.54 A

12 VDC

2.4 A

0.48 A

13 VDC

2.2 A

0.44 A

14 VDC

2.0 A

0.40 A

15 VDC

1.9 A

0.38 A

16 VDC

1.8 A

0.36 A

17 VDC

1.7 A

0.34 A

18 VDC

1.6 A

0.32 A

19 VDC

1.5 A

0.30 A

20 VDC

1.4 A

0.28 A

Power sources include:•

The standard TR-25 AC plug-in power pack (provided with the DBK42) can supply 900 mA at
15 VDC. The optional TR-40U can supply 2700 mA at 15 VDC.

•

The DBK30A battery pack can supply power for a typical DBK42 configuration; however, in a
fully-populated strain-gage configuration, the battery run-time will be limited to about 1½ hours.

•

A 12 V lead-acid gel-cell type battery can easily power a fully-populated strain-gageconfiguration. The battery drain will be about 2.4 A-hr; battery size should be considered forsystems with long run-times. (For example, a common-size 5.0 A-hr battery will operate forabout 2 hours). A typical automotive 12-V lead-acid battery (e.g., 60 A-hr) can easily power a
DBK42 for long run-times (about 24 hours).

The input fuse is a 4-A Slo-Blo 1-1/4" × 1/4" glass-type such as Littelfuse 313004 or Bussman MDL-4.

Terminal Block Connection
Input signals (and excitation leads) must be wired to the DBK42 signal termination panel. Sixteen
4-terminal blocks accept up to 16 inputs. These connectors are located on a removable PC board that plugs
into two DIN96 rectangular connectors on the rear panel.
Terminal blocks are connected internally to their corresponding signal conditioning module. The terminal
blocks accept up to 14-gage wire into quick-connect screw terminals. Terminals on each block arenumbered 1 through 4. Each type of input signal or transducer (such as a thermocouple or strain gage)
should be wired to its terminal block as shown in the figure. Wiring is shown for RTDs, thermocouples,
20 mA circuits, mV/V connections, and for full- and half-bridge strain gages.

DBK Option Cards and Module

967694

DBK42, pg. 3

WARNING
Shock Hazard! The DBK42 is designed to sense signals that may carry dangerous
voltages. De-energize circuits connected to the DBK42 before changing the wiring or
configuration.

P1 Connection. The DBK42 attaches to the P1 analog I/O connector or to a DBK200 series P4-Adapter
P1 analog I/O connector. (Up to 16 units can be attached to one LogBook or Daq device.) Connect theappropriate ribbon cable (with -x indicating the number of cards to be connected) from the LogBook,
Daq device, or adapter P1 port to the DB37 connector at the end of the option card.
Note: A series of interface cables are available for connecting up to sixteen DBK42s.

DBK42, pg. 4967694

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series Connections
DBK42 can be connected to the P1 connector of DaqBoard/2000 Series P4-adapters. Up to 16 units can be
attached to one DaqBoard/2000 Series board.
Connect the appropriate ribbon cable (with -x indicating the number of cards to be connected) from theadapter’s P1 port to the DB37 connector at the end of the option card.
Note: A series of interface cables is available for connecting up to 16 DBK42s.

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and ISA-Type DaqBoard Configuration

The DBK42 requires two setup steps in DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series devices and DaqBoards[ISA type]—jumpers JP1 and JP4.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in the expanded analog mode.
Note: This default position is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK42 via the internal±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power (DBK32A, or DBK33), you must remove
both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section of the manual.
Also, refer to the DBK32A and DBK33 sections as applicable.

2.

For DaqBook/100, /112, and /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in the DaqBook/100 & /200
or ISA-type DaqBoard in single-ended mode. Analog expansion cards convert all input signals tosingle-ended voltages referenced to analog common.

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No Jumper configurations are required for these /2000 series devices.

DBK Option Cards and Module

967694

DBK42, pg. 5

Software Setup
You will need to set several parameters so DaqView can best meet your application requirements.
After the 5B module type is identified, DaqView figures out the m and b (of the mx+b equation) for proper
engineering units scaling. An example of the mx + b equation follows shortly.
The mx + b calculations for most 5B modules are included within LogView software.

Reference Note:o
For DaqView information refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView and to the DaqView
PDF included on your data acquisition CD.
o
For LogView information refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView and to the LogView
section of the LogBook PDF included on your data acquisition CD.
o
The API includes functions applicable to the DBK42. Refer to related material in the
Programmer’s Manual (p/n 1008-0901) as needed.

PDF Note:

During software installation, Adobe® PDF versions of user manuals automatically install onto
your hard drive as a part of product support. The default location is in the Programs group,
which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop. Refer to the PDF documentation for
details regarding both hardware and software. Note that you can also access PDF documents
directly from the data acquisition CD via the <View PDFs> button on the CD’s opening
screen.

mX +b, an Example

The Customize Engineering Units dialog box can beaccessed via the DaqView Configuration main
window by activating the Units cell [for the desiredchannel], then clicking to select mX+b.
From the Customize Engineering Units dialog box(see figure at right), you can enter values for m and bcomponents of the equation that will be applied tothe data. There is also an entry field that allows you
to enter a label for the new units that may result fromthe mX+b calculation.

An example of mX + b equation use follows.

DBK42, pg. 6967694

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Engineering Units Conversion Using mx + b
Most of our data acquisition products allow the user to convert a raw signal input (for example, one that isin volts) to a value that is in engineering units (for example, pressure in psi). The products accomplish thisby allowing the user to enter scale and offset numbers for each input channel, using the software associatedwith the product. Then the software uses these numbers to convert the raw signals into engineering units
using the following “mx + b” equation:(1)

Engineering Units = m(Raw Signal) + b

The user must, however, determine the proper values of scale (m) and offset (b) for the application inquestion. To do the calculation, the user needs to identify two known values: (1) the raw signal values, and(2) the engineering units that correspond to the raw signal values. After this, the scale and offset
parameters can be calculated by solving two equations for the two unknowns. This method is made clear
by the following example.
ExampleAn engineer has a pressure transducer that produces a voltage output of 10.5 volts when the measured
pressure is 3200 psi. The same transducer produces an output of 0.5 volt when the pressure is 0 psi.
Knowing these facts, m and b are calculated as follows.
A - Write a pair of equations, representing the two known points:(2)3200 = m(10.5) + b(3)

0 = m(0.5) + b

B - Solve for m by first subtracting each element in equation (3) from equation (2):(4)

3200 - 0 = m(10.5 – 0.5) + (b - b)

(5)

Simplifying gives you:(6)3200 = m(10)m = 320

This means:

C - Substitute the value for m into equation (3) to determine the value for b:(7)

0 = 320 (0.5) + b(8)Therefore:b = - 160

Now it is possible to rewrite the general equation (1) using the specific values for m and b that we justdetermined:(9)

Engineering Units = 320(Raw Signal) - 160

The user can then enter the values of m and b into the appropriate location using the facilities provided bycompatible data acquisition software, for example: WaveView, DaqView, Personal DaqView, LogView, and
TempView. The software uses equation (9) to calculate signal values in engineering units from that pointon.

DBK Option Cards and Module

967694

DBK42, pg. 7

DBK42 – Specifications
Name/Function: 16-Slot 5B Signal Conditioning Module
Module Capacity: 16 (input only) 5B modules
Size: 8.5" × 11" × 3.5" (11" × 11" × 3.5" with optional CN-71 or CN-72)
Weight: 4 lb (with no modules installed)
Cable (optional): CA-37-1
Power Requirements: 10-24 VDC @ 2.6 - 0.3 A
With 16 thermocouple-type modules:
12 VDC @ 0.50 A
15 VDC @ 0.40 A
18 VDC @ 0.35 A
With 16 strain-gage type modules:
12 VDC @ 1.9 A
15 VDC @ 1.5 A
18 VDC @ 1.3 A
DC Input Fuse: 3A
Power Indicator: LED powered by internal 5 VDCPower Connection: DIN5 ×2 for daisy-chaining
AC Power Pack::
120 VAC to 15 VDC converter
120 VAC to 15 VDC @ 2.0 A (optional)
Input Connections: DIN96 rectangular, standard, screw terminal adapter (optional)
Connection: Male DB37 mates via CA-37-1 cable with P1
DC/DC Converter: 10-24 VDC to 5 VDC (isolated)
Isolation:

DBK42, pg. 8

Input Power to System: 500 VDC
Signal Inputs to System: 1500 VDC
Input Channel-to-Channel: 500 VDC

967694

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK43A and DBK43B

8-Channel Strain Gage Modules

Overview …… 1
Hardware Connection …… 3
Power Connection …… 3
Signal Connection …… 3

Hardware Configuration …… 4
Bridge Applications …… 5
AC Coupling and Low-Pass Filter Options …… 11
P1 Output Channel and Card Address Selection …… 12
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 12
DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 13

Hardware Adjustment …… 13
Trimpots …… 13
CAL/NORM, CAL1/RUN, and CAL2/RUN Switches …… 13

Software-Controlled Setup …… 14
Selecting Channel Types in DaqView, or <odes in LogView ……14
A Typical Setup Procedure with Embedded Examples ……16

GageCal, Calibration Program for DBK16, DBK43A, & DBK43B in Daq Applications ……21
Calibrating DBK16, DBK43A, & DBK43B for LogBook Applications ……25
Overview …… 25
Calibration Methods …… 26
Procedures Common to All Calibration Steps (Required) …… 27
Nameplate Calibration and Manual Calibration …… 30
Channel Calibration Procedure …… 33
2-Point Calibration …… 36
Shunt Calibration …… 38
Creating a Units Conversion Transfer Function …… 40
Periodic Calibration Without Trimpots …… 41

Specifications …… 42
Reference Notes:
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to the section Power
Requirements in the DBK Basics section located at the beginning of the manual.
o Chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts, includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, andP4. Refer to the pinouts that are applicable to your system, as needed.
Note: Due to flexibility in configuration, please review the entire section before attempting setup andoperation.

Overview
The DBK43A and DBK43B will condition signals from most bridge-circuit transducers that have a signal
output of less than 50 mV. Strain gages and load cells are common types. We will use the terms:
module(s), gage module(s), and strain gage module(s) to refer to both units, except when a feature orfunction is exclusive to a specific module.
Primary Differences between the DBK43A and DBK43B
•
•
•
•
•

Time Stamping – Can be used with DBK43B; Stamping should not be used for DBK43A*
Event Marking – Can be used with DBK43B; Marking should not be used for DBK43A*
Input Signal Connectors – DBK43A uses a mini-DIN6 connector for each channel.
DBK43B uses a removable screw terminal block for each channel.
Calibration Switches – DBK43B has a two calibration slide switches (CAL1 and CAL2). The
DBK43A has one CAL/NORM switch.
Power LED – The DBK43A and DBK43B have different locations for the Power LED.

*In DBK43A – Time Stamping and Event Marking result in erroneous readings at the time of the stamping or marking.

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 1

For half-bridge and quarter-bridge strain gages, the modules can accommodate usersupplied BCRs (bridge-completion resistors) that complete the bridge circuit. The bridge
circuit must be complete for the strain gage module to operate correctly.
Each channel of the strain gage module offers a selectable 3-pole, low-pass filter with a user-set cut-off
frequency. Remote-sense terminals are provided to make 6-wire Kelvin connections. Up to two modules
can be connected to each of 16 analog base channels for up to 256 input signals.

DBK43A and DBK43B Block Diagram
Note A: DBK43A uses Mini DIN-6 connectors for signal inputs. DBK43B uses removable screw-terminal blocks.
Note B: Channels 0 through 7 correspond with circuit board channels 100 to 800, as discussed in the Hardware
Configuration section.

Both strain gage modules provide an amplifier gain range of ×100 to ×1250 for use with strain gages having
0.4 to 10 mV/V sensitivities. Most strain gages are specified for a full-scale value of weight, force, tension,pressure, or deflection with an output of mV/V of excitation. For example, a strain gage with a full-scale rating of1000 lb of tension might output 2 mV/V of excitation at full load. With an excitation of 10 VDC, 1000 pounds ofload would produce an output of 20 mV.
The module’s 0 to 5 VDC offset and output-scaling permit nulling of large quiescent (inactive or motionless) loads
and expansion of the dynamic range for maximum resolution. Typically, the quiescent output is non-zero. Prior toa force being applied, a mounted strain gage can be in a state of partial deflection resulting in an output. In the caseof a tension gage, this output may be due to the weight of a hook or empty container.
The modules include an internal excitation voltage source. The wide-range excitation regulator is adjustable from
1.5 to 10.5 VDC with a current limit of 50 mA.

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 2899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Hardware Connection
Power Connection
The strain gage modules each require an input
voltage between +9 and +18 VDC. The DC
source should be filtered but not necessarily
regulated — a DBK30A Rechargeable
Battery/Excitation Module is recommended for
portable use. The DBK43A and DBK43B strain
gage modules have an isolated DC/DC converterbased power supply which provides all excitation
voltages and biasing for the amplifier circuits.
For both modules, each of eight on-board
excitation regulators can be adjusted from 1.5 to10.5 VDC. These outputs have remote sensing terminals and feature 50 mA current limiting to prevent
damage from short-circuit or overload. The regulators’ wide voltage range can accommodate any resistive
or semi-conductive gage type.
The DBK43A and DBK43B can be powered with an AC adapter or from any isolated 9-18 VDC source of
16 W (see figure). Before plugging unit in, make sure the power switch is in the “0” (OFF) position.
If using an AC power adapter, plug it into an AC outlet and attach the low voltage end to the jackon the DBK43A or DBK43B, as applicable.
If using a different 9 VDC to 18 VDC source, make sure the leads are connected to the proper
DIN terminals. Power connections for DBK43A and DBK43B are the same.

CAUTION
POWER IN : The power connectors are rated at 5 amps maximum DC current. The
power supply provided with the module can power the unit but not any auxiliary
devices. If using the unit’s power supply, do not use the POWER OUT terminal.
If using another power supply to power auxiliary devices from the POWER OUT
terminal, make sure that power supply is current-rated for the units connected(up to 5 amps DC).
POWER OUT : Maximum output current is 3 amps DC. Use a power supply capable ofsupplying 5 amps DC at POWER IN.

Signal Connection
CAUTION
The maximum channel signal input from plus Voltage (+V) to minus Voltage (-V) is
50 mV. There is no common-mode isolation between inputs (common-mode voltage
between inputs must be 0 V).
The following two figures (next page) each represent one of the 6-pin signal connectors located on theback of a DBK43A (left figure) and DBK43B (right figure). Both configurations are for a full-bridge withremote sensing.

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 3

DBK43A uses a mini-DIN6 connector with pre-defined wire color coding based on a CA-132 cable. Colorcoding of wires for DBK43B is user-defined.
Pin 1

Pin 2

Pin 3

Pin 4

Pin 5

Pin 6

DBK43A- Sense- Exc.

-V+V+ Exc.

+ SenseDBK43B+ Sense- Sense+V-V+ Exc.

- Exc.

DBK43A Connection Example
Full-Bridge with Remote Sensing*Colors in this schematic are determined by the Mini-DIN6
connector pin and the color code of the CA-132 cable.

DBK43B Connection Example
Full-Bridge with Remote Sensing
Colors in this schematic are arbitrary.
Actual wiring color is user defined.

The connectivity aspect of DBK43A and DBK43B differs, as indicated in the two wiring
diagrams. Be sure to use the correct diagram for your specific hardware.
The DBK43B pinout and diagram above supersede the one found in the DBK Option Cards
and Modules User’s Manual rev 8.2.

Hardware Configuration
Factory Defaults:
Bridge configuration: Full
Coupling: DC
Low pass filter: Disabled (bypassed)
Unless special arrangements have been made, the cutoff frequency is disabled (bypassed) when
the strain gage module is shipped from the factory. If the low pass filter is enabled it will have adefault value of 3.7 Hz.* You can enable the low pass filter [on an individual channel basis] byorienting the associated channel’s Filter Jumper (JP104 for channel 0 through JP804 for channel
7) to the vertical position. Refer to the following board layout in regard to jumper location andorientation.
*DBK43A and DBK43B are shipped with a 100 kΩ resistor in each of eight channel filter locations. The
resistors are installed in locations R105-106-107 through R805-806-807 (for channels 0 through 7
respectively). Refer to the following board layouts.

Configuration options:
Bridge Applications using various bridge-completion resistors and jumpers
AC Coupling and Low-Pass Filter Options
P1 Output Channel and Card Address Selection
The following board layout can be referred to for jumper, switch, and resistor locations.

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 4899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

CH7
Power
LED

CAL1 CAL2

CH6

CH5

CH4

CH3

CH2

CH1

CH0

DBK43B Board (Rear Panel Section)**

DBK43B (Rear Panel)**** With exception of the rear panel area, the DBK43B has the same board layout as the DBK43A. On the DBK43B the PowerLED is located between the Power switch and the Power In connector. Another difference is that the DBK43B has a two
calibration slide switches (CAL1 and CAL2). The DBK43A has one CAL/NORM switch. In regard to channel connectors,
DBK43B employs removable screw terminal blocks; DBK43A uses mini-DIN6 connectors.
DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 5

Bridge Applications
There are several ways to hook-up strain gages—all are configured into a 4-element bridge (the 4 legs in a
bridge circuit). The quarter-, half- or full- designation for a strain gage refers to how many elements in thebridge are strain-variable.
quarter bridges - have 1 strain-variable element
half bridges - have 2 strain-variable elements
full bridges - have 4 strain-variable elements
DBK43A and DBK43B boards include a silkscreen pictorial aid, as indicated in the following figure. On
the boards, the image appears between the channel inputs and Headers H100 through H400.

FULL BRIDGEDEFAULT

FULL BRIDGEWITH REMOTE
EXCITATION SENSING

3 WIRE QUARTER
BRIDGE

3 WIRE QUARTER
BRIDGEFULL BRIDGEWITH REMOTESHUNT CAL RESISTOR

On-Board Silkscreen Aid for Configuring Jumper Headers H100 through H800.
Each channel of the strain gage module has locations for bridge-completion resistors when using quarterand half-bridge strain gages. These resistors are fixed values necessary to fill out the 4-element bridge
configuration.
The following is a standard symbol for a 4-element bridge type strain gage. The figure makes use ofbridge-completion resistor designations for a module’s channel.
Any or all of the 4 resistive elements may be strainvariable. Where an element is a fixed resistor, thefixed resistor may be installed in the internal location
provided. Note that n is the channel number +1.
For an internal resistor on channel 7, the location is
R800E.
If R1-R4 is a fixed resistor it may be placed internally in the Rnlocations on the resistor plug. “n” is the channel number + 1.
R1 = Rn00F; R2 = Rn00C; R3 = Rn00E; R4 = Rn00B.
Example: R3 in channel 7 = R800E location.

Bridge Completion Resistors

Connections are provided for Kelvin-type excitation.
The excitation regulators stabilize the voltage at the
points connected to the on-board sampling dividers.
Unless you run separate sense leads to the excitation
terminals of the strain gage, the voltage regulation ismost accurate at the terminal blocks on the DBK43A
or DBK43B. In a Kelvin-type connection, six wires
run to a 4-element strain gage, and the excitation
regulation is optimized at the strain gage rather than at
the terminal blocks. This connection works with aslittle as 10 feet of 22 gauge lead wire if accuracy is
critical. (See Full-Bridge with Remote Excitation
Sensing Configuration in full-page figure.)
Kelvin-type Excitation Leads

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 6899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

The Kelvin connection using the remote sensing lines performs best when the entire bridge is localized(no bridge-completion resistors inside the DBK43A or DBK43B) and all leads are contained in a multiconductor cable. If individual wire leads are used, the two sense wires should be tightly twisted to form apair. Likewise, the two excitation wires and the two bridge-output wires should be twisted together).
The internal excitation source is attached to a voltage regulator in the strain gage module’s circuitry. The
regulator provides the excitation to the actual transducer (there is a separate regulator for each transducer,
hence 8 regulators per strain gage module). Each regulator has a maximum current of 50 mA. The
maximum excitation voltage that can be provided by the module’s excitation regulator is:
VMAX[EXC] = 0.05 × R(where R = the resistance in ohms of 1 element in the bridge circuit).

CAUTION
Setting the excitation voltage above the maximum voltage allowed can cause theDBK43A or DBK43B to fail. The maximum allowable excitation voltage is determinedby the following equation.
VMAX[EXC] = 0.05 x R
R is the resistance in ohms of 1 element in the bridge circuit.
The following full-page figure shows various strain-gage configurations.

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 7

Bridge Configuration Settings for DBK43A and DBK43B

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 8899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Input Configuration Headers
Eight 2×6 pin-headers with pin numbers 1 to 12 are on the board, 1 for each channel designated H100 (channel 0) to
H800 (channel 7). The user can position jumpers on this header to configure inputs from a variety of bridge types.
Jumping header pins 1-to-2 and 3-to-4 connects the +Vin and -Vin to the calibration MUX for different
bridge configurations.
Jumping pins 5-to-7 and 9-to-11 allows internal sense regulation of the excitation regulator.
Jumping pins 5-to-6 and 11-to-12 allows for remote excitation sensing.
Jumping pin 10-to-12 allows the use of a remote shunt-calibration resistor.
See previous figure for header configurations that correspond with different bridge-wiring schemes.

Resistor Sockets and Adapter Plugs
Eight 2×8 resistor sockets with rows numbered A to H are on the board; 1 socket for each channel and designatedR100 (channel 0) to R800 (channel 7). An adapter plug for soldering resistors is included for each channel; usersoldered plugs facilitate changing configurations as needed.
Bridge-completion resistors include: Rn00B, Rn00C, Rn00E, and Rn00F. Resistors Rn00A and Rn00G areused to complete 3-wire strain-gage configurations.
Rn00D and Rn00H are internal shunt resistors from +V in and -V in respectively to -excitation.
Match the proper row as shown in the figure, Bridge-Configuration Settings
for DBK43A and DBK43B (previous page).
DO NOT just insert resistors into sockets. Such connections are unreliable.
To achieve a reliable connection, solder resistors to the adapter plug
Soldering should be done with the plug inserted into the resistor socket;
otherwise, heat from soldering can distort the shape of the plug.
After soldering, the resistor leads should be snipped off close to the support
to prevent contact with other components.
Handle the adaptor plugs with care to prevent pin damage.

Shunt-Calibration Resistors
DBK43A and DBK43B provide physical locations for internal shunt-calibration resistors. Each channel has resistor
locations that can be shunted across one or the other of the lower bridge arms by a hardware and software-accessible
solid state switch (FET transistor) to create a repeatable bridge imbalance with a precision resistor.
For any balanced bridge, a resistance value can be applied in parallel with one of the four bridge elements to createa predictable imbalance and output voltage. For example, a 350Ω 2mV/V strain gage will deliver full output if one
arm drops by 0.8% (about 2.80Ω) to 347.2Ω. A 43.4 KΩ resistance shunted across one or the other lower bridge
elements will result in full-positive (Rn00H) or full-negative (Rn00D) output. For best results, Rn00H and Rn00D
should be across the strain element when it is switched in.

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 9

A formula used to calculate the shunt-cal resistance value is:

RShunt = [RGage / FG(ε) ] - RGage
Where:

RShunt = the shunt calibration resistor value
RGage = the resistance of the gage
FG = the gage factor
ε = the strain value of the gage
Example:An engineer wants to know the shunt calibration resistor value for a strain gage with the following
parameters.
resistance: 120 Ω
gage factor: 2.0
strain: 5000 micro-strain, i.e., 5000 x 10-6
Plugging the values into the equation, we get:

RShunt = [RGage / FG(ε) ] - RGage= [120 / 2.0(5000 x 10-6)] - 120= [120 / .01] – 120= 12000 – 120= 11,880 Ω
In all cases, the resistance of the solid-state switch will be negligible when compared to the shunt
resistance. Changing the CAL/NORM switch (on the rear panel) to the CAL position while reading thebridge will activate the shunt-calibration resistors. After reading the offset, return the switch to the NORM
position for normal bridge readings.

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 10899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

AC Coupling and Low-Pass Filter Options
Per channel, the strain gage modules each accommodate coupling and low-pass filter options including:•

AC-coupling or DC-coupling•

Using or bypassing the filter•

Choice of the filter’s corner frequency via a SIP resistor network•

Filter gain (default of ×2 can be changed to ×1).

The AC-coupling or DC-coupling choice on each channel is set by the presence orabsence of shunt jumpers on 2-pin headers. If the shunt jumper is in place, thecoupling is DC. If the shunt jumper is absent, the coupling is AC. See table forchannels and corresponding headers.

Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Header
JP103
JP203
JP303
JP403
JP503
JP603
JP703
JP803

The choice of using or bypassing the low-pass filter for each channel is made by theorientation of two shunt jumpers on a 2×2 pin header. When the shunt jumpers areoriented horizontally (like the “bypass” symbol on the circuit board) the filter is
bypassed. When the shunt jumpers are oriented vertically (like the “filter” symbol),the filter is in the signal path.

Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Header
JP104
JP204
JP304
JP404
JP504
JP604
JP704
JP804

Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Resistors
R105-R106-R107
R205-R206-R207
R305-R306-R307
R405-R406-R407
R505-R506-R507
R605-R606-R607
R705-R706-R707
R805-R806-R807

Resistance (Ω)
10
20
50
100
200
500
1K
2K
5K
10K
20K
50K
100K

Bourns P/N
4606X-102-100
4606X-102-200
4606X-102-500
4606X-102-101
4606X-102-201
4606X-102-501
4606X-102-102
4606X-102-202
4606X-102-502
4606X-102-103
4606X-102-203
4606X-102-503
4606X-102-104

The corner frequency of a low-pass filter is determined by three resistor
values in each filter circuit. The resistors are listed in the following table.
These resistor locations have been physically arranged to allow the use of a
6-pin SIP network as a convenient means of changing all 3 resistors. The
machined-pin socket will also allow you to insert individual resistors.

The next table is a list of some common frequencies, thenominal resistance value, and a Bourns part number for asuitable network.

Frequency
133kHz66.7kHz
26.6kHz
13.3kHz
6.67kHz2.66kHz
1.33kHz
667Hz
266Hz
133Hz
66.7Hz26.6Hz13.3HzThe active low-pass filters have a gain of ×2. This gain can be factored into the setup
calculations, or the filter gain can be changed to ×1. To change the gain to ×1 (unity)
for the corresponding channels, de-solder (or snip leads) and remove the resistors
shown in the table.
Note: The default ×2 gain option meets the needs of most applications.

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

R (10K)
R144
R244
R344
R444
R544
R644
R744
R844

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 11

P1 Output Channel and Card Address Selection
All 8 channels on the strain gage module are multiplexed into 1 of the LogBook or Daq Device basechannels (0 to 15). The base channel (that the DBK43A or DBK43B is multiplexed into) is set by theshunt jumper on the 16×2 header designated JP1.
Each base channel can have up to 16 expansion channels multiplexed into it. Since the strain gage module
represents 8 expansion channels, two modules can be multiplexed into each LogBook base channel. To
distinguish channels, there is a 3-pole header (designated J2) with a shunt jumper that can be placed in oneof two positions for either LOWER (0 to 7) or UPPER (8 to 15) expansion channels.
With the LogBook or Daq device’s 16 base channels, up to 32
DBK43A [or DBK43B] modules can be used for a maximum of 256
channels. These channels are identified differently in the API for
custom programming and in DaqView and GageCal.
For the API, the base channels are designated 0 to 15; and expansion
channels are designated 16 to 271. Channel 16 is the first channelon the first expansion board (for DBK43A and DBK43B channel 0
on lower module with JP1 set to CH0) and channel 271 is the lastchannel on the last expansion board (for DBK43A [and DBK43B],
channel 7 on upper module with JP1 set to CH15). The table shows
the base channel and the first expansion channel number (N)associated with that particular base channel. To calculate the actual
input channel, add “N” to “n”. (If J2 is set to LOWER, the n-values
for input channels 0 to 7 range from n = 0 to n = 7; if J2 is set to
UPPER, the n-values range from n = 8 to n = 15.) This expansion
channel number is also needed when writing a program to read fromthat particular channel.

Daq Device
Base
Channel
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

First Expansion
Channel Number (N)
16
32
48
64
80
96
112
128
144
160
176
192
208
224
240
256

For DaqView , LogView and GageCal, these same 256 channels are identified from ch0-0-0 to ch15-2-7.
The first field (0 to 15) is the base channel; the second field is the lower (1) or upper (2) sub-channel
selected on J2; and the third field (0 to 7) is the 8 channels on a single DBK43A or DBK43B module.
Reference Note:
For more information on channel multiplexing, refer to Chapter 1, Signal Management.

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of the DBK43A or DBK43B requires setting jumpers in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices

and ISA-type DaqBoards.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper in the expanded analog mode.

Note: This default position is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK43A [or DBK43B]
via the internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power (DBK32A or DBK33), youmust remove both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Management in the DBK Basics section [at thefront of the manual] and to the DBK32A and DBK33 document modules as needed.

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 12899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

2.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112 and DaqBook/120, place the JP4 jumper in single-ended mode

Note: To use a DBK43A [or DBK43B] with a Daq PC-Card, you must an appropriate power module must
be used.

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No Jumper configurations are required for these /2000 series devices.

Hardware Adjustment
Bridge circuit transducers are used for many different applications, and the DBK43A and DBK43B
modules are flexible enough to support most of them. Each channel circuit has an excitation regulator, ahigh gain (100-1250) input amplifier with offset adjustment, a low-pass filter, a scaling (1-10) amplifier,and a calibration multiplexer.

Trimpots
The front of the strain gage modules have a slot to allow access to 4 potentiometers to trim (adjust) the
accuracy for each channel circuit. The trimpots are labeled to represent the following adjustments:
EXC
for adjusting the excitation voltage to the transducer
GAIN

for setting the gain of the input amplifier

OFFSET for adjusting the circuit offset for quiescent loads or bridge imbalance
SCALE

for setting the gain of the scaling amplifier
Channel Number

Trimpot
CH0

CH1

CH2

CH3

CH4

CH5

CH6

CH7

EXC

TP101

TP201

TP301

TP401

TP501

TP601

TP701

TP801

GAIN

TP104

TP204

TP304

TP404

TP504

TP604

TP704

TP804

OFFSET

TP103

TP203

TP303

TP403

TP503

TP603

TP703

TP803

SCALE

TP105

TP205

TP305

TP405

TP505

TP605

TP705

TP805

The following figure shows trimpot locations for both the DBK43A and DBK43B.

Trim Pot Locations

CAL/NORM, CAL1/RUN, and CAL2/RUN Switches
DBK43A has a single CAL/NORM switch. DBK43B has two switches, CAL1/RUN and CAL2/RUN.
The switches are easy to see on the rear panel of the associated DBK module.
•

The NORM and RUN positions are for normal running operations, as indicated in the following
tables.

•In the CAL position, the shunt calibration offset and the excitation voltage can be read depending on
the software function control. This is discussed in the next section.

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 13

Software-Controlled Setup
Proper setup includes the use of software to control the calibration multiplexer in each circuit. The calibration
multiplexer is used to switch the bridge circuit out and apply internal reference voltages to the input for use in
the DBK43A or DBK43B setup. The calibration multiplexer also allows the recording of the individualadjustments.
The next two tables identify functions available through DaqView and LogView, respectively. Note that
DaqView uses the term “Channel Type;” and LogView uses the term “Mode.” The tables include equations
in which “VOUT” (voltage out) represents the voltage recorded by the primary data acquisition device, i.e., a
LogBook, DaqBook, DaqBoard, or other Daq device.

Selecting Channel Types in DaqView, or Modes in LogView
Reference Notes:
Typical setup steps with embedded examples begin on page 16 of this DBK43 document.
The steps can be used for both LogBook and Daq device applications.

Selecting Channel Type for DBK43A
In DaqView

Selecting Channel Mode for DBK43A
In LogView

DBK43A Channel Types and Modes - Switch Positions
Channel Type
1(Mode)

1

CAL/NORM
SwitchFunction and Associated VOUT Equation

NORM

Sets the channel to read the value of the bridge circuit with all gains and offsets in effect. This is the normal
operation.

Offset(SetOffset)

NORM

Applies a grounded input to the channel. Sets the channel to read the circuit offset voltage multiplied by the
input amplifier and the low-pass filter gain.

Input Gain
(SetInputGain)

NORM

Applies 5 mV to the input channel. Sets the channel to read the voltage out of the circuit through the input
gain amplifier and the low-pass filter [if enabled].

Scaling Gain
(SetScalingGain)

NORM

Applies 5 mV to the input channel. Sets the channel to read the voltage out of the circuit through the input
gain amplifier, the low-pass filter [if enabled], and the scaling gain amplifier.

Excitation

CAL

BridgeVout = (Scaling Gain)(Filter Gain*)[(InputGain)(bridge circuit voltage) - offset voltage]

Vout = (Filter Gain*)(Input Gain) - offset voltage

Vout = (Filter Gain*)(Input Gain)(5 mV) - offset voltage

Vout = Filter Gain*(Scaling Gain[(Input Gain)(5 mV) - offset voltage])
Sets excitation.
Vout = (Excitation Voltage)

Shunt Cal

CAL

Activates shunt-cal resistors.
Vout = (Scaling Gain)(Filter Gain*)[(Input Gain)( bridge circuit voltage with shunt) - offset voltage]

DBK43A has one CAL/NORM switch. The “Up” position puts the switch in the “calibration” state. The “Down” position puts theswitch in the “Run” (Normal) state. DBK43B has two switches; for that module refer to the following table.
*In the equations, the asterisk indicates the conditional clause, “if the filter is enabled.”
1

DaqView uses the term “Channel Type.” LogView uses the term “Mode.” In the first column the “type” and “mode” names areoften the same for DaqView and LogView. When there are differences the LogView “Mode” name appears in parenthesis, forexample (SetInputGain) is LogView’s mode equivalent of DaqView’s “Input Gain.”

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 14

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK43B Channel Types and Modes - Switch Positions
Channel Type
1(Mode)1

CAL1
SwitchCAL2
SwitchRUN(Down)

RUN(Down)

BridgeFunction and Associated VOUT Equation
Sets the channel to read the value of the bridge circuit with all gains and offsets ineffect. This is the normal operation.
Vout = (Scaling Gain)(Filter Gain*)[(InputGain)(bridge circuit voltage) - offset voltage]

Offset(SetOffset)

RUN(Down)

Input Gain
(SetInputGain)

RUN(Down)

Scaling Gain
(SetScalingGain)

Applies a grounded input to the channel. Sets the channel to read the circuit offset
voltage multiplied by the input amplifier and the low-pass filter gain.

CL2
(Up)

Vout = (Filter Gain*)(Input Gain) - offset voltage
Applies 5 mV to the input channel. Sets the channel to read the voltage out of thecircuit through the input gain amplifier and the low-pass filter [if enabled].

CAL2
(Up)

Vout = (Filter Gain*)(Input Gain)(5 mV) - offset voltage
RUN(Down)

Applies 5 mV to the input channel. Sets the channel to read the voltage out of thecircuit through the input gain amplifier, the low-pass filter [if enabled], and the scaling
gain amplifier.

CAL2
(Up)

Vout = Filter Gain*(Scaling Gain[(Input Gain)(5 mV) - offset voltage])
Excitation

Shunt Cal

CAL1
(Up)

CAL2
(Up)

CAL1
(Up)

CAL2
(Up)

Sets excitation.
Vout = (Excitation Voltage)
Activates shunt-cal resistors.
Vout = (Scaling Gain)(Filter Gain*)[(Input Gain)( bridge circuit voltage with shunt) offset voltage]

DBK43B has two switches: CAL1/RUN and CAL2/RUN. DBK43A only has one switch; for that module refer to the previous
table.
* In the equations, the asterisk indicates the conditional clause, “if the filter is enabled.”
1

DaqView uses the term “Channel Type.” LogView uses the term “Mode.” In the first column the “type” and “mode” names
are often the same for DaqView and LogView. When there are differences the LogView “Mode” name appears inparenthesis, for example (SetInputGain) is LogView’s mode equivalent of DaqView’s “Input Gain.”

DBK43B - Notes regarding CAL1 and CAL2
Mode

CAL1

CAL2

Comments

RUN &SET BRIDGE

RUN(Down)

RUN(Down)

Unlike the DBK43A, this run mode for the DBK43B allows for timestamping and event marking without signal error. Both switches“down” adds a grounded input to the channel and sets the channel
to read the circuit offset voltage multiplied by the input amplifier
and the low-pass filter gain.

CAL1
(Up)

RUN
(Down)SET INPUT GAIN,SET OFFSET, &SET SCALING GAIN

RUN
(Down)CAL2(Up)

SET EXCITATION &SET SHUNT CAL

CAL1
(Up)

CAL2
(Up)

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

Not used. An invalid switch position.
Would simulate a DBK43A run mode. Used for setting input gain,
scaling gain, or offset.
With both switches up, the calibration mode is enabled. The
mode is identical to that of the DBK43A when its single
CAL/NORM switch is positioned to “CAL.”DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 15

A Typical Setup Procedure, with Embedded Examples
Reference Notes:
Prior to using DBK43A or DBK43B with DaqView, you must select the module from
DaqView’s Configure Hardware Settings screen. If needed, refer to Chapter 3, DBK
Setup in DaqView.
Prior to using DBK43A or DBK43B with LogView, you must select the module from
LogView’s Hardware Configuration screen. If needed, refer to Chapter 4, DBK Setup in
LogView.
The board layouts in this DBK section can be referred to for jumper locations, jumper
setting orientations, and trimpot locations.
For Calibration – DaqView users should refer to the GageCal segment beginning on page
21 of this section. LogView users should refer to the section titled Calibrating DBK16,
DBK43A, and DBK43B for LogBook Applications, beginning on page 25.
1.

Verify that the low-pass filters are set to BYPASS. The filters are set via jumpers JPn04 where n is
the channel number (1 through 8); for example, JP104 sets the filter for channel 1, and JP804 sets thefilter for channel 8.
Note:

2.

If you plan to use filters during your acquisition, you should still select BYPASS at thispoint. Enabling the filters comes into play later in the procedure. However, if you do plan
to enable filters, note the gain in the filter stage (default ×2, or ×1 with resistor removed)
and allow for it in your setup.

Coupling is set via jumpers JPn03 where n is the channel number (1 through 8). Verify that the“Coupling” jumpers are installed. When installed, the channels are set for DC coupling.
Note:

If you plan to use AC Coupling during your acquisition, you should still select DC
Coupling at this point. Selecting AC Coupling comes into play later in the procedure.

3.

Determine the excitation for the transducer. This is based on the transducer specifications and fromthe current limitations of the DBK43 module’s excitation regulator.

4.

Determine the maximum voltage that can result from the transducer for a strain gage or for a loadcell. The values can be calculated as follows:
Strain Gage Example
Most strain gages come with Gage Factors (GF). To calculate the approximate output of the bridge
circuit with a typical strain value, use the formula:( Excitation Voltage)(Gage Factor)(Strain in strain units)= *Bridge circuit output voltage
4

In this strain gage example, lets assume the following:• We have a 120 ohm strain gage.
• The gage factor is 2.1.
• The excitation voltage is 5 V. This is due to the current limitation of the excitation regulator
on the DBK43 module [note that the excitation voltage must be less than 6 V]
• We are measuring 4000 micro-strain
By applying these values to the preceding equation we find that the bridge output voltage is 10.5 mV.
-6Bridge output voltage for 4000 microstrain =(5)(2.1)(4000 × 10 )4

= 10.5 mV*linear estimate (some strain gages are not linear); refer to strain-gage theory for more information.

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 16

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Load Cell Example

Load cells come with a mV/V specification; for each volt of excitation at maximum load, the loadcell will output a specific millivolt level. The following equation applies:
Load Cell Output Voltage = (LoadApplied/LoadRated)(Excitation Voltage)(Load Cell Rating)

For this example, lets assume the following:• We have a 350 ohm, 3000 pound load cell.
• The load cell is rated at 2.05 mV/V
• We are using an excitation of 10 V
By applying these values to the preceding equation we find that the Load Cell Output Voltage
is 20.5 mV.
Load Cell Output Voltage = (3000/3000)(10)(2.05×10-3) = 20.5 mVFor 1000 pounds applied load, the Load Cell Output Voltage would be one third of the 20.5 mVvalue, i.e., 20.5 mV/3 = 6.833 mV. If we used the entire equation we would see:
Load Cell Output Voltage = (1000/3000)(10)(2.05×10-3) = 6.833 mV

Now that we know our sensor’s full-scale voltage, we can calculate the DBK43 module’s voltage
gain. The proper voltage gain allows the full-scale sensor output to correspond to the full-scale inputof the data acquisition device. Full-scale device inputs are:-5 to +5 V for DaqBook and DaqBoard [ISA type] in bipolar mode
0 to +10 V for DaqBook, DaqBoard [ISA type], and DaqBoard/2000 Series
in unipolar mode
-10 to +10 V for DaqBoard/2000 Series in bipolar mode and for Daq PC-Card-10 to +10V for LogBooks in bipolar mode
0 to +20 V for LogBooks in unipolar mode5.

Calculate the channel total gain based on the full-scale LogBook or Daq device.
The following equation is used to calculate DBK43 total gain.
GainTOTAL = (Sensor Output VoltageFULL-SCALE – VoltageOFFSET) / Strain or Load VoltageOUTPUT

In this example we will use:
• a full-scale sensor output voltage of +5 V [for a DaqBook in bipolar mode].
• a 0.5 V offset (from full-scale) to prevent saturation• the 10.5 mV Bridge Output Voltage [for 4000 microstrain] from Example 1.
Using the gain equation we get:
GainTOTAL = (5.0 V – 0.5 V) / 10.5 mV = 4.5 V / 0.0105 V = 428.6
6.

Determine how the total gain will be distributed between the input amplifier gain, filter gain, andscaling amplifier gain.
An Example of Total Gain Distribution: If we round the gain of x428.6 [calculated in the previousstep] down to ×420, then the gain distributions indicated by the following table are possible.
Gain Distribution Options for a Total Gain of x420
Gain Stage &Associated Range

Possible Gain Distributions

Option A

Option B

Option C

Option D

×420

×100

×240

×300

Filter Gainx1 or x2

Disabled

×2

×1

Disabled

Scaling Gainx1 to x10

×1

×2.1

×1.75

×1.4

×420

×420

×420

×420

Input Gainx100 to x1250

Total Gain

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 17

After we decide on a distribution option, the sensor can be hooked up to the DBK43 module, thebridge completion resistors can be installed, the excitation voltage set, followed by setting the gains.
In this example we will be using DaqView. Steps for other programs will be similar.
7.

Connect the transducer to the DBK43 module according to the figures in the Signal Connection(page 3) and Bridge Applications (page 5). Install the appropriate bridge-completion resistors if
applicable.

8.

Adjust the Excitation voltage.
Note: For DaqView versions 5.05 and higher the reading will already be correctly scaled.
(a) DBK43A users: Place CAL/NORM switch to “CAL.”DBK43B users: Place CAL1 and CAL2 “Up.”(b) DBK43A users:LogView users set the software CAL/NORM switch, in Hardware
Configuration, to “CAL.”DBK43B users: LogView users set the software switch parameter to 1’CAL+2’CAL.
(c) Select “Excitation” for the Channel Type.
(d) With the Reading column enabled, set the excitation voltage for the transducer by adjusting
the trimpot labeled EXC. Note that each of the eight channels has a channel-specifictrimpot for excitation.
(e) After the excitation voltage is set, stop the Readings.
(f) DBK43A users: Return the CAL/NORM switch to the NORM position.
DBK43B users: Return CAL1 to RUN “Down” and CAL2 “Up” (CAL).
(g) DBK43A users: LogView users set the software CAL/NORM switch to “NORM.”DBK43B users: LogView users set the software switch parameter to 1’RUN+2’CAL.
9. Adjust the Offset.
(a) DBK43A users: Place CAL/NORM switch in the NORM position.
DBK43B users: Place CAL1 “Down” (RUN) and CAL2 “Up (CAL.).
(b) DBK43A users: LogView users verify that the software CAL/NORM switch is selected to“NORM.”DBK43B users: LogView users verify the software switch parameter is set to
1’RUN+2’CAL.
(c) DaqView user’s: select “Offset” for the Channel Type.
LogView users: select “SetOffset” for the Mode.
(d) With the Reading column enabled, adjust the OFFSET trimpot (OFST) to obtain a channel
reading of 0.00 volts. This removes all offset from the DBK43 module’s channel circuit.
Note that each of the eight channels has a designated, channel-specific, trimpot for offset.
(e) After the Offset is adjusted to 0.00, stop the Readings.
10. Adjust the Input Gain.
(a) DBK43A users: CAL/NORM switch remains in the NORM position.
DBK43B users: Position CAL1 “Down” (Run) and position CAL2 “Up.”(b) DaqView users: select “Input Gain” for the Channel Type.
LogView users: select “SetInputGain” for the Mode.
(c) With the Reading column enabled, adjust the GAIN trimpot to obtain a voltage reading
equal to 0.005 x GI, where “GI” is the desired input amplifier gain. Note that each of theeight channels has a channel-specific trimpot for Input Gain.
(d) Stop the Readings.
For very high system gains you may need to first, set the Input Gain low, then set the Scaling
Gain, and then reset the Input Gain.

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 18

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Typical input gain settings are shown in the following table.
Input Gains and Typical Readings
Input Gain

Readingx100

0.5 volts

x200

1.0 volts

x300

1.5 volts

x400

2.0 volts

x500

2.5 volts

x600

3.0 volts

x700

3.5 volts

x750

3.75 voltsx800

4.0 volts

x900

4.5 volts

x1000

5.0 volts

x1200

6 volts ** requires primary acquisition device to be in unipolar mode.
11. Adjust the Scaling Gain.
(a) DBK43A users: CAL/NORM switch remains in the NORM position.
DBK43B users: CAL1 remains “Down” (Run) and CAL2 remains “Up.”(b) DaqView users: select “Scaling Gain” for the Channel Type.
LogView users: select “SetScalingGain” for the Mode.
(c) With the Reading column enabled, adjust the SCALE trimpot (SCA) for a voltage reading
equal to .005 x GI x GS, where “GI” is the desired input amplifier gain and “GS” is thedesired scaling amplifier gain. Note that each of the eight channels has a channel-specific,
trimpot for Scaling Gain.
(d) Stop the Readings.
Scaling Gains Typical with an Input Gain of x200
Scaling Gain
x2
x4
x6
x8
x10

Reading
2.0 volts
4.0 volts
6.0 volts*
8.0 volts*
10.0 volts** requires primary acquisition device to be in unipolar mode.
12. Adjust the Offset while the bridge circuit is being read.
(a) DBK43A users: CAL/NORM switch remains in the NORM position.
DBK43B users: CAL1 remains “Down” (Run). Position CAL2 “Down” (Run).
(b) Select “Bridge.”(c) With the Reading column enabled, and with the quiescent (normal or inactive) load or strain
applied, adjust the OFFSET trimpot for a reading of 0.00 volts. This adds offset to thecircuit to compensate for the quiescent load and allows maximum resolution for themeasurement.
(d) After adjusting the Offset to 0.00, stop the Readings.
The Offset adjustment is unipolar 0 to 5 V on the input amplifier output. If the Offset can
not be adjusted to 0.00 V at the end of the setup procedure, swap the Vin+ (4) and Vin- (3)wire connections, or reduce the Input Gain and increase the Scaling Gain.
13. If required for your application, enable the low-pass filters. The filters are set via jumpers JPn04
where n is the channel number (1 through 8); for example, JP104 sets the filter for channel 1, andJP804 sets the filter for channel 8.
14. If required for your application, set AC Coupling. Coupling is set via jumpers JPn03 where n is thechannel number (1 through 8). To set AC Coupling, remove the JPn03 jumpers.
DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 19

15. Calculate the LogBook or Daq device voltage/transducer units. Do this using the transducer
specifications and the total gain of the DBK43 module’s channel. Apply the units to your readings.
16. Verify the software settings by using a known load or strain and comparing the value to thatobserved in DaqView’s Reading column.
Note:

Gain adjustments can be made by activating a shunt-cal resistor that is calculated to be at
maximum load.
To enable shunt-cal resistors:(a)Select “Shunt Cal” as the Channel Type.
(b)DBK43A users: Set CAL/NORM switch to CAL.
DBK43B users: Place CAL1 and CAL2 “Up.”(c)DBK43A users: LogView users: set the software CAL/NORM switch, in Hardware
Configuration, to “CAL.”DBK43B users: : LogView users verify the software switch parameter is set to
1’CAL+2’CAL.
Settings can be verified via shunt-calibration.
After the final offset is made, the gain readings will be incorrect unless the circuit
offset is removed.

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 20

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

GageCal, Calibration Program for DBK16, DBK43A, and DBK43B in Daq Applications
GageCal is intended for DBK16, DBK43, DBK43A, and DBK43B load cell applications inconjunction with Daq devices.
GageCal is not used for LogBook applications.

GageCal is a calibration aid for use with DBK16, DBK43, DBK43A, and DBK43B devices that are being
used in Daq device data acquisition systems. The program, which is independent of DaqView, provides anon-screen walk-through for setting jumpers, switches and adjusting trimpots.
With GageCal you can:
• Use a graphic representation of a strain-gage board as a guide to configure switches, jumpers,
and other hardware settings.
• Enter all the parameters pertaining to your strain gage application.
• Follow step by step prompting to adjust trimpots for scale gain, input gain, and offset to ensure
the channel provides the desired input range.
GageCal is installed from the Master Setup screen of the data-acquisition CD-ROM as part of the
DaqBook/DaqBoard Support option. After your DaqBook/DaqBoard support has been installed you canaccess and use GageCal as follows.
1.

Access GageCal from a desktop shortcut, or by navigating from the desktop as follows:
Start ⇒ Programs ⇒ IOtech DaqXSoftware [or Omega DaqXSoftware] ⇒ GageCal
A Select Device window will appear, similar to that shown in the following figure.

GageCal – Select Device

2.

From the Select Device window, highlight the applicable DaqBook or DaqBoard, thin clickthe <OK> button. The Strain Gage Calibration window will appear.

GageCal’s Strain Gage Calibration Window

3.

DBK Option Cards and Module

Click the <AddCard> button. Then select one of the following, as applicable:
DBK16, DBK43, DBK43A, or DBK43B. See following figure.

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 21

Selecting DBK43A

4.

Click the <OK> button. The Strain Gage Calibration window will provide 3 digit channel
numbers in the form of “n1-n2-n3;” where n1 is the card number, n2- is the bank number on thecard, and n3 is the channel number. See following figure.

Strain Gage Calibration Window after Adding a Card

5.

Click the <Calibrate> button. An Applications Parameter box appears. See following figure.

Application Parameters for Channel 0-0-0

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 22

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

6.

7.

Select the type of calibration to be performed, i.e., Nameplate, Two-Point, or Shunt. Then
edit the Application Parameters, if applicable. A brief description of the three calibration
methods follows. When done, click the <Continue> button.
•

Nameplate calibration provides a way to enter parameters for your strain gage
and its application. The final step of the procedure includes attaching the strain
gage (load cell).

•

Two-Point calibration provides a way to calibrate a DBK16, DBK43,
DBK43A, or DBK43B that is using a strain gage with unknown specifications.
In this method, the user enters two points of transducer output [milli-volts] vs.
engineering units, e.g., pounds. GageCal provides set up instructions based on
the parameters entered. The final step of the procedure includes attaching thestrain gage (load cell).

•Shunt calibration provides a means calibrating channels with use of usersupplied shunts to simulate a physical load. With this method, 1 or 2 shunt
resistors (Rn00D and Rn00H) are added for each of the 8 channels to becalibrated. You must set J3 to the position closest to TP9 for the shuntcalibration to work correctly. Shunt calibration is performed with the load-cellattached.

Follow GageCal’s screen prompts to complete the calibration.

Example Screen Shot from GageCal
Note: You can use GageCal’s “Diagnostics” feature to view a graphic representationof the strain gage and the card’s gain stages.

GageCal Diagnostics

8.

DBK Option Cards and Module

After completion, go to DaqView and convert ±5 V to engineering units using mx+b.

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 23

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 24

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Calibrating DBK16, DBK43A, or DBK43B for LogBook Applications
Overview …… 25
Calibration Methods …… 26
Procedures Common to All Calibration
Steps (Required) ……27
Nameplate Calibration and
Manual Calibration ……30

Channel Calibration Procedure ……33
2-Point Calibration ……36
Shunt Calibration ……38
Creating a Units Conversion Transfer Function ……40
Periodic Calibration Without Trimpots ……41

Overview
Calibrating a strain gage channel includes:
One-time adjusting of the bridge excitation.
One-time tuning of the electronic gains and offset via trimpots to maximize performance anddynamic range.
Applying a transfer function to the voltage output to convert it to engineering units, e.g., pounds,
kilograms.
Executing a software scale and offset adjustment periodically to maintain accuracy.

Example of a Unit Conversion from Voltage to Pounds

The trimpots provide course tuning so large quiescent offsets can be nulled and the bridge signal can beamplified to match the A/D input range. Once these adjustments are made, the operator can periodicallyfine-tune the calibration via software using LogView’s 2-Point calibration feature. LogView’s scale andoffset features provide a simple means to apply a transfer function that converts the voltage to user units,
for example, pounds, as in the above block diagram.
Bridge circuit transducers are used for many different applications, and the strain gage signal conditioning
modules are flexible enough to support most of them. Each channel circuit has an excitation regulator, ahigh gain (x100 to x1250) input amplifier with offset adjustment, a low-pass filter, a scaling (x1 to x10)
amplifier, and a calibration multiplexer.
By using software-controlled multiplexers, on-board reference voltages can be read by the data acquisition
system so that precise gains and offsets can be set. LogView provides a means of easily controlling thecalibration multiplexers so that the reference voltages can be displayed while the trimpots are being
adjusted.

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 25

There are four trimpots to set up each channel circuit. The trimpots are labeled to represent the following
adjustments:•

EXC - for adjusting the excitation voltage to the transducer•

GAIN - for setting the gain of the input amplifier•

OFFSET - for adjusting the circuit offset for quiescent loads or bridge imbalance•

SCALE - for setting the gain of the scaling amplifier

Signal-FlowRelationship of Software Controlled Multiplexers and On-Board Reference Voltages

This calibration procedure can only be executed while LogBook is attached to a PC thatis running LogView.
To adjust trimpots, use one of the following calibration methods, as appropriate.

Calibration Methods
Several different calibration techniques are supported by strain gage signal conditioning modules.
Calibration methods include; Nameplate, 2-Point, Shunt, and Manual. From the following discussion,
select the calibration method that is best for your application.

Nameplate – Used to setup the channel using the transducer’s published specs.
Nameplate calibration is typically used with packaged load cells with millivolt-per-volt (mV/V) transfer
functions. Using the mV/V spec of the load cell or a strain gage’s Gage Factor (GF), the necessary system
gain can be calculated and applied to a channel.

2-Point – Used to setup the channel using 2 known loads, one of which might be “no load.”
The 2-Point calibration method requires the operator to apply two known loads to the load cell or strain
gage, one at a time, while the data acquisition system takes measurements. Typically, the first point is withno load applied and the second point is close to the maximum load capacity of the gage. While measuring
the first point the offset is nulled, and while measuring the second point the gain is adjusted to span the
majority of the input range of the A/D. No gain calculations are required to perform this calibration
method.

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 26

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Shunt – Used to setup the channel using a shunt resistor applied to the bridge to simulate a load.
Shunt calibration is identical to 2-Point calibration except that the second point is simulated so that
applying a load near the gage’s maximum load is unnecessary. To simulate a bridge imbalance, a shunt
resistor is placed across one leg of the bridge. Once the shunt resistor value has been calculated, it isapplied to the bridge to provide the desired simulated load. No gain calculations are required to perform
this calibration method.

Manual – Used to assign specific gains and offsets.
If a particular gain and offset are already known, these values can be used to setup a strain gage channel.

Procedures Common to All Calibration Steps (Required)
Set the Selected Channel(s) to DC Coupling
Since the applied calibration-signals are DC, set DC coupling for all the channels that are being adjusted.
If your application requires AC coupling, don’t forget to remove the jumpers when the adjustment
procedure has been completed.

Determine Channel Parameters
Before adjusting the trimpots, the excitation needs to be determined. Typically, the supplier of the gage ofload cell will recommend a suitable value, but make sure that the maximum output current of the excitation
regulator is not exceeded.

Initialize LogView
Launch LogView and use the LogBook Hardware Configuration window (hardware tree) to configure allof the DBK options that are to be used in the system. If needed, refer to the LogView chapter of the
LogBook User’s Manual (p/n 461-0901).

LogBook Hardware Configuration, Button and Screen

Open the Analog Input Channel Configuration Window. Click the User Scaling Tab and verify that all of
the strain gage channels that are to be adjusted have scale and offset values of 1 and 0, respectively.

Analog Input Channel Configuration Window, Button and Screen … “User Scaling” Tab Selected

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 27

For all of the strain gage channels that are to be adjusted, set their ranges to +5V.
Click the DBK Parameters tab to expose the strain gage signal conditioning programmable settings.
Click the Attach button to substantiate a connection between the PC and the LogBook.

Adjust the Excitation - DBK16

For DBK16, set the excitation voltage for the transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled EXC andmeasuring the voltage with a voltmeter across the +EXC and -EXC on the bridge or at the terminals of thesignal conditioning module.
Adjust the Excitation-

DBK43A - DBK43B

DBK43A and DBK43B are equipped with a switch that allows the excitation voltage to be read by the
LogBook and displayed in LogView. For a DBK43A orDBK43B to be adjusted, you must:
1.

DBK43A users: Reposition the DBK43A’s “physical” calibration switch to the CAL position.
DBK43B users: Position DBK43B’s CAL1 and CAL2 to the calibration position.

2.

Select CAL in LogView. Open the LogBook Hardware Configuration window and select theappropriate DBK43A (see following figure).
DBK43A users: In the Configurations settings box, set the CAL/NORM Switch to CAL. If the
DBK43A is not displayed click the + to the left of the base channel (to which it is attached), this action
expands the hardware tree in the LogBook Hardware Configuration window. Repeat this process for
all DBK43A units that are to be adjusted. Click OK to lock in the changes.
DBK43B users: In the Configurations settings box set the software switch parameter to

1’CAL+2’CAL.
Setting a DBK43A Cal/Norm Switch to “CAL”

3.

In the Param1 column (see next figure for location), select all of the DBK43 channels that are to be
adjusted.

4.

Set Mode equal to Excitation from the drop down list (located above the DBK Parameters tab).

5.

Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels that are to be adjusted.

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 28

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Selecting “Mode = Excitation” for DBK Parameter 1
Note: The Param2 column will show two switch positions for DBK43B applications.

6.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

7.

Select Indicators \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the
excitation values for each channel.

Selecting “Enable Input Reading Column”(from the Indicators Pull-Down Menu)

8.

Set the excitation voltage for each transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled EXC for the
associated channel while reading their values in LogView.

9.

Select Indicators \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar.

Selecting “Disable Input Reading Column”(from the Indicators Pull-Down Menu)

10. DBK43A users: Return the physical calibration switches (of the applicable DBK43As) to the
NORM position.
DBK43B users: Return CAL1 to RUN (Down); and CAL2 to CAL (Up).

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 29

11. DBK43A users: In LogView, open the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window (hardwaretree) and select NORM for each DBK43A.
DBK43B users: In LogView, open the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window (hardwaretree) and select RUN for the CAL1 switch and select CAL for CAL2.

This completes the section entitled: “Procedures Common to All Calibration Steps (Required)”Nameplate Calibration and Manual Calibration
To properly calibrate a strain gage channel using the Nameplate method, the required gain must first be
calculated. If the desired gain and offset are already know [as in the Manual calibration method] skip to
the section, Determining the Gain of Each Amplification Stage.
The following examples outline the necessary steps for determining the required gain for
Nameplate calibration. Both strain gage and load cell examples are provided.

Calculating the Required Gain
Determining a Strain Gage’s Maximum Output Voltage
Most strain gages come with Gage Factors (GF) used to calculate the approximate output of the bridge
circuit with a typical strain value. The formula is:
VBR = (VEXC * G * S * B) / 4[See following important notice.]

Where: VBR = Bridge output voltage
VEXC = Excitation Voltage
G = Gage Factor
S = Strain in user units (in uStrain)
B = Configuration factor (1 for ¼ bridge, 2 for ½ bridge, 4 for full bridge)
The equation, VBR = (VEXC * G * S * B) / 4 produces a linear estimate. If you areusing a non-linear strain gage you should refer to strain gage theory for additional
information as needed.

For a 120 ohm strain gage with a gage factor of 2.1 and excitation voltage of 5 V, applying
4000 microstrain would produce an bridge output of 10.5mV for a ¼ bridge configuration.
VBR = (5 * 2.1 * 4000x10-6) / 4 = 10.5 mV
Determining a Load Cell’s Maximum Output Voltage
Load cells come with a mV/V specification—for each volt of excitation at maximum load, the load cell
will output a specific millivolt level.
VLC = R * VEXC

Where: VLC = Load cell output voltage
R = Load cell spec (mv/V)
VEXC = Excitation voltage

Consider a 3000 pound load cell rated at 2.05 mV/V using 10 V of excitation (assume a 350Ω load cell).
When 3000 pounds is applied, the voltage out of the load cell is 20.5mV.
DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 30

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

VLC = (10 * 2.05×10-3) = 20.5 mV

If 1000 pounds were applied, we would see 6.833 mV. This is arrived at as follows:(1000/3000) * 10 * 2.05×10-3 = 6.833 mV
Using the Calculated Maximum Voltage to Determine the Necessary Gain
To maximize the resolution and dynamic performance of the system, the sensor’s output should be
amplified to correspond to the data acquisition system’s input range.

Using the LogBook’s +5V input range, the required gain is calculated by dividing 5V by the maximum
output voltage of the sensor. Before performing the calculation, it is typically a good idea to pad the
maximum sensor voltage by about 5% so that, once amplified, it won’t bump into the limit of the 5V range.
G = VLB / (VGO + VGO * 5%)

Where: G = Gain
VLB = LogBook input range
VGO = Maximum gage output

For the strain gage in the previous example with a maximum output of 10.5mV, the required gain is:
G = 5.0V / (0.0105V + 0.0105V * 0.05) = 453.5
For the above load cell with a maximum output of 20.5mV, the required gain is:
G = 5.0V / (0.0205V + 0.0205V * 0.05) = 232.3

Determining the Gain of Each Amplification Stage

The system’s total gain is:
GT = GI * GF * GS

Where: GT = Total gain
GI = Input amplifier gain
GF = Filter gain
GS = Scaling amplifier gain
DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 31

Note: Maximum gain calibration is x1000 for +5V range.

The majority of the gain should be assigned to the Input Amplifier, with the Scaling Amplifier used forfine-tuning. If the filter is enabled, a gain of x2 is automatically introduced.
The input amplifier has a gain range of ×100 to ×1250; the filter gain ×1 or ×2; and the scaling amplifier
has a range of ×1 to ×10. For the strain gage example, if we round off our gain to ×420, any of these
possible settings will work.

Option A

Option B

Option C

Option D

Input Gain

×420

×100

×240

×300

Filter Gain (enabled)No

Yes (×2)

Yes (×2) *See Note

No

Scaling Gain

×1

×2.1

×1.75

×1.4

Total Gain

×420

×420

×420

×420

For Option C, the LPF gain is typically x2.
For gains of x1 (if the filter is enabled), the following apply:

DBK16 - For a gain of x1 (if the filter is enabled),10KΩ resistors R44 and R46 must have beenpreviously removed (for the low and high channels, respectively).
DBK43A and DBK43B - For a gain of x1 (if the channel filters are enabled), removal of thefollowing 10 KΩ resistors applies: Ch0 – R144, Ch1 – R244, Ch3 – R444, Ch4 – R544,
Ch5 – R644, Ch6 – R744, Ch7 – R844.

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 32

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Channel Calibration Procedure
Adjust the Offset
The following steps are used to adjust the offset.
1.

In the Param1 column (see page 29 for location), select all of the DBK43A channels that are
to be adjusted.

2.

Select Mode = SetOffset from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands
the calibration multiplexer to route the 0.0V reference through the entire analog path (seefollowing figure).

“Mode = Offset” 0.0 Volt Reference is Routed

3.

Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels that are to be
adjusted.

4.

Click the Download button. This sends the current configuration to the LogBook.

5.

Select Indicators \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar. This displays the offset
values for the enabled channels.

6.

Set the offset voltage to 0.0V for each transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled OFFSET
for the associated channel.

7.

Select Indicators \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar.

Adjust the Input Amplifier Gain
Perform the following steps to adjust the Input Amplifier Gain.
1.

In the Param1 column (see page 27 for location), select all of the DBK43A channels that are
to be adjusted.

2.

Select Mode = SetInputGain from the drop down list above the grid. This selectioncommands the calibration multiplexer to route a 5mV reference through the Input Amplifierand bypass the Scaling amplifier (see following figure).
Note: If the filter is enabled (not bypassed) accommodate an additional x2 gain stage.

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 33

“Mode = SetInputGain,” 5 milli-Volt Reference Route3.

Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels that are to be
adjusted.

4.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

5.

Select Indicators \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the values foreach channel.

6.

For the associated channel, set the voltage to [GI * GF * 0.005] for each transducer by
adjusting the trimpot labeled GAIN. Use the Input Amplifier Gain (GI ) calculated earlier.
Note: If the filter is enabled, the filter gain (GF ) is 2; otherwise GF = 1.
Example 1: If GI = 250 and the filter is disabled; the GAIN
trimpot would be adjusted to obtain 1.25V.
Example 2: If GI = 250 and the filter is enable; the GAIN
trimpot would be adjusted to obtain 2.50V.

7.

Select Indicators \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar.

Adjust the Scaling Amplifier Gain
Adjust the Scaling Amplifier Gain as follows:1.

In the Param1 column (see page 27 for location), select all of the DBK43A channels that are
to be adjusted.

2.

Select Mode = SetScalingGain from the drop down list above the grid. This selectioncommands the calibration multiplexer to route a 5mV reference through all of theamplification stages as shown below.

“Mode = ScalingGain,” 5 milli-Volt Reference Route
DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 34

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

3.

Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A channels that are to be
adjusted.

4.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

5.

Select Indicators \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the values foreach channel.

6.

For the associated channel, set the voltage to [GT * 0.005] for each transducer by adjusting
the trimpot labeled SCALE. Use the total system gain (GT ) calculated earlier.
Example: If GT = 435.5, the SCALE trimpot would be adjusted to obtain 2.17 V.

7.

Select Indicators \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar.

Trimming Bridge Quiescent Load
Most bridges have some level of offset, even if no quiescent load is present. In quarter and half bridge
situations, use of 1% bridge completion resistors can cause up to 1mV/V of offset. If the bridge has 4mVof offset and the Input Amplifier is set to x100, the Offset potentiometer would need to nullify 400mV.
DBK16 – For DBK16s, the Offset Potentiometer can adjust out 0 to +5V of offset amplified by the
Input Amplifier.
DBK43A and DBK43B – For these two modules, the Offset Potentiometer can adjust out -1.25 to +5V ofoffset amplified by the Input Amplifier.

Trimming Bridge Quiescent Load

If a significant amount of quiescent offset is present and the Input Amplifier gain is set too high, theOffset Potentiometer will not have enough range to adequately nullify the offset. In this case, the gain of
the Input Amplifier must be reduced while the gain of the Scaling Amplifier is increased proportionately.
Use the following steps to trim bridge quiescent load (unload the bridge).
1.

DBK43A users: Place the unit’s physical switch to NORM position.
DBK43B users: Place the physical CAL1 and CAL2 switches to the RUN position.

2.

In the Param1 column (see page 27 for location), select all of the DBK43A [or DBK43B]
channels that are to be adjusted.

3.

Select Mode = Bridge from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands thecalibration multiplexer to route the transducer output through the analog path as shown
below.

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 35

“Mode = Bridge,” Reference Route3.

Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A [or DBK43B] channels thatare to be adjusted.

4.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

5.

Select Indicators \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the offset
values for each channel.

6.

For the associated channel, set the offset voltage to 0.0V for each transducer by adjusting thetrimpot labeled OFFSET.
Note: If you are unable to nullify the quiescent offset of the bridge, your Input Amplifier
gain may be too high. Information regarding gain redistribution can be found in thesection entitled, Determining the Gain of Each Amplification Stage.

7.

Select Indicators \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar.

2-Point Calibration
This 2-point calibration method makes use of trimpot adjustments. It should not be
confused with the LogView software 2-Point Calibration (discussed in the LogView
chapter in the LogBook User’s Manual).

In the 2-Point calibration method, the user places two known loads on the gage, one at a time, then adjust
the trimpots until the expected value is reached. Typically, the first of loads is “no load.” In the case of aweight scale, the scale would first be unloaded to adjust the offset, then a known load (near maximum
expected) would be applied to adjust the gain.
Shunt calibration (discussed immediately after this 2-Point Calibration section) is the same as the 2-Point
method, except the second load is applied in a simulated fashion by shunting 1 leg of the bridge with ashunt resistor. Shunt calibration is preferred in cases where applying a real load (near the maximum
expected) is not practical.

Initialize the System

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 36

1.

DBK43A users: Verify that the unit’s physical switch is in the NORM position.
DBK43B users: Verify that the unit’s physical CAL1 and CAL2 switches are both in the
RUN position.

2.

Download a single setup and continuously display data in LogView. The continuous display
can remain throughout the procedure since the calibration multiplexers do not need reset
between steps.

3.

In the Param1 column (see page 29 for location), select all of the DBK43A [or DBK43B]
channels that are to be adjusted.
899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

4.

Select Mode = Bridge from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands thecalibration multiplexer to route the transducer voltage through the analog path.

5.

Turn off all the channels in the system, except for those DBK43A [or DBK43B] channels thatare to be adjusted.

6.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

7.

Select Indicators \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the offset
values for each channel.

Adjust the Offset
For the associated channel, apply the first calibrated load to each gage (typically no-load) and set thevoltage to 0.0V for each transducer. This is accomplished by adjusting the trimpot labeled OFFSET. If thefirst point is actually a calibrated load, you will need to move the load to each gage, one at a time, to adjust
its associated offset.

Adjust the Input and Scale Amplifier Gain
Complete the following steps to adjust the channel gain.
1.

Apply the second load to each gage channel. The value of this load should approximate thatof the maximum expected load. For the best results, a gain should be selected so that thebridge’s maximum output equals 90% of the A/D’s input range.

2.

Calculate the desired voltage for the second point using the following equation:
VD = (LA/LM) * VI * 90%

Where: VD = Desired voltage for 2nd point of calibration
LA = Applied load used in calibrating the 2nd point
LM = Maximum load expected during usage
VI = Input voltage range
Example: The load standard that will be applied to the gage as the 2nd point in the 2-Point
calibration is 100lbs. The maximum expected load during usage is 150lbs.
The programmable input range of the data acquisition system is set for +5V.
The desired output voltage of the strain gage signal conditioning electronics is:
VD = (100/150) * 5 * 0.90 = 3V

In this example, we should adjust the GAIN and SCALE trimpots until a value of 3V ismeasured.
If 150 lbs is applied to the gage, a voltage of 4.5V will be measured.
VD = (150/150) * 5 * 0.90 = 4.5V

3.

Apply the second calibrated load to each gage and set the voltage to VD, as derived in step 2.
Do this for each transducer by adjusting the trimpots labeled GAIN and SCALE for the
associated channel. Note that the GAIN trimpot provides most of the amplification (course
adjustment), while the SCALE trimpot allows for fine-tuning.

Repeating the Process
Since adjusting the gain for the first time will have an affect on the offset, it is recommended that offset and gain adjustment be performed twice for each channel.

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 37

Shunt Calibration
Shunt calibration is virtually identical to the 2-Point method just discussed, except that the second point issimulated. The simulated load is achieved by shunting one leg of the bridge with a shunt resistor. Shuntcalibration is the preferred calibration method when applying a real load (of a value approximating the
maximum expected load) is not practical. To adjust the channel gain, the shunt must be applied to thebridge.
Calculate and install the necessary shunt resistor before continuing.
DBK43A has direct support for shunt calibration, accommodating theresistor in its enclosure and allowing the software to apply it when requested.
DBK16 does not have direct support, so the shunt resistor must be appliedexternally and switched in manually.

Adjust the Offset
1.

DBK43A users: Verify that the unit’s physical switch is in the NORM position.
DBK43B users: Verify that the unit’s physical CAL1 and CAL2 switches are both in the
RUN position.

2.

In the Param1 column, select all of the DBK43A [or DBK43B] channels that are to be
adjusted.

3.

Select Mode = Bridge from the drop down list above the grid. This selection commands thecalibration multiplexer to route the transducer voltage through the analog path.

4.

Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A [or DBK43B] channels thatare to be adjusted.

5.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

6.

Select Indicators \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the offset
values for each channel.

7.

For the associated channel, apply the first calibrated load to each gage (typically no-load) andset the voltage to 0.0V for each transducer by adjusting the trimpot labeled OFFSET.

If the first point is an actual calibrated load, you must move the load to each gage, one at atime, to adjust its associated offset.

Adjust the Input and Scale Amplifier Gain
For the best results, a gain should be selected so that the bridge’s maximum output equals 90% of the
A/D’s input range.
1. Use the following equation to calculate the desired shunt voltage (VD).
VD = (Ls/LM) * VI * 90%

Where: VD = Desired voltage from the after amplification when the shunt is applied
Ls = Simulated load produced by shunt
LM = Maximum load expected during usage
VI = Input voltage range
Example: The simulated load produced by the shunt 100lbs. The maximum expected load during
usage is 150 lbs. The programmable input range of the data acquisition system is set
for +5V. The desired output voltage of the strain gage signal conditioning electronics
is: VD = (100/150) * 5 * 0.90 = 3V

In this example, we would adjust the GAIN and SCALE trimpots until a value of 3V
is measured. If 150lbs is applied to the gage, a voltage of 4.5V will be measured.
VD = (150/150) * 5 * 0.90 = 4.5V
DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 38

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

For DBK16, only … Externally apply the shunt resistor and set the voltage to VD, as derived above for eachtransducer. This is done by adjusting the trimpots labeled GAIN and SCALE for the associated channel.
The GAIN trimpot is used for course adjustment; and the SCALE trimpot for fine-tuning.
For DBK43A only … For each DBK43A to be adjusted, move the physical switch from NORM to CAL.
For DBK43B only … For each DBK43B to be adjusted, move the two physical switches from RUN to
CAL1 and CAL2 respectively.
2.

In LogView, open the LogBook Hardware Configuration window and select the DBK43A.

LogBook Hardware Configuration, Button and Screen

3.

Select the DBK43A [or DBK43B] from the LogBook Hardware Configuration window’s hardware
tree.

4.

Set the list box to the right to CAL. If the DBK43A [or DBK43B] is not displayed click the + to theleft of the base channel to which it is attached to expand the hardware tree.

Setting a DBK43A Cal/Norm Switch to “CAL”

5.

Repeat this process for each DBK43A [or DBK43B] that is to be adjusted.

6.

Click OK to lock in the changes.

7.

Open the Analog Input Channel Grid. In the Param1 column (see page 27 for location), select all of
the DBK43A [or DBK43B] channels that are to be adjusted. Select Mode = Shunt from the drop
down list above the grid. Turn off all the channels in the system except for those DBK43A [orDBK43B] channels that are to be adjusted.

8.

Click the Download button to send the current configuration to the LogBook.

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 39

9.

Select Indicators \ Enable Input Reading Column from the menu bar to display the excitation
values for each channel.

10. Set the voltage to VD, as derived above, for each transducer. This is accomplished byadjusting the trimpots labeled GAIN and SCALE for the associated channel. The GAIN
trimpot provides for course adjustment. The SCALE trimpot provides for fine tuning.
11. Select Indicators \ Disable Input Reading Column from the menu bar.
12. DBK43A users: Return the physical NORM/CAL switches to the NORM position.
DBK43B users: Return CAL1 and CAL2 to the RUN position.
13. DBK43A users: In LogView, open the LogBook Hardware Configuration window and returneach DBK43A to NORM.
DBK43B users: In LogView, open the LogBook Hardware Configuration window and returneach DBK43B to a software switch parameter status of: 1’RUN+2’RUN.
14. Change the mode to Bridge.

Repeating the Process
Since adjusting the gain for the first time will have an affect on the offset, it is recommended that
offset and gain adjustment be performed twice for each channel.

Creating a Units Conversion Transfer Function
To make the data from your gage more useful, it should be recorded in terms of units appropriate to yourapplication, such as pounds, kilograms, inches, mm, or Hg. A transfer function is needed to convert volts tothese more meaningful units.
For this purpose, LogView provides a means of assigning a mathematical scale and offset to each channel.
Scale and offset information from that chapter has been repeated below for convenience.

In User Scaling, you can create a transfer function. The function allows LogView to display units that could
be more useful to you than volts. For example, you could obtain readings with pounds as the designated Units.
The reading (in pounds) will be based on the raw input value, typically Volts, and the indicated Scale and Offset
adjustment.
To create the transfer function:
1.

Type the desired unit name in the Units column.

2.

Select an appropriate range (e.g. unipolar).

3.

Enter the linear scale relation to Volts (e.g. 25 pounds per Volt).

4.

Enter any offset from 0, for example, an empty basket used in an
application reads 0.1 V.

The reading and range columns will automatically change to the adjusted values.

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 40

899892

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Periodic Calibration Without Trimpots
Once the trimpots have been adjusted during initial installation, periodic trimming can be performed
through LogView’s 2-Point software calibration. The LogView procedure does not require the use oftrimmpots and should not be confused with the 2-point method discussed in this section of the manual.
Refer to the LogView chapter in the LogBook User’s Manual for information regarding 2-point calibration
via software.

DBK Option Cards and Module

899892

DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 41

Specifications - DBK43A and DBK43B Strain Gage Modules
The following specifications apply to both strain gage modules, with exception to the connectors, as noted.
Name/Function: Strain-Gage Module
Connectors:
DBK43A: P1 DB37; mini-DIN6 for strain-gage or external excitation connections
DBK43B: P1 DB37; removable screw terminal blocks for strain-gage or external excitation connections
Number of Channels: 8
Excitation Voltage Adjustment Ranges: 1.50 to 10.50 VDC @ 50 mA
Input Gain Range: ×100-1250; separate instrumentation amplifier for each channel with gain adjustable via
externally accessible 15-turn trimpot
Accommodated Bridge Types:
Full bridge, Kelvin excitation (6-wire)
Full bridge (4-wire)
Half bridge (3-wire)
Quarter bridge (3-wire)
Bridge-Completion Resistors: On-board resistor socket locations (Rn00A, Rn00B, Rn00C, Rn00E, Rn00F,
and Rn00G) for 6 bridge-completion resistors per channel
Input Type: Differential
Input Impedance: 100 MΩ || 100 pF
CMMR: 115 dB (DC to 60Hz)
Excitation Current Output: 50 mA max (current limited @ 60 mA)
Excitation Sensing: Local or remote
Excitation Regulation
Line Regulation: 0.01% typical 0.1% max
Load Regulation: 0.03% typical 0.2% max
Gain Calibration Reference: 5 mVDC
Gain Calibration Reference Accuracy: 0.2%
Gain Calibration Reference Drift: 20 ppm/°C
Gain Accuracy: 0.5%
Gain Drift: 50 ppm/°C
Input Offset: 40 µV typical 200 µV max (offset adjustable to zero)
1

Input Offset Drift: 1 µV/ºC typical 4 µV/°C max

Output Offset: 2mV typical 8mV max (offset adjustable to zero)1

Output Offset Drift: 100 µV/°C 200 µV/°C max

Offset Adjustment: 0-100% of range, 0-5 VDC (15-turn trimpot)
Full-Scale Sensitivity Range
5.00 VDC Excitation: 0.8-10 mV/V
10.00 VDC Excitation: 0.4-5 mV/V
Scaling Amplifier Gain Range: ×1-10 (15-turn trimpot)
Low-Pass Filter:
3-pole, user-selected
Corner frequency (Fc) set by user component
Attenuation -3 dB at Fc
Gain ×2
Power: 9 to 18 VDC, external supply provided, 16 Watts maximum

Note 1: Total drift (referred to input) is: Input Offset Drift +DBK43A & DBK43B, pg. 42

899892

Output Offset Drift
Input Gain (as set by trimpot )DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK442-Channel 5B Signal-Conditioning Card
Overview ….. 1
Hardware Setup ….. 2

Power Considerations ….. 2
Card Configuration ….. 3
5B Module Connection ….. 3
Terminal Block Connection ….. 4P1 Connection ….. 4
CE Compliance ….. 5
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 5
DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 6

Software Setup ….. 6
mx+b Values for 5B Modules ….. 7
DBK44 – Specifications ….. 7
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.
Reference Note:
Users of the DBK44 signal-conditioning card may be interested in the DBK207 and DBK207/CJC,
Carrier Boards for 5B Compatible Analog I/O Modules. Each DBK207 and DBK207/CJC board
includes a 100-pin P4 connector for DaqBoard/2000 Series and /2000c Series compatibility, two P1
connectors for analog expansion, a power connection terminal, and 16 signal terminal blocks. In
addition, the DBK207/CJC board includes CJC (Cold Junction Compensation) for thermocouple
applications. DBK207 and DBK207/CJC can be mounted in Nema-type panels.

Overview
The 2-channel DBK44 allows LogBook or Daq device systems to use any combination of 5B signalconditioning modules. 5B modules can accommodate a variety of signals (low-level thermocouple signals
to strain-gage signals, etc). Configuration options are flexible. You can select the type of signal attachedto each channel. One LogBook or Daq device can support up to 128 DBK44 cards, providing up to 256
isolated, analog input channels.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

877095

DBK44, pg. 1

The LogBook or Daq device scans the DBK44’s channels at the same 10 µs/channel rate as other DBKs
(256 scans in 2.56 ms in a full system). Each user-installed 5B module offers 500 V isolation from thesystem and between channels. The DBK44 has convenient screw-terminal blocks for signal inputs andexcitation outputs (for use with a strain gage or RTD). Cold junction compensators (CJC) are installed andready to use with thermocouple 5B modules. Sockets are provided for AC1362 current-sense resistor
modules.

Hardware Setup
Power Considerations
The DBK44 requires +5 and ±15 VDC from a LogBook, Daq device P1
connector, or auxiliary power supply. In some applications, the DBK44 can draw
enough power from the LogBook’s internal power supply via the P1 connector.
However, the 5B power requirements (+5 VDC only) may be greater than the
LogBook or DaqBook/DaqBoard can provide (see table).
For applications with more than 4 channels, it may be better to use
the DBK42 instead of the DBK44. The DBK42 is a 16-channel
module with a built-in power supply.
External power can be obtained from any regulated 5 V source or from aTR-4 power supply. External power attaches to the DBK44 via onboard
screw-terminal connections (the Auxiliary Power Input J9 Combicon
terminal at the rear of the board).

5B
Current
Model
Required
5B30
30 mA
5B31
30 mA
5B32
30 mA
5B34
30 mA
5B37
30 mA
5B38
200 mA
5B39*170 mA
5B40
30 mA
5B41
30 mA
5B47
30 mA
* Maximum output load
resistance is 750 Ω

The 5B38 series strain-gage modules with excitation output require an external powersource. Auxiliary power is also necessary in systems equipped with more than one DBK44.
Prior to using auxiliary power, you must select AUXL on the Power Source Select Jumper(J10).

CAUTION
Auxiliary power input must not exceed +5 VDC. DBK44 does not regulate auxiliary
power input.

DBK44, pg. 2877095DBK Option Cards and Modules

Card Configuration
Up to 128 DBK44s may connect to a LogBook or a Daq device system. Since this is adaisy-chain interface, each module must appear unique and use a different analog input
channel. To configure the card’s channel, you must set the JP1 jumper and theSW1 DIP switch to your chosen channel as follows.
1.

Locate the 16×2-pin header (labeled JP1) near the front of the card. Note the
16 jumper locations labeled CH0 through CH15 to match the main channel.

2.

Place the JP1 jumper on the channel you wish to use. Only one jumper isused per card, but up to 8 DBK44s can occupy one main channel and use thesame JP1 setting (but with different SW1 settings).

3.

Locate the SW1 DIP switch that serves as a channel group select switch andcan distinguish up to 8 cards on a channel.

4.

Place the 3 mini switches (CBA) in the position that corresponds to yourchosen channel as shown in the table below. For each JP1 setting, there
are 8 possible SW1 settings to allow two input channels per card).
Channel Pair Determined by JP1 and SW1

JP1
Jumper

CBA
000
16-17
32-33
48-49
64-65
80-81
96-97
112-113128-129
144-145
160-161
176-177
192-193
208-209224-225240-241256-257

CH0
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15

CBA
001
18-19
34-35
50-51
66-67
82-83
98-99
114-115130-131146-147
162-163
178-179
194-195
210-211226-227242-243258-259

CBA
010
20-21
36-37
52-53
68-69
84-85
100-101
116-117132-133
148-149
164-165
180-181196-197212-213228-229244-245260-261

SW1 DIP Switch Setting
CBA
CBA
011
100
22-23
24-25
38-39
40-41
54-55
56-57
70-71
72-73
86-87
88-89
102-103104-105
118-119120-121134-135
136-137
150-151
152-153
166-167
168-169
182-183
184-185
198-199200-201
214-215
216-217230-231232-233
246-247248-249262-263264-265

CBA
101
26-27
42-43
58-59
74-75
90-91
106-107122-123138-139154-155
170-171
186-187202-203218-219234-235
250-251266-267

CBA
11 0
28-29
44-45
60-61
76-77
92-93
108-109124-125140-141
156-157
172-173
188-189204-205220-221236-237
252-253268-269

CBA
111
30-31
46-47
62-63
78-79
94-95
110-111126-127
142-143
158-159
174-175
190-191
206-207222-223238-239254-255
270-271

5B Module Connection
Each input of the DBK44 is processed through a user-installed 5B signal-conditioning module. Different
5B modules are used with different transducer and signal sources. To install the modules:
1.

Remove all power from the DBK44.

2.

Match the footprint of the module with the footprint on the circuit board (see figure).

3.

Gently place the module into the footprint, and screw it down.

4.

Record the channel the module was placed in.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

877095

DBK44, pg. 3

When installing current input modules (SC-5B32 series), be sure to install the current-sense resistor(SC-AC-1362 shipped with the SC-5B32) in the resistor socket (J4 for ch 0, J3 for ch 1) near the input
screw-terminal block (see figure).

Terminal Block Connection
WARNING
Shock Hazard! De-energize circuits connected to the DBK44 before changing thewiring or configuration. The DBK44 is designed to sense signals that may carrydangerous voltages.
Input signals (and excitation leads) must be wired to the DBK44 via the 4-contact terminal blocks at theend of the card. These terminal blocks connect internally to their corresponding signal conditioning
module. The terminal blocks accept up to 14-gage wire into quick-connect screw terminals that are labeled
as to their function. Each type of input signal or transducer (such as a thermocouple or strain gage) should
be wired to its terminal block as shown in the figure. Wiring is shown for RTDs, thermocouples, 20 mA
circuits, mV/V connections, and for full- and half-bridge strain gages.

P1 Connection
Reference Notes:
Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
The DBK44 attaches to the LogBook’s or Daq Device’s P1 analog I/O connector. Connect the CA-37-x
accessory ribbon cable (with x indicating the number of cards to be connected) from P1 to the DB37
connector at the end of the DBK44 card.
DBK44, pg. 4877095DBK Option Cards and Modules

Note: A series of interface cables are available to connect up to 128 DBK44s. You can also use a DBK41
10-slot expansion chassis.
DBK44 can be connected to the P1 connector of DBK200, DBK201, DBK202, or DBK203. Connect the
CA-37-x accessory ribbon cable (with x indicating the number of cards to be connected) from P1 to theDB37 connector at the end of the DBK44 card.
Note: Interface cables are available to connect up to 128 DBK44s.

CE Compliance
Reference Notes:
Should your data acquisition system need to comply with CE standards, refer tothe CE Compliance section of the chapter Signal Management.

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
The DBK44 requires two setup steps in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices and
DaqBoards [ISA type]—jumpers JP1 and JP4.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, ensure the JP1 jumper is configured for Analog Option Card Use(expanded analog mode).
Note: This default position is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the DBK44 via theinternal ±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power from a DBK32A or DBK33 card,
you must remove both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section.
Also refer to the DBK32A and DBK33 sections as applicable.

2.

For DaqBook/100, /112, and /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in the DaqBook or DaqBoard [ISAtype] in single-ended mode. Note that analog expansion cards convert all input signals to singleended voltages referenced to analog common.
Note: The configuration of the JP3 jumper depends on the output range of the 5B module. For
example, a 5B31 volt input module has an output range of -5 to +5 V in bipolar mode. A
5B47 T/C module (output 0 to +5 V) could use bipolar mode, but unipolar mode is more
appropriate.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

877095

DBK44, pg. 5

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No jumper configurations are required for these 2000 series devices.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.

DBK44, pg. 6877095DBK Option Cards and Modules

mx+b Values for 5B Modules
The mx+b calculations for most 5B modules are included within LogView software. The table shows them and b values for various 5B modules.
5B Module

Engineering
Unit(s)Isolated Voltage Input (5 V Current Requirement, 30 mA)
SC-5B31-01
1/5
0
mV, V
SC-5B31-02
1
0
mV, V
SC-5B31-03
2
0
mV, V
SC-5B31-04
2/5
-1
mV, V
SC-5B31-05
2
-5
mV, V
SC-5B31-06
4
-10
mV, V
Isolated Wideband Voltage (5 V Current Requirement, 30mA)
SC-5B41-01
1/5
0V
SC-5B41-02
10V
SC-5B41-03
20V
SC-5B41-04
2/5-1V
SC-5B41-05
2-5V
SC-5B41-06
4-10V
Isolated Millivolt Input (5 V Current Requirement, 30 mA)
SC-5B30-01
20mV
SC-5B30-02
100mV
SC-5B30-03
200mV
SC-5B30-04
4-10mV
SC-5B30-05
20
-50
mV
SC-5B30-06
40
-100
mV
Isolated Wideband Millivolt (5 V Current Requirement, 30 mA)
SC-5B40-01
20mV
SC-5B40-02
100mV
SC-5B40-03
200mV
SC-5B40-04
4-10mV
SC-5B40-05
20
-50
mV
SC-5B40-06
40
-100
mV
Isolated Linearized T/C Input (5 V Current Requirement, 30 mA)
SC-5B47-J-01
152
0°C
SC-5B47-J-02
80
-100
°C
SC-5B47-J-03
100
0°C
SC-5B47-K-04
200
0°C
SC-5B47-K-05
100
0°C
SC-5B47-T-06
100
-100
°C
SC-5B47-T-07
40
0°C
SC-5B47-E-08
200
0°C
SC-5B47-R-09
250
+500
°C
SC-5B47-S-10
250
+500
°C
SC-5B47-S-11
260
+500
°C
Isolated RTD Input (5 V Current Requirement, 30 mA)
SC-5B34-01
40
-100
°C
SC-5B34-02
20
0°C
SC-5B34-03
400°C
SC-5B34-04
120
0°C
SC-5B34-C-01
24
0°C
SC-5B34-C-02
24
0°C
SC-5B34-N-01
24
0°C
Isolated Current Input (5 V Current Requirement, 30 mA)
SC-5B32-01
3.2
4mA
SC-5B32-02
40mA
Voltage Switch Input
SC-AC-1367
1
0V

DBK Option Cards and Modules

m Value877095b Value

DBK44, pg. 7

DBK44 – Specifications
Name/Function: 2-Channel 5B Signal Conditioning Card
Module Capacity: 2 “input only” 5B modules
Weight: 0.25 kg (8 oz.) with no modules installed
Cable (optional): CA-37-x
DC Input Fuse: 4 A
Connections:Male DB37 mates via CA-37-1 cable with P1 on the LogBook,
DaqBook, ISA-type DaqBoard*, or Daq PC-Card.
User connections include 8 screw-terminals (4 per channel).
Screw terminations, per channel, are: +EXC, +Vin, -Vin, -EXC
Isolation to Primary Acquisition Device (LogBook or Daq Device):
Input Power: 0 VDC
Signal Inputs: 1500 VDC
Input Channel-to-Channel: 500 VDC
Environmental:
Operating Temperature: 0 to 50°C
Humidity: 0 to 80% RH @ 30°C; de-rate 3%/°C
Altitude: 0 to 2000 m*Note: For DaqBoard/2000 Series and /2000c Series boards, the use of a
DBK200 Series P4-to-P1 adapter is required.

DBK44, pg. 8877095DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK454-Channel SSH and Low-Pass Filter Card
Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Card Connection …… 2
Card Configuration …… 2
Configuring DBK45 Filter Sections …… 3
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 5
DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 5

Software Setup …… 5
DBK45 – Specifications …… 6
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
oIn regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK45 combines the features of the DBK17 (SSH) and the DBK18 (low-pass filter) cards. Each
DBK45 provides 4 input channels to a LogBook or Daq device system. Each of the main 16 analog input
channels can accept four DBK45s, for a maximum of 64 DBK45s and 256 analog input channels. The
simultaneous sample-hold function is activated at the beginning of each channel scan and freezes all
signals present on DBK45 inputs for the duration of the scan, allowing for non-skewed readings of allchannels.
You should never set a DBK45 channel as the 1st channel in a scan due to timing of
the SSH line.
For each of the four channels, a separate filter and a sample-hold stage follow the input stage. The outputs
are connected to a 4-channel multiplexer stage. The enabled-output MUX allows four DBK45s to share acommon analog input channel.
The DBK45 has an instrumentation amplifier for each channel, with switch-selected gains of ×1, ×10,
×100, ×200 and ×500. A socket is provided for a gain resistor for custom gain-selection instead of the 5
factory-default gains. Gain for any channel can be set to any value between unity and ×500 by installing
an appropriate resistor. Four separate filter stages follow the 4 input stages. The outputs are connected toa4-channel multiplexer stage. The enabled output MUX allows four DBK45s to share a common analog
base channel.
Input can be connected to a channel’s BNC or terminal block connector. The differential inputs areprovided with switchable 100 kΩ bias resistors to analog common.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987696

DBK45, pg. 1

DBK45 Block Diagram

Hardware Setup
Card Connection
CAUTION
Input voltage levels must not exceed ±5 V bipolar or 10 V unipolar.

DBK45 is equipped with a BNC connector for each of the four differential analog inputs. The card
includes terminal block connections, which can be used instead of the BNC connectors if desired.

Card Configuration
Factory Defaults:•

100K bias resistors – Enabled•

Low pass filter – Disabled (bypassed)•

Gain – x1•

SSH - Enabled

Input Termination
DBK45 provides two 100 KΩ bias resistors for each analog input. For balanced 200 KΩ input
impedance, both resistors should be switched in. An 8-position DIP switch (SW5) can selectively engage
the bias resistors. The switches must be in the closed position to engage the termination resistors. For
unbalanced high input, only the (-) resistor should be used. If neither resistor is used, some external bias
current path is required. Examples of SW5 switch positions and the resulting impedance selection
follows.

Examples of Bias Resistor Selection Options
Gain Settings
On the printed circuit board, each channel has one gain-set switch. The switches are labeled GAIN 1,
GAIN 2, GAIN3, and GAIN 4. Each channel also has holes in the board for gain resistors labeled RG1 to
RG4. The 5 gain values for switch settings 0 to 4 are provided in the following figure. If a custom gain isdesired, the switch is set to position 0; and a gain resistor must be mounted and soldered onto the board.
The gain resistor’s value is determined by the formula: RGAIN = [40,000 / (Gain -1)] - 50 Ω

DBK45, pg. 2987696

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Address Configuration
Up to four DBK45s can be connected to each analog channel. With
16 main channels and 4 inputs per DBK45, 256 inputs are possible. Since this isa daisy-chain interface, each DBK45 must have a unique address (channel andcard number). Note that the default setting of SW6 is Card 1.
To configure the module, locate the 16 × 2-pin header (labeled J1) near the frontof the board (near P1). The 16 jumper locations on this header are labeled CH0
through CH15. Place the jumper on the channel you wish to use. Only one
jumper is used.
Note: Two DBK45s in the daisy-chain can have the same channel number aslong as their card number is unique.
Set switch SW6 for each DBK45 on a single channel. Verify that only one cardin the system is set to a particular channel and card number.

Configuring DBK45 Filter Sections
There are 4 low-pass, 3-pole active filters on the DBK45. Each filter can be enabled (EN) or bypassed(BY) by placement of the jumper on J3 for channel 0, J4 for channel 1, J5 for channel 2, J6 forchannel 3. The factory-default setting is enabled (EN) for each channel. Each filter can be configured asa Butterworth, Bessel, or Chebyshev filter with corner frequencies up to 50 kHz. Filter properties dependon the values of resistors and capacitors installed in several circuit locations. Above 10 Hz, installing
capacitors is unnecessary because capacitors in the ICs are sufficient. In all cases, three resistors are
required to complete the active filter circuits contained mostly within the UAF42 ICs.
The following circuit diagram shows the active filter IC in a typical section of the DBK45. The resistors
and capacitors outside the IC have a physical location in a DIP-16 socket (dual in-line, 16 pins) with an
RCnn designator. The RC indicates the needed part is a resistor or capacitor; the 3rd character is thechannel number; and the 4th character corresponds to the socket position (A-H).

Filter Circuit Diagram
A machined-pin IC socket in each filter RC location can accept resistors and capacitors that plug directly
into the socket; however, this is not recommended. Two much better approaches exist. The first is to use
pre-configured plug-in filter modules; the second is to configure your own plug-in module using a blank
CN-115. Both of these options are illustrated on the following page.
The use of plug-in modules provides excellent “gold-to-gold” contact between the components of the plugin module and the on-board header.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987696

DBK45, pg. 3

The right-hand figure shows the DIP-16
component pattern typical of the 4 filter sections.
Note: “n” corresponds to “channel number.”Pin 7 of the DIP-16 socket:• connects to pin 8 for low-pass filtering• connects to pin 6 for band-pass filtering

DIP-16 Component Pattern

The following table lists values of components for common corner frequencies in Butterworth filters. If
designing your own filter, software from Burr-Brown provides the component values to create the desired
filter. Note that the design math is beyond the scope of this manual.
3-Pole Butterworth Filter Components
3dB
RCnA
RCnB
RCnC
RCnD
RcnE
RCnF
RCnG
(Hz)
0.05
1 µF
none
1 µF
none
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ
0.10
1 µF
none
1 µF
none
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ
0.20
1 µF
none
1 µF
none
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
0.50
0.1 µFnone
0.1 µFnone
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ1
0.1 µFnone
0.1 µFnone
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ2
0.1 µFnone
0.1 µFnone
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
5*
0.01 µF
none
0.01 µF
none
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ
10*
0.01 µF
none
0.01 µF
none
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ
20
0.01 µF
none
0.01 µF
none
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
50
0.001 µF
none
none
none
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ
3.16 MΩ100*
0.001 µF
none
none
none
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ
1.58 MΩ200
0.001 µF
none
none
none
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
787 kΩ
500*
0.001 µF
none
none
none
316 kΩ
316 kΩ
316 kΩ
1000*
0.001 µF
none
none
none
158 kΩ
158 kΩ
158 kΩ
2000
0.001 µF
none
none
none
78.7 kΩ78.7 kΩ78.7 kΩ
5000
0.001 µF
none
none
none
31.6 kΩ31.6 kΩ31.6 kΩ
10000
0.001 µF
none
none
none
15.8 kΩ15.8 kΩ15.8 kΩ*These pre-configured Butterworth frequency modules are available from the manufacturer.

RCnH
1 µF
1 µF
1 µF
0.1 µF0.1 µF0.1 µF0.01 µF
0.01 µF
0.01 µF
none
none
none
none
none
none
none
none

You have the option to configure the filter sections as band-pass filters rather than low-pass filters. The
component selection program provides band-pass component values. The program also computes anddisplays phase and gain characteristics of the filter sections as a function of frequency.

DBK45, pg. 4987696

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of the DBK45 requires setting jumpers in DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices andISA-type DaqBoards.

1.

If not using auxiliary power, set the JP1 jumper for Analog Option Card Use (also referred toas Analog Expansion Mode).
Note:
These jumpers do not
apply to /2000 Series
devices.

Jumpers on DaqBook/100 Series, DaqBook/200 Series, and ISA-type DaqBoards
The JP1 default position (Analog Option Card Use) is necessary to power the interface
circuitry of the DBK45 via the internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary
power, e.g., DBK32A or DBK33, you must remove both JP1 jumpers. Refer toPower Requirements in the DBK Basics section and the DBK32A and DBK33 sections formore information, as applicable.
2.

Place the JP2 jumper in the SSH position.

CAUTION
Do not use an external voltage reference for DAC1. Applying an external voltage
reference for DAC1, when using the SSH output, will result in equipment damage
due to a conflict on P1, pin #26.
3.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112 and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP4 jumper insingle-ended mode.

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No hardware configuration is required for DaqBook/2000 Series or DaqBoard/2000 Series devices.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987696

DBK45, pg. 5

DBK45 – Specifications

Name/Function: Simultaneous Sample and Hold and
Low-Pass Filter Card
Number of Channels: 4
Input Connections: 4 BNC connectors; 4 screw-terminal sets
Output Connector: DB37 male,
mates with P1 using CA-37-x cable

Temperature vs Gain:±20 ppm/°C @ ×1
±20 ppm/°C @ ×10±40 ppm/°C @ ×100
±60 ppm/°C @ ×200
±100 ppm/°C @ ×500

Number of Cards Addressable: 64
Dimensions: 8.25” × 3.25”
Input Type: Differential
Voltage Input Ranges:
0 to ±5000 mVDC
0 to ±500 mVDC
0 to ±50 mVDC
0 to ±25 mVDC
0 to ±10 mVDC
For Custom Gains: RGAIN = [40,000/(Gain-1)] - 80 Ω
Input Amplifier Slew Rate: 12 V/µs minimum
Acquisition Time:
0.6 µs (10 V excursion to 0.1%)
0.7 µs (10 V excursion to 0.01%)
Channel-to-Channel Aperture Uncertainty: 50 ns
Output Droop Rate: 0.1 µV/µs

Input Offset Voltage: 500 µV + 5000/G maximum (nullable)
Input Offset Drift: ±5 + 100/G µV/°C maximum
Input Bias Current: 100 pA maximum
Input Offset Currents: 50 pA maximum12Ω parallel with 6 pF

Switchable Bias Resistors: 100 KΩ each to analog common

DBK45, pg. 6

Non-Linearity:±0.015 % full-scale @ ×1
±0.015 % full-scale @ ×10±0.025 % full-scale @ ×100
±0.025 % full-scale @ ×200
±0.045 % full-scale @ ×500
Common-Mode Rejection:
70 dB minimum @ ×1
87 dB minimum @ ×10
100 dB minimum @ ×100
100 dB minimum @ ×200
100 dB minimum @ ×500
Active Filter Device: UAF42 (Burr-Brown)
Number of Poles/Filter: 3

Input Gains: ×1, ×10, ×100, ×200, x500, anduser-set up to ×500

Input Impedance: 5 × 10

Gain Errors:
0.04% @ ×1
0.1% @ ×10
0.2% @ ×100
0.4% @ ×200
1.0% @ ×500

987696

Types of Filters: Bessel, Butterworth,
Chebyshev
Frequency Range: 0.1 Hz to 50 kHz
The frequency is set by installation of
4-6 resistors and/or capacitors inprovided socket locations.
Frequency Modules: Optional frequency
module kits are available that consist of
4 plug-in resistor/capacitor (RC)headers. These RC headers are preconfigured for any of the following
frequencies: 5 Hz, 10 Hz, 100 Hz,
500 Hz, or 1 kHz—all are Butterworthtype filters.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK464-Channel Analog Output Card
For use with: DaqBook/2000A
DaqBook/2000E
DaqBook/2000X
WBK41

Overview ...... 1
Hardware Setup ...... 3
Software Setup ...... 3
DBK46 – Specifications ......4

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o

The P3 connector’s DAC related pins [31, 32, 33, and 34] apply to the DaqBook/2000 Series
Device only when a DBK46 is installed. For WBK41, DAC related connections are made via
a front panel screw terminal block.

Overview
The DBK46 is a factory-installed option currently available for DaqBook/2000A, DaqBook/2000E,
DaqBook/2000X, and WBK41. JP1 plugs into a 40-pin header on the primary acquisition device.
Analog DAC Output is then available, as follows:• For DaqBook/2000 Series devices, from the device’s P3 connector.
• For WBK41, from a front panel terminal block.

The 37-pin P3 connector ison the DaqBook/2000
Series device front panel.

Internal Acquisition Pacer Clock
External Acquisition Pacer Clock
Pin 20 on P1; Pin B26 on P4
Internal DAC Pacer ClockDBK46 Block Diagram,
DaqBook/2000 Series Applications

External DAC Pacer Clock
Pin 21 on P3; Pin A26 on P4

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967194

DBK46, pg. 1

WBK41 Front Panel,
Right-Edge Terminal Block

Internal DAC Pacer Clock
Internal Acquisition Pacer ClockDBK46 Block Diagram,
WBK41 Application

External DAC Pacer Clock (DPCR)

The DBK46 has a 256K sample buffer that can be used for one to four DACs. If only one DAC is enabled
for waveform output, then the entire 256K sample memory can be used to store a waveform for that DAC.
If two DACs are enabled for waveform output, then 128K of sample memory is available for each of thetwo DACs. Use of all four DACs drops the available memory down to 64K per DAC.
Software loads the waveform(s) into all, or a portion of, the 256K sample buffer. The waveform data
drives the DACs at the rate of the specified DAC Pacer Clock. The waveforms will repeat until the DACs
are disabled by software.
The DBK46 provides an output range of -10V to +10V. The card’s 256 Kbyte of sample buffer memory
can store waveforms from the PC.
When used to generate waveforms for a DaqBook/2000 Series device, each DAC can be independently
clocked in one of four modes. These are:• Internal DAC Pacer Clock - The on-board programmable clock can generate updates ranging
from 1.5 Hz to 100 kHz, independent of any acquisition rate.
• Internal Acquisition Pacer Clock - Using the on-board programmable clock, the analog
output rate of update can be synchronized to the acquisition rate derived from 100 kHz to once
every 5.96 hours.
• External DAC Pacer Clock - A user-supplied external input clock can be used to pace the
DAC, entirely independent of other analog inputs.
• External Acquisition Pacer Clock - A user-supplied external input clock can simultaneously
pace the DAC and the analog input.
When used to generate waveforms in a WBK41, the DACs can be clocked in one of three modes.
These are:• Internal DAC Pacer Clock - The WBK41 programmable clock can generate updates ranging
from 1.5 Hz to 100 kHz, independent of any acquisition rate.
• Internal Acquisition Pacer Clock – By using the WBK41 programmable clock, the analog
output rate of update can be synchronized to the acquisition rate derived from 100 kHz to once
every 5.96 hours.
• External DAC Pacer Clock (DPCR) - A user-supplied external input clock can be used topace the DAC, entirely independent of other analog inputs. This external clock input connects
to the DPCR connector, located on the Counter/Timer Terminal Block.

DBK46, pg. 2967194

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Hardware Setup
DBK46 is installed at the factory. To verify that a DBK46 is installed, simply check the acquisition
software’s Analog Output Window for the presence of DAC0, DAC1, DAC2, and DAC3.

Software Setup
DBK46 does not require setup in software.
Reference Notes:
o DaqView Users: In regard to the out-of-the-box software and analog output channels, refer to the
DaqView and DaqViewXL Document Module, especially the following two sections: Analog Output
Window, and Waveform and Digital Pattern Output Window.
o

WaveView Users: In regard to the out-of-the-box software, refer to the WaveView Document
Module.

o

PDF versions of the documents are included on the data acquisition CD and can be accessed via the<View PDFs> button, which is located on the CD’s intro-screen.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967194

DBK46, pg. 3

DBK46 – Specifications
The four analog output channels are updated synchronously relative to scanned inputs, and are clockedfrom either an internal clock on the primary acquisition device, such as a DaqBook/2000A; or from a usersupplied external clock source. Analog outputs can also be updated asynchronously, independent of any
other scanning in the system.
Channels: 4
Resolution: 16 bits
Data Buffer: 256 K sample FIFO
Output Voltage Range: ±10V
Output Current: ±10 mA
Offset Error: ±0.0045V max
Gain Error: ±0.01%
Update Rate: 100 kHz max, 1.5 Hz min (no minimum with external clock)
Settling Time: 10 µsec max to 1 LSB for full-scale step
Digital Feed-thru: a spike of up to 50 mV may occur on the DAC output
each time the DAC output is updated
Clock Sources: 4 programmable clock sources:• The primary acquisition device’s onboard D/A input clock, independent of the scanning input clock• The primary acquisition device’s onboard scanning input clock• An external D/A input clock, independent of an external scanning input clock• An external scanning input clock

Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice.

DBK46, pg. 4967194

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK48Multipurpose Isolated Signal-Conditioning Module
Supports up to Sixteen 8B Modules

Description …… 1
Safety Concerns …… 2
Hardware Setup …… 2
Installing 8B Modules …… 4
Installing Plug-in Resistors to Create 4 to 20 mA Loops …… 5
Making Terminal Block Connections …… 6
Setting DBK48 Module Addresses …… 7
Configuring the Primary Data Acquisition Device …… 8
CE Compliance …… 9Connecting the DBK48 to the Primary Data Acquisition Device …… 9Using the DB25 Signal Output Connector …… 10
Powering the System …… 13

Software Setup …… 13
Specifications …… 16

Description
The DBK48 module can accommodate up to sixteen 8B isolated-input signal-conditioning modules for use
with Daq systems. A single cable connects the DBK48 output to the P1 analog input connector on the
primary device. One Daq system can support up to 16 DBK48 modules, providing a total of 256 isolated
analog input channels. The A/D converter scans the DBK48 channels at the same 5 µs/channel rate that it
scans all other channels from DBK series analog expansion and signal conditioning cards.
Other features of DBK48 include:• Built-in power supply that operates from 10 to 30 VDC and can power a full complement of
8B modules (even with bridge excitation).
• Removable, plug-in screw-terminal blocks for convenient connection of 8B modules.
• On-board cold-junction sensing for thermocouple 8B modules.
• For each 8B module, 250 V isolation from the system and from other channels.

Note 1: Only channels 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14 can be connected
to excitation. For example, in the above block diagram
Channel 0 could be connected to Excitation; Channel 1
could not.

Note 2: Each channel can accept a plug-in resistor to serve as acurrent shunt. In the above diagram, Channel 0 has acurrent shunt installed, Channel 1 does not. Only currentinput type modules require the plug-in resistors. The plug-in
resistors must be removed for all other module types.

8B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

967792

DKB48, pg. 1

Safety Concerns
WARNING
Shock Hazard! Voltages above 50 Vrms AC and voltages above 100 VDC areconsidered hazardous. Safety precautions are required when 8B modules are used insituations that require high-voltage isolation from the rest of the system. Failure topractice electrical safety precautions could lead to injury or death.

DBK48 has a 250 VDC isolation specification. This is in a normal environment free of conductive
pollutants and condensation. The 250 VDC rating requires a proper earth ground connection to the chassis
and treatment of adjacent inputs as potentially hazardous.
Input cables must be rated for the isolation potential in use. Line voltage ratings are much lower than the
DC isolation values specified due to transients that occur on power lines. Never remove the cover unless all
inputs with potentially hazardous voltages are removed. The cover must be securely screwed on duringuse.
Some things to remember:• Properly tighten all chassis screws before system use.
• Never plug in or unplug potentially hazardous connections with power applied to any
connected equipment.
• Never attempt to change 8B modules or remove the cover plate while power is applied to
the DBK48. You could short out internally exposed circuits and cause personal injury or
equipment damage.
• Disconnect power, all equipment, and signal lines from the DBK48 prior to installing
8B modules.

Reference Note:
Refer to user manual that is associated with your primary Daq device.

DBK48, pg. 29677928B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

Hardware Setup

DBK48 Circuit Board Layout

8B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

967792

DKB48, pg. 3

Installing 8B Modules
WARNING
Electric shock hazard! Turn off power to the DBK48 and all connected modules anddevices before inserting or removing modules. Failure to do so could lead to injury or
death due to electric shock.

CAUTION
Handle the 8B module carefully while inserting pins into the circuit board.
Do not over-tighten the mounting screw.

CAUTION
The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components.
Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should always
handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or circuitcomponents unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESD
controlled area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats and wrist
straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.
If the DBK48 is not connected to a Daq device via the P1 connector, then remove theRnets from S01 and S02. These resistor networks connect each 8B module’s output tothe multiplexer for P1.

Up to sixteen 8B modules can be installed onto the DBK48 circuit board. The preceding figure indicatesmodule locations.
To install 8B modules:

DBK48, pg. 4

1.

Turn off power to the DBK48 and allconnected modules and devices.

2.

Disconnect power, all equipment, and signallines from the DBK48 prior to installing 8B
modules. Be aware that isolated
measurements can present lethal voltages!

3.

Remove the DBK48 top cover plate and set aside.

4.

Align the 8B module’s retaining screw and pinswith the holes in the circuit board (see figure).

5.

Gently press the module into place.

6.

Tighten the retaining screw snug, but DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN.

7.

Repeat steps 3, 4, and 5 for each additional module.

8.

Return and secure the cover plate to the unit.

9677928B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

Installing Plug-in Resistors to Create 4 to 20 mA Loops with 8B Voltage-Input Modules
WARNING
Electric shock hazard! Turn off power to the DBK48 and all connected modules anddevices before inserting or removing resistors. Failure to do so could lead to injury or
death due to electric shock.

CAUTION
The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components.
Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should always
handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or circuitcomponents unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESD
controlled area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats and wrist
straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.

Current Shunt
Resistors

Location of Shunt Resistor Plug-In
Shown with shunt resistors plugged-in for Channel 0 (at R0) and Channel 2 (at R2)

Only voltage-input type modules require the plug-in shunt resistors. The plug-in resistors
must be removed for all other module types, including current-input type.
Inputs to monitor the commonly used 4 to 20mA current loops most often employ a 250Ω precisionresistor to develop a 1 to 5 VDC voltage drop.
Ideally, a resistor for such purpose should have a 0.1% tolerance (or better) with a minimum power ratingof 0.25W and a temperature coefficient of at least 25ppm/°C.
Lower values of resistance, for example, 62.5Ω [for a lower voltage drop within the loop of 0.25 to 1.25
VDC] will require that the host data acquisition device use a gain of x4 to maximize the signal resolution.

To create a 4 to 20mA current loop:
1. Turn off power to the DBK48 and all connected modules and devices.
2. Disconnect power, all equipment, and signal lines from the DBK48 prior to installing theresistors. Be aware that isolated measurements can present lethal voltages!
3. Remove the DBK48 top cover plate and set aside.
4. Carefully plug the shunt resistor into the applicable plug-in location for the designated channel;
for example, R0 for Channel 0, R1 for Channel 1, R2 for Channel 2, etc. Repeat for each channel
as applicable.
DO NOT solder the shunt resistors in place.
Only voltage-input type modules require these resistors. The plug-in resistors
must be removed for all other module types, including current-input type.
5. Reinstall the DBK48 top cover plate and secure in place.

8B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

967792

DKB48, pg. 5

Making Terminal Block Connections
Input signals (and excitation when applicable) are wired to removable terminal blocks. Eight such blocks
can accept 2 channel inputs each. However, only channels 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14 can be connected toexcitation. Thus the DBK48 is limited to 8 strain gages or 8 RTDs as only the even numbered channels
can be connected to excitation.
Each terminal block connects to a signal conditioning module within the DBK48. The blocks accept up to
14-gage wire into quick-connect screw terminals. Wiring schematics are provided below for RTDs,
thermocouples, 20 mA circuits, voltage (mV and V), and for full-bridge and half-bridge strain gages.

WARNING
Shock Hazard! The DBK48 is designed to sense signals that may carry dangerous
voltages. De-energize circuits connected to the DBK48 before changing the wiring or
configuration.

CH 0 is connected to a Full-Bridge Strain Gage.
CH 1 is shown not connected.

CH 0 is connected to a Half-Bridge Strain Gage.
CH 1 is connected for voltage input (mV or V).

CH 0 has a 3-wire connection to a potentiometer.
CH 1 is shown not connected.

CH 0 has a 3-wire connection to an RTD.
CH 1 is connected to a Thermocouple.
Only current-input type modules require theplug-in resistors. The plug-in resistors must
be removed for all other module types.

CH 0 has a 2-wire connection to an RTD.
CH 1 is shown not connected.

DBK48, pg. 6967792

CH 0 is shown not connected.
CH 1 is connected to a current shunt resistor
resulting in a 4 to 20 mA current loop.
8B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

Setting DBK48 Module Addresses
Up to sixteen DBK48 modules can be attached to a single LogBook or Daq device. Each DBK48 module
must have a unique channel address because they connect to the primary data acquisition device via
parallel interface.

CAUTION
Adjustment of the channel address must only be performed when the system
power is OFF. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.

To assign a channel address to the DBK48 module, first locate the DIP switch on the right side of the rear
panel. Four micro-switches [on the DIP switch] are used to set the module’s channel address in binary.
After ensuring that the system power is OFF, adjust the micro-switches to set the desired address. The 16
possible addresses are illustrated in the following figure.

Each module in the system must have a unique primary device channel address.

The 16 Possible Address Settings for DBK48 Modules

8B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

967792

DKB48, pg. 7

Configuring the Primary Data Acquisition Device

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of a DBK48 with a DaqBook/100 Series, /200 Series devices, or with an ISA-type DaqBoard requires
the configuration of jumpers JP1 and JP4. These jumpers are located on the DaqBook/100 Series, /200
Series devices, and DaqBoard [ISA type] board.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, set the JP1 jumper for Analog Option Card Use,also referred to as the expanded analog mode.

Note:
These jumpers do not
apply to /2000 Series
Devices.

Required Jumper Settings in DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and ISA-Type DaqBoards
The JP1 default position (above) is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the
DBK48 via the internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power (e.g.,
DBK32A or DBK33) you must remove both JP1 jumpers.
For additional information refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section andto the DBK32A and DBK33 sections, as applicable.
2.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112, and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in the single-ended
mode.

DaqBook/2000 Series, DaqBoard/2000 Series, DaqLab, and DaqScan
No jumper configurations are required on these Daq devices in regard to connecting a DBK48.

LogBooks
No jumper configurations are required on LogBook devices in regard to connecting a DBK48.

DBK48, pg. 89677928B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

CE ComplianceIf your data acquisition system needs to comply with CE standards, the DBK48 must be connected to the
LogBook or Daq device by a CA-143-x cable. In addition, the CE compliant operating conditions must be
met as specified on the DBK48 module’s Declaration of Conformity card, which is shipped with themodule.

Reference Notes: If your data acquisition system needs to comply with CE standards,
refer to the following:o the DBK48 Declaration of Conformityo the CE Compliance section of Signal Management chapter of this manual

Connecting the DBK48 to the Primary Data Acquisition Device
Connect the DBK48 module as follows. Note that if your system needs to be CE Compliant, be sure toread the preceding CE Compliance section prior to connecting the DBK48.
1.

For a single DBK48 module, connect one end of the P1 cable to the module’s male DB37 output
connector.
• For DaqBook applications - use a CA-37-x cable or a CA-255-xT cable.*• For DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Series boards - use a CA-37-x with a DBK200 Series
adapter.*• For DaqBoard [ISA type] boards - use a CA-131-x cable.** CA-37-x and CA-131-x cables do not meet CE compliance requirements. Refer to thepreceding CE section if CE compliance must be met.

2.

Connect the free end of the cable to the P1 port of the LogBook or Daq device. For multiple DBK48
modules, use a CA-37-x (or CA-131-x) cable to daisy-chain several modules or an expansion
module. For example, three DBK48 modules could be connected to a LogBook or a Daq device via
aCA-37-3 cable.

Note: For longer cable runs you can use a CA-113 cable to add 6 ft of length.

8B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

967792

DKB48, pg. 9

Using the DB25 Signal Output Connector
Important Notes Regarding the Signal Output Connector
The signal output connector on the rear panel of the DBK48 can be used to directly measure the output
voltage of each 8B module. This applies to input-type modules, i.e., volts, millivolts, thermocouple,
potentiometer, frequency, strain gage, RTD, etc.

DBK48 Rear Panel
The signal output connector can also be used with output-type 8B modules, e.g., current output and voltage
output. In this case a voltage is applied to the signal output connector. This voltage is converted to an
isolated current or isolated voltage by the 8B module which is installed in that channel. The isolated
current or voltage is available on the front panel terminal block.
Be careful when mixing 8B input modules and 8B output modules.
If possible, do not mix 8B input modules and 8B output modules within the same DBK48.

When applying voltages to the rear panel signal output connector [for 8B outputmodules] it can be easy to short to an adjacent pin on the 25 pin DSUB connector. If
there is an 8B input-module on that channel, damage may occur to that 8B module.

If a voltage source is being applied to a front panel terminal block for an 8B input-type
module and there is an 8B output-type module mistakenly installed in that channel,
damage to the 8B output module may occur.

Configuring the SIGNAL OUTPUT
The signal output connector on the rear panel of the DBK48 can be configured in one of two ways via
jumper networks that are placed in sockets JMP1, 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6.

Signal Output Configuration Jumpers
as Oriented on PCB

DBK48, pg. 109677928B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

Jumper Assignments

JMP1

JMP2

JMP3

For JMP1 through JMP6:

CCHx = Single-ended I/Ochannel of 8B
Module.
DSUBx = Pin x of the DB25
Signal Output
connector.

JMP4

JMP5 and JMP6Bringing all Sixteen 8B Module Outputs to the DB25 Signal Output Connector
With three CA-19-8 jumper networks installed [one per socket] in JMP3, JMP4,and JMP5 the signal output connector is pinned out as shown in the following
figure. This brings the outputs of all sixteen 8B modules to the 25-pin DSUB
Signal Output connector on the rear panel.

DB25 SIGNAL OUTPUT Pinout with JMP3, JMP4, JMP5 Installed
This configuration brings all 16 channel outputs to the DB25 Signal Output Connector.

8B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

967792

DKB48, pg. 11

Bringing Eight 8B Module Outputs to the DB25 Signal Output Connector
With 3 jumper networks installed [one per socket] in JMP1, JMP2, and JMP6 thesignal output connector is pinned out as shown in the following figure. This only
brings the outputs of eight of the 8B modules, i.e., Ch 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, and 14.
When the Signal Output connector is pinned-out in this manner it can be used with a
CA-208-3 cable to bring the 8 channels out to the cable’s BNC connectors for easy
connection to other measuring equipment.

DB25 SIGNAL OUTPUT Pinout with JMP1, JMP2, JMP6 Installed
This configuration brings channel 0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12 and 14 outputs to the DB25
Signal Output Connector.

If the DBK48 is not connected to a Daq device via the P1 connector, then remove the Rnets
from S01 and S02. These resistor networks connect each 8B module’s output to themultiplexer for P1.
Use the CA-208-3 cable as follows:1.

Connect the DB25-end of the CA-208-3 cabledirectly to DBK48’s 25-pin Signal Output
connector.

2.

Connect the CA-208-3 analog common banana
plug to the local ground of the measuring
equipment.

3.

Connect the CA-208-3 BNC connectors (forchannels 1 through 8) to the measuring
equipment.

Note 1: CA-208-3 connects directly to the signal output connector. However, another cable, which looks virtually thesame, is the CA-208 (with no”-3” extension). If you are using a CA-208 you must first connect a CA-35-18
cable to the DB25 connector on the DBK48; then connect the CA-208 to the CA-35-18 cable. For CA-208
users, a wiring diagram is provided immediately following the DBK48 specifications section.

DBK48, pg. 129677928B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

Powering the System
The DBK48 contains an internal power supply. The unit can be powered by an AC power adapter or any
10 to 30 VDC source, such as a 12 V car battery. For portable or field applications, DBK48 and theprimary Daq device can be powered by a DBK30A rechargeable battery module or DBK34 vehicle UPS
module. The supply input is fully isolated from the measurement system. If the fuse requires replacement,use a
2 Amp Mini ATO Fuse, factory part number FU-8-2 (Littelfuse # 297-002).

DBK48 Rear Panel
DBK48’s internal power supply supplies power to the 8B modules only. The DIN5
Power Out connector is a pass-through to allow for a power daisy-chain.
Prior to daisy-chaining from one module’s power connector to another, be sure tocompute the power consumption for the entire system. Some modules may needindependent power adapters. See chapter 2 for information regarding power supply
issues.

Software Setup
You will need to set several parameters so DaqView can best meet your application requirements.
After the 8B module type is identified, DaqView figures out the m and b (of the mx+b equation) for proper
engineering units scaling. An example of the mx + b equation follows shortly.
LogView does not include the means to directly select the DBK48. To use a DBK48 andits 8B modules with LogBook: Select DBK42 in LogView. This will recognize the DBK48, butwill identify it as a DBK42. For each 8B module, select the 5B module that exhibits the samemeasurement ranges; three examples follow:
For SC-8B30-01 select SC-5B30-01 as both have an Input Range of ±10 mV;
and an Output Range of ±5V.
For SC-8B34-02 select SC-5B34-02 as both are Type 100 Ohm Pt;
with an Input Range of 0°C to +100°C.
For SC-8B47-T-07 select SC-5B47-T-07 as both are a Type T Thermocouple,
with an Input Range of 0°C to +200°C.

Reference Note:o
For DaqView information refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView and to the DaqView
PDF included on your data acquisition CD.
o
For LogView information refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView and to the LogView
section of the LogBook PDF included on your data acquisition CD. Also, see abovenote.
o
The API includes functions applicable to the DBK48. Refer to related material in the
Programmer’s Manual (p/n 1008-0901) as needed.
PDF Note:

During software installation, Adobe® PDF versions of user manuals automatically install onto
your hard drive as a part of product support. The default location is in the Programs group,
which can be accessed from the Windows Desktop. Refer to the PDF documentation for
details regarding both hardware and software. Note that you can also access PDF documents
directly from the data acquisition CD via the <View PDFs> button on the CD’s opening
screen.

8B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

967792

DKB48, pg. 13

DaqView Configuration Main Window

mX +b, an Example

The Customize Engineering Units dialog box can beaccessed via the DaqView Configuration main
window by activating the Units cell [for the desiredchannel], then clicking to select mX+b.
From the Customize Engineering Units dialog box(see figure at right), you can enter values for m and bcomponents of the equation that will be applied tothe data. There is also an entry field that allows you
to enter a label for the new units that may result fromthe mX+b calculation.

An example of mX + b equation use follows.
DBK48, pg. 14

9677928B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

Engineering Units Conversion Using mx + b
Most of our data acquisition products allow the user to convert a raw signal input (for example, one that isin volts) to a value that is in engineering units (for example, pressure in psi). The products accomplish thisby allowing the user to enter scale and offset numbers for each input channel, using the software associatedwith the product. Then the software uses these numbers to convert the raw signals into engineering units
using the following “mx + b” equation:(1)

Engineering Units = m(Raw Signal) + b

The user must, however, determine the proper values of scale (m) and offset (b) for the application inquestion. To do the calculation, the user needs to identify two known values: (1) the raw signal values, and(2) the engineering units that correspond to the raw signal values. After this, the scale and offset
parameters can be calculated by solving two equations for the two unknowns. This method is made clear
by the following example.
ExampleAn engineer has a pressure transducer that produces a voltage output of 10.5 volts when the measured
pressure is 3200 psi. The same transducer produces an output of 0.5 volt when the pressure is 0 psi.
Knowing these facts, m and b are calculated as follows.
A - Write a pair of equations, representing the two known points:(2)3200 = m(10.5) + b(3)

0 = m(0.5) + b

B - Solve for m by first subtracting each element in equation (3) from equation (2):(4)

3200 - 0 = m(10.5 – 0.5) + (b - b)

(5)

Simplifying gives you:

(6)

This means:

3200 = m(10)m = 320

C - Substitute the value for m into equation (3) to determine the value for b:(7)

0 = 320 (0.5) + b(8)Therefore:b = - 160

Now it is possible to rewrite the general equation (1) using the specific values for m and b that we justdetermined:(9)

Engineering Units = 320(Raw Signal) - 160

The user can then enter the values of m and b into the appropriate location using the facilities provided bycompatible data acquisition software, for example: WaveView, DaqView, Personal DaqView, LogView, and
TempView. The software uses equation (9) to calculate signal values in engineering units from that pointon.

8B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

967792

DKB48, pg. 15

Specifications – DBK48
Name/Function: DBK48, 16-slot Multi-Purpose Isolated Signal Conditioning Module
Operating Environment:
Temperature: -30°C to 70°C
Relative Humidity: 95% RH, non-condensing
Connectors:
System Connector: DB37 male, mates with P1 connector on primary acquisition device (Note 1)
Signal Connector: DB25, 5V output signals from the 8B modules
Power Connectors: Two DIN5 connectors; “Power In” and “Power Out” for daisy-chaining
Input Connections:
8 sets of removable screw terminal blocks, each with 6 connection points as follows:st
1 channel voltage in (+V in, -V in)
1st channel excitation (+E, -E) (Note 2)
2nd channel voltage in (+V in, -V in)
Shunt-Resistor Socket: R0 through R15, plug-in resistor sockets.
One socket per channel for current loop inputs.
Cold-Junction Sensor: Enabled or disabled per channel via jumpers JP0 through JP15.
8B Module Capacity:o Up to 16 voltage input
o Up to 16 thermocouple
o Up to 8 modules which require excitation; i.e.
strain gauge, potentiometer, RTD
See latest catalog or contact your sales representative in regard to
the types of 8B Modules available for your application.
Power Requirements: 10 to 30 VDC; or 120 VAC with AC-to-DC adapter
With 16 thermocouple-type modules (0.03 amps each):
10 VDC @ 0.30 A
15 VDC @ 0.20 A
25 VDC @ 0.12 A
With 8 strain-gage-type modules (0.2 amps each):
10 VDC @ 1.000 A
15 VDC @ 0.667 A
25 VDC @ 0.400 A
Power Consumption: 750 mW from P1, typical(±15V @ 25mA)
Channel-to-Channel Settling: ±0.05%, typical at 200kHz; ±0.025%, typical at 100kHz
DC Input Fuse: 2 Amp, Mini ATO Fuse, FU-8-2 (Littelfuse #297-002); at board location F3
Isolation
Input Power to System:
250 VDC
Signal Inputs to System:
250 VDC
Input Channel-to-Channel: 250 VDC
Dimensions: 285 mm W × 220 mm D × 45 mm H (11” x 8.5” × 1.75”)
Weight: 1.13 kg (2.5 lb) with no modules installed

Note 1: If attachment to the primary device is through a 100-pin P4 connector, a DBK200 series adapter must be used toobtain the mating P1 connector.
Note 2: Input devices that require excitation can only be connected to the following channels:
0, 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14. The odd-numbered channels do not connect to excitation.

DBK48, pg. 16

9677928B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

8B Module Ranges
Voltage Input Modules (3 Hz BW)
Part No.

Input Range

Output Range

SC-8B30-01±10 mV±5V

SC-8B30-02±50 mV±5V

SC-8B30-03±100 mV±5V

SC-8B31-01

±1 V

±5V

SC-8B31-02

±5 V

±5V

SC-8B31-03

±10 V

±5V

SC-8B31-04±1 V

0 to +5V

SC-8B31-05±5 V

0 to +5V

SC-8B31-06±10 V

0 to +5V

SC-8B31-07

±20 V

±5V

SC-8B31-08±20 V

0 to +5V

SC-8B31-09

±40 V

±5V

SC-8B31-10±40 V

0 to +5V

SC-8B31-12

±60 V

±5V

SC-8B31-13±60 V

0 to +5V

Current Input Modules (3 Hz)
Part No.

Input Range

Output Range

SC-8B32-01

4 to 20 mA

0 to +5V

SC-8B32-02

0 to 20 mA

0 to +5V

Linearized 2-wire or 3-wire RTD Modules(0 to +5V Output, 3 Hz BW) Type: 100Ω Pt RTD[Available June 2005]

Part No.

Input Range in ˚C˚F-100˚C to +100˚C-148˚F to +212˚F

SC-8B34-02

0˚C to +100˚C+32˚F to +212˚F

SC-8B34-03

0˚C to +200˚C

SC-8B34-04

0˚C to +600˚C+32˚F to +392˚F+32˚F to +1112˚F

SC-8B34-01

Potentiometer Input Modules(0 to +5V Output, 3 Hz BW)[Available June 2005]

Part No.

Input Range

Output Range

SC-8B36-01

0 to 100Ω

0 to +5V

SC-8B36-02

0 to 500Ω

0 to +5V

SC-8B36-03

0 to 1 kΩ

0 to +5V

SC-8B36-04

0 to 10 kΩ

0 to +5V

Specifications are subject to change without notice.
8B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

967792

DKB48, pg. 17

Voltage Input Modules (1 kHz BW)
Part No.

Input Range

Output Range

SC-8B40-01±10 mV±5V

SC-8B40-02±50 mV±5V

SC-8B40-03±100 mV±5V

SC-8B41-01

±1 V

±5V

SC-8B41-02

±5 V

±5V

SC-8B41-03

±10 V

±5V

SC-8B41-04±1 V

0 to +5V

SC-8B41-05±5 V

0 to +5V

SC-8B41-06±10 V

0 to +5V

SC-8B41-07

±20 V

±5V

SC-8B41-08±20 V

0 to +5V

SC-8B41-09

±40 V

±5V

SC-8B41-10±40 V

0 to +5V

SC-8B41-12

±60 V

±5V

SC-8B41-13±60 V

0 to +5V

Linearized Thermocouple Input Modules(0 to +5V Output, 3 Hz BW)
Part No.

Type

Input Range in ˚C

˚F

SC-8B47-J-01

J

0˚C to +760˚C

32˚F to +1400˚F

SC-8B47-J-02

J-100˚C to +300˚C-148˚F to +572˚F

SC-8B47-J-03

J

0˚C to +500˚C

SC-8B47-J-12

J-100˚C to +760˚C+32˚F to +932˚F-148˚F to +1400˚F

SC-8B47-K-04

K

0˚C to +1000˚C+32˚F to +1832˚F

SC-8B47-K-05

K

0˚C to +500˚C+32˚F to +932˚F

SC-8B47-K-13

K-100˚C to +1350˚C-148˚F to +2462˚F

SC-8B47-K-14

K

0˚C to +1200˚C+32˚F to +2192˚F

SC-8B47-T-06

T-100˚C to +400˚C-148˚F to +752˚F

SC-8B47-T-07

T

0˚C to +200˚C+32˚F to +392˚FSpecifications are subject to change without notice.

DBK48, pg. 18

9677928B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

A NOTE FOR USERS OF CABLE CA-208

The following applies to customers using a CA-208 instead of a CA-208-3 cable.
Users of CA-208-3 are to ignore this material.

If the DBK48 is not connected to a Daq device via the P1 connector, then remove the Rnets from S01
and S02. These resistor networks connect each 8B module’s output to the multiplexer for P1.

DO NOT connect the CA-208 cable directly to the Signal Output connector. First connect a CA-35-18
cable to the DB25; then connect the CA-208 to the CA-35-18 cable. Both cables are required.

Wiring Diagrams

Use the two cables (CA-208 and CA-35-18) as follows:1.

Connect the CA-35-18 expansion cable to DBK48’s 25-pin Signal Output connector.

2.

Connect DB25 end of the CA-208 cable to the CA-35-18 expansion cable.

3.

Connect the CA-208 analog common banana plug to the local ground of the measuring equipment.

4.

Connect the CA-208 BNC connectors (for channels 1 through 8) to the measuring equipment.

8B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

967792

DKB48, pg. 19

This page is intentionally blank.

DBK48, pg. 20

9677928B Isolated Signal Conditioning Module

DBK50 and DBK51

8-Channel Isolated Voltage Input Modules

Overview …… 1

Input Attenuation/Gain Factors …… 2

Hardware Setup …… 2

Signal-to-Module Connection …… 2
Module Configuration …… 2
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 3
DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 4

Software Setup …… 4
DBK50 and DBK51 – Specifications …… 4
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
Except for their ranges, the DBK50 (high-voltage) and the DBK51 (low-voltage) are identical. Both haveeight channels isolated from themselves (750 V) and from the LogBook or Daq Device analog common(1250 V). Each channel’s input impedance is over 10 MΩ to minimize loading of the circuit being
measured. Voltages can be read from DC to more than 20 kHz. One of three voltage ranges can be chosen
via software:• for DBK50: ±10 V, ±100 V, or ±300 V.
• for DBK51: ±100 mV, ±1 V, or ±10 V.
With standard plug-in attenuator assemblies, the voltage ranges are interchangeable. The gain or
attenuation factor depends on the range, but the full-scale output for any range is +5 V.
Note: A fourth “range” delivers a shorted input voltage reading to allow offset compensation in some
applications.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989594

DBK50 and DBK51, pg. 1

Input Attenuation/Gain Factors
Gain and attenuation may be calculated using the formula:
K = Vin / Vout
where: K is the attenuation or gain factor (the values of K for
available voltage ranges are given in the table).
Vin is the voltage applied to the module input channel.
Vout is the amplified or attenuated voltage from the module
output back to the main unit.

Input Range
Function
300 V Range
Attenuates
100 V Range
Attenuates
10 V Range
Attenuates
1 V Range
Amplifies
100 mV Range
Amplifies
Note: not all input ranges areavailable on a single unit.

K
60
20
2
0.2
0.02

Hardware Setup
Signal-to-Module Connection
The DBK50/51 rear panel has 8 plug-in screw terminals for easy access to the 8 analog input channels.
There is a high (right side) and a low (left side) terminal in each pair to maintain consistent polarity (seefigure). For AC signals, the polarity is arbitrary unless multiple signals must maintain their phaserelationship.

Module Configuration
Factory Default: Low-pass filter – Enabled
Several jumpers must be set on the DBK50 and DBK51 to match your application:• 2 jumpers on JP1A or JP1B to select the main channel to use (see following figure).
• 1 jumper on JP1C for upper or lower sub channels• 1 jumper on JPn02 to use or bypass the low-pass filter—one for each channel number (n)The main output channel is one of the 16 primary data acquisition device [LogBook or Daq device]channels. Each DBK50 [and DBK51] has 8 input channels and can be set to an upper or lower subchannel that allows 2 modules to share a single LogBook or Daq device channel. Thus, a fully-populated
system can have 256 input channels.
After determining a main channel number for the module, set two jumpers on JP1A or JP1B for the desiredchannel. The two jumpers must be used side-by-side on the selected channel. This is illustrated forchannel 0 in the following figure. Next, set the JP1C jumper for the eight upper or eight lower subchannels. Note that two modules may share the same main channel if one is set to the upper sub channel
and the other set to the lower sub channel.

Each of the 8 input channels has a 3-pole low-pass filter that may be manually selected or bypassed bypositioning 2 shunt jumpers on 2×2 headers for each channel. Orient the jumpers parallel/horizontal(enable) or perpendicular/vertical (bypass) to the header label (JP102 to JP802 for each of 8 channels).
The following figure can be used for orientation.
DBK50 and DBK51, pg. 2989594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Channel Filter Jumper Settings for DBK50 and DBK51
The low-pass filters have a default corner frequency of 3.5 Hz when the jumpers are in the LPF-selected
positions. This frequency may be readily changed by installing a different value of SIP resistor network in
the 6-pin SIP socket of each filter section. Each channel has its own SIP located next to the channel filter
bypass jumper and labeled RN(1-8)01A. The table lists values of common networks and their cornerfrequencies.
Corner Frequency

R-SIP

Bournes Part #7500 Hz

47 Ω

4606M-102-470

3500 Hz

100 Ω

4606M-102-101

1750 Hz

200 Ω

4606M-102-201

750 Hz470 Ω4606M-102-471

350 Hz1kΩ

4606M-102-102

175 Hz2kΩ

4606M-102-208

75 Hz

4.7 k Ω

4606M-102-208

35 Hz

10 k Ω

4606M-102-103

17.5 Hz20 k Ω

4606M-102-203

7.5 Hz47 k Ω

4606M-102-473

3.5 Hz100k Ω

4606M-102-104

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Several setup steps in DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series devices and DaqBoards [ISA type] are required
to use a DBK50 or DBK51 module in a system.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, set the JP1 jumper [in the DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series
devices or ISA-Type DaqBoard] to the Analog Option Card Use, also referred to as the
expanded analog mode.
JP1

JP2
-15 V

DAC 1 - EXT-OCTOUTDAC 1 - INT-OCLKIN

SSH+15 V
Analog Option
Card Use
JP3

DAC 0 - EXT
JP4

UNIBIBipolar

DAC 0 - INT

SE
16CH

DIFF
8CH
Single-Ended

DaqBook/DaqBoard Jumpers for DBK50/51
DBK Option Cards and Modules

989594

DBK50 and DBK51, pg. 3

To power the interface circuitry of the DBK50 [or DBK51] via the internal ±15 VDC
power supply, JP1 must be set to “Analog Option Card Use.” However, if using
auxiliary power, e.g. the DBK32A or the DBK33, you must remove both JP1 jumpers.
Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section and to the DBK32A and DBK33
sections as applicable.

CAUTION
When using the SSH output, do not use an external voltage reference for DAC1.
Applying an external voltage reference for DAC1, when using the SSH output, will
result in equipment damage due to a conflict on P1, pin #26.
2.

Place the JP2 jumper in the SSH position.

3.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112 and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP3 jumpers inbipolar mode.

4.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112 and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP4 jumpers insingle-ended mode.

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No jumper configurations are required for these /2000 series devices.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.
DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices and DaqBoards [ISA type] must have theSimultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH) jumper in place when using a DBK50 or DBK51.
DaqView will remind you of this when you exit Hardware Setup with a DBK50 or DBK51
selected.

DBK50 and DBK51 – Specifications
Name/Function: 8-Ch. Isolated Voltage Input Module
Connectors: Male DB37, mates with P1
Inputs: Removable screw terminals
Number of Channels: 8, individually isolated
Isolation:
Channel-to-Channel: 500 V
Channel-to-System: 500 V
Input Impedance:
DBK50: 1 MΩ
DBK51: >10 MΩ
Bipolar Input Ranges:
DBK50: ±10 V, ±100 V, ±300 V
DBK51: ±100 mV, ±1 V, ±10 V
Output Voltage Range: ±5 VDC
Accuracy:
Without Offset Correction: 1% of range
With Offset Correction: 0.2% of range
Offset: ±50 mV max
Noise:
With Low-Pass Filter: <5 mV peak to peakWithout Low-Pass Filter: <50 mV peak to peak
Temperature Coefficient: 0.2 mV/°C
DBK50 and DBK51, pg. 4989594

Attenuation Ratios: Vout = Vin / K
DBK50:
10 V
K = 2.0
gain = 0.5
100 V K = 20.0 gain = 0.05
300 V K = 60.0 gain = 0.0166
DBK51:
0.1 V
K = 0.02 gain = 50
1V
K = 0.2
gain = 5
10 V
K = 2.0
gain = 0.5
Bandwidth: 20 kHz (LPF bypassed)
Low-Pass Filter: Factory installed 3-pole, 3.5Hz(bypass or user-set)
Operating Power Voltage Range: +9 to +20 VDC
Module Power Requirements: 7.5 W
AC Adapter Rating: 15 VDC @ 0.9 A
Dimensions: 285 mm W x 221 mm D x 36 mm H
(11” x 8.5” x 1.375”)
Weight: 1.7 kg (4 lbs)

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK53 and DBK54

16-Channel Analog Input Multiplexing Modules
DBK53 – Low Gain Programmable Module
DBK54 – High Gain Programmable Module

Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Differential Mode …… 2Single-Ended Mode …… 3
Module Connection …… 3
Module Configuration …… 3
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 4
DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 4

Software Setup …… 4
DBK53 and DBK54 – Specifications …… 5
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
oIn regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
DaqView Users: When a DBK53 or DBK54 is used with a /2000 Series Device, the Internal
Clock Speed should be set to 100 kHz as described in Chapter DBK Setup in DaqView.

Except for their gain ranges, the DBK53 (low gain) and DBK54 (high gain) are similar. Both:•

Have 16 channels of differential or single-ended analog inputs. Up to 16 modules can attach
to one LogBook or Daq Device for a maximum of 256 single-ended or differential inputs.

•

Are based on the DBK12 and DBK13 multiplexer cards.

•

Are fully enclosed modules with easy user connection using BNC-type connectors and ananalog common pin jack.

•Use power via the P1 connection from the LogBook or Daq Device or expansion
module/power supply.

•

Use one of the LogBook’s or Daq Device’s 16 analog input channels via the P1 connection tomeasure the multiplexed output. Both modules receive channel-selection and gain-selection
programming via digital signals via P1. The LogBook’s/Daq Device’s 512 location scansequencer can directly program the expansion modules to scan external signals at the same
10 µs/channel rate as on-board channels. (The time skew between channels is constant.)

The amplification gains for each module are:•

The DBK53 has 4 gain ranges of ×1, ×2, ×4, and ×8 that are scan-programmable per channel.
These gains can be combined with the standard gains of ×1, ×2, ×4, and ×8 for net gains of
×1, ×2, ×4, ×8, ×16, ×32, and ×64.

•

The DBK54 has 4 gain ranges of ×1, ×10, ×100 and ×1000 that are scan-programmable perchannel. These gains can be combined with the standard gains of ×1, ×2, ×4, and ×8 for net
gains of ×1, ×2, ×4, ×10, ×20, ×40, ×80, ×100, ×200, ×400, ×800, ×1000, ×2000, ×4000, and×8000.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989594

DBK53 and DBK54, pg. 1

Hardware Setup
Differential Mode
The DBK53 and DBK54 are designed for floating-type differential measurements. Neither the high nor the
low of the analog input has an inherent bias current return path to the analog common on the module. An
external common pin jack is provided on the outside panel for this bias-current return path. The following
figure shows a typical differential connection.

DBK53 and DBK54, pg. 2989594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Single-Ended Mode
Ground referencing must also be observed with single-ended measurements. The following figure shows atypical single-ended hookup.

Module Connection
When connecting analog inputs, carefully consider the requirements for signal connection and groundreferencing. Use BNC-terminated cables (test leads) to interface with the channel inputs. Be sure toprovide the necessary analog common connection.

Module Configuration
Factory Default: Input mode – Single-ended
Up to 16 DBK53s [or DBK54s] may be connected to a primary data acquisition device such as LogBook,
DaqBook, and DaqBoard. As a daisy-chain interface, each module must appear unique; and therefore uses
a different analog input channel identification.
To configure the module:
1.

Assign a channel number to the module. This number must not be used by any other DBK card or
module.

2.

On the DBK53 [or DBK54], locate the 16×2-pin header (JP1).

3.

Place the jumper on the channel you wish to use. The 16 jumper locations on the JP1 header arelabeled CH0 through CH15. Only 1 jumper setting is used on a single module; no other module inthe system can use the same setting.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989594

DBK53 and DBK54, pg. 3

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Three setup steps and needed to configure DaqBooks/100 Series & /200 Series devices and ISA-type
DaqBoards for a DBK53 [or DBK54].
1.

If not using auxiliary power, set JP1 for Analog Option Card Use, also referred to as the expanded
analog mode.

Note:
These jumpers do not
apply to /2000 Series
Devices.

To power the interface circuitry of the DBK53 or DBK54 via the internal ±15 VDC
power supply JP1 must be set to “Analog Option Card Use.” However, if using
auxiliary power, e.g., DBK32A or DBK33, you must remove both JP1 jumpers.
Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section and to the DBK32A andDBK33 sections for more detailed information, as applicable.

2.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP3 jumper in bipolar
mode.

3.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook/112, and DaqBook/120 only, place the JP4 jumper in singleended mode.

Note: The DaqBook/200 Series devices and DaqBoards do not have a JP4 jumper. The single-ended ordifferential choice is made via software configuration commands.

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No jumper configurations are required for the /2000 series devices.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.
DaqView Users: When a DBK53 or DBK54 is used with a /2000 Series Device, the Internal Clock
Speed should be set to 100 kHz as described in Chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.

DBK53 and DBK54, pg. 4989594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK53 and DBK54 – Specifications
Name/Function:
DBK53 16-Channel Low-Gain Analog Multiplexing Module
DBK54 16-Channel High-Gain Analog Multiplexing Module
Output Connector: DB37 male, mates with P1
Input Connector: BNC - DIFF. Inputs; Pin Jack - Analog Common
Gain Ranges:
DBK53: ×1, ×2, ×4, ×8
DBK54: ×1, ×10, ×100, ×1000
Inputs: 16 differential or single-ended jumper selectable as a group)
Voltage Range: 0 to ±5 VDC bipolar; 0 to 10 V unipolar
Input Impedance: 100 MΩ (in parallel with switched 150 pF)
Gain Accuracy: 0.05% typ, 0.25% max
Maximum Input Voltage: 35 VDC
Slew Rate: 20 V/s typ, 10 V/s min
Settling Time: 2 s to 0.01%
CMRR: 80 dB min
Non-Linearity: 0.002% typ, 0.015% max
Bias Current: 150 pA, 0.2 A max
Offset Voltage:±(0.5 + 5/G) V/°C typ±(2.0 + 24/G) mV max
Offset Drift:±(3 + 50/G) V/°C typ±(2.0 + 24/G) V/°C max

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989594

DBK53 and DBK54, pg. 5

DBK53 and DBK54, pg. 6989594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK558-Channel Frequency-To-Voltage Input Module
Overview …… 2

Features of the DBK55 …… 2
Input Signal Conditioning …… 3
Edge Selection …… 4
Debouncing …… 4
Frequency Measurement …… 5
D/A Conversion …… 6

Hardware Setup …… 6

Configuring the DBK55 Module …… 6
Configuring the Primary Data Acquisition Device …… 10
CE Compliance …… 10
Connecting the DBK55 to Signals and to the Primary Data Acquisition Device …… 11

Software Setup …… 11
Specifications…… 12

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

DBK55 Module

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989594

DBK55, pg. 1

Overview
Features of the DBK55
The DBK55 can be used for diverse frequency-monitoring applications. Typical uses include measuring
the flow of liquids with a flowmeter and measuring rotation (rpm) with a shaft encoder. The monitored
process must generate a series of electrical pulses whose frequency is related to the desired variable.
Features of the DBK55 include:• Inputs can be analog (high or low level) or digital.
• Each channel has a programmable frequency range.
• Noise effects can be minimized by debounce, attenuation, and low-pass filtering.
• Up to 32 DBK55s can be used with a single LogBook or Daq device for a maximum of 256
channels.
The digital-to-analog converter (DAC) outputs a voltage from -5 V to +5 V to correspond with the selected
frequency range. The DaqBook directs the DBK55 module’s DAC to convert the data from the proper
input channel.

DBK55 Block Diagram
As indicated in the next figure, the DBK55 module completes the following functions for each channel:• Conditions an input signal• Selects the signal’s rising or falling edge
• Debounces the edge
• Measures the signal’s frequency.
• Sends a voltage (Vout) analog signal [which corresponds to the measured frequency] from the DAC
to the primary data acquisition device.

These functions are discussed in the upcoming text.

DBK55 System Functionality
DBK55, pg. 2988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Input Signal Conditioning
The DBK55 conditions the input signal in several ways to provide the best output accuracy. Reducing
noise and limiting the bandwidth are the first steps in the conditioning process and are done in hardware.
Software can further clean up the signal by selecting the cleanest edge to read and by setting a debounce
delay to ignore spurious signals. The debounce concept is discussed on page 4.
Analog Input Signal Conditioning

WARNING
Input voltages should be at least 50 mV peak-to-peak. The maximum analog input
signal is 30 Vrms (42 Vpeak, 84 Vp-p). Stronger signals may damage the DBK55 orpresent an electrical shock hazard.

When a channel’s two “input circuit jumpers” are set for analog, the center conductor of the BNC
connector is AC-coupled through a 0.33 µF capacitor to the attenuator. The outside conductor connects toground. With the attenuator disabled [full sensitivity] input-protection diodes limit the signal to about 1.5
Vp-p. Larger signals will see an impedance of 6.7 KΩ (rather than 20 KΩ) in series with 0.33 µF. With
the attenuator enabled, the input impedance remains 20 KΩ regardless of the input level.
After AC-coupling, attenuation and filtering, a comparator converts the input signal into a clean digital
signal. The comparator output is high when the center-pin signal is higher than the outside-conductor
signal and low when the center-pin is lower than the outside-conductor signal. The comparator has
hysteresis to reduce the effects of noise by ignoring small signals.
The following graph shows typical sine-wave sensitivity in peak-to-peak voltage vs frequency. Six
combinations of attenuation (on/off) and low-pass filtering (30 Hz, 300 Hz, and 100 kHz) are graphed.

Digital Input Signal Conditioning

DBK Option Cards and Modules

988793

DBK55, pg. 3

CAUTION
The input signal may range from -15 to +15 V. Higher voltages may damage the
DBK55.
The digital input circuit is represented in the left-hand figure, below. When both of a channel’s “input
circuit jumpers” are set for digital, the outside (shield) conductor of the BNC connector connects toground. The center conductor is pulled up with 27 KΩ to +5 V and then passes through a 2.7 KΩ
protection resistor before being detected by a Schmitt-trigger buffer with input-protection diodes.
The input thresholds are fixed TTL levels. Below 0.5 V (0.8 V typical), the Schmitt-trigger buffer output
is low. Above 2.1 V (1.6 V typical), the buffer output is high. The 27 KΩ pull-up resistor allows thedigital inputs to sense switches or relays connected directly to the DBK55 as shown in the figure. The
debounce circuit can remove noise effects of switching. Debouncing is discussed later on this page.

The input impedance for digital signals depends on the signal level. For signals between 0 and 5 V, theinput-protection diodes do not conduct, and the digital input impedance is just the 27 KΩ pull-up
resistance. For signals less than 0 V or greater than 5 V, the input-protection diodes conduct and theimpedance drops to about 2.4 KΩ. The figure (upper right) shows the approximate digital-input
current/voltage relationship.

Edge Selection
The DBK55 determines the frequency by measuring the time between successive rising or falling edges of
the input signal. Which edge is electrically cleaner depends on the application and related components. If
rising edges are used, the edge-selection circuit does not modify the signal. If falling edges are used, thecircuit inverts the signal so falling edges appear as rising edges to the subsequent circuits. Throughsoftware, each channel can be independently set for rising- or falling-edge.

Debouncing
Debouncing is a process of ignoring signals too short to be real events. When a relay or switch closes, theelectrical contacts may not initially make good contact. Mechanical vibrations can occur, and contact ismade and broken several times before stabilizing. Counting all these signals would yield too high afrequency. The debounce circuit solves this problem by ignoring rising edges not preceded by a sustained
low signal. The sustain interval can be set in software to 0, 0.6, 2.5, or 10 ms for each channel.
Debouncing may be disabled (0 ms) for clean, high-frequency signals. Long debounce times will limit
high-frequency response (e.g., a 10 ms debounce will limit the frequency to about 100 Hz). In general, use“0” (debounce disabled) for clean, high-frequency signals; increase the debounce as needed for noisy, lowfrequency signals from switches and relays.

DBK55, pg. 4988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

The figure shows the effect of 10 ms debouncing on a noisy signal. To be counted, a rising edge must be
preceded by a low sustained for at least 10 ms without any other edges. Rising edges a and f are counted
because they are preceded by low signal levels sustained for at least 10 ms (the debounce time). All otherrising edges (b, c, d, and e) are ignored. Any falling edge makes (or keeps) the debounced output low,
regardless of preceding edges. Thus, the DBK55 can detect short pulses even with debouncing.

Frequency Measurement
After debouncing, the signal’s frequency is ready to be measured. Frequencies are measured to 12-bit
accuracy between a minimum frequency (Fmin) and maximum frequency (Fmax). This frequency range canbe programmed individually for each channel. The limitations on F min and Fmax are:•

The frequency range must be within 0 to 1 MHz.

••

Fmax - Fmin must be at least 1 Hz.
Fmax / Fmin must be at least 100/99 (1.010101).

Based on F min and Fmax , the DBK55 measures the frequency by counting input cycles during a variable
time interval. The length of the interval depends on the difference between Fmin and Fmax .
•For a wide range (when Fmin and Fmax are far apart), each bit of the 12-bit result represents alarge frequency change and can be measured quickly.

•

For a narrow range (when Fmin and Fmax are close together), each bit of the 12-bit result
represents a small frequency change and takes longer to measure.

The following equation determines the time interval needed to measure a frequency:
Minimum Measurement Period (sec) = (4096 x 0.5 µs) [Fmax/(Fmax - Fmin)]In this equation: 4096 derives from 12-bit precision; 0.5 µs is the resolution of the DBK55’s timing
circuits; and Fmax / (Fmax - Fmin) is the ratio the measurement time must be increased to achieve 12-bit
accuracy over the selected range.
To see how the measurement period varies, consider two examples:•

To measure frequencies from 59 to 61 Hz, the measurement period is at least
4096 x 0.5 µs x 61/2 = 62.5 ms, or about 16 measurements per second.

•

To measure frequencies from 1 to 61 Hz, the measurement period is at least
4096 x 0.5 µs x 61/60 = 2.1 ms. Note that as the DBK55 only measures frequency once per
cycle, it would take from 1 to 61 measurements per second.

Thus, measuring frequencies over a narrow range takes longer than over a wide range as the ratio of
Fmax/(Fmax - Fmin). The actual measurement time is the sum of several items: the minimum measurement
period (from the equation above), the actual input period, and a variable processing time of 0 to 4 ms.
Note: If the Sequence Rep Rate is set faster than the measurement rate, multiple readings of thesame measurement will occur.
After the frequency (F) is measured to the required accuracy, it is scaled to a 12-bit number (D) for use by
the Digital to Analog Converter (DAC). This 12-bit number is determined by the formula:D = 4096 [(F - Fmin) / (Fmax - Fmin)]; where: 0 < DAC < 4096
DBK Option Cards and Modules

988793

DBK55, pg. 5

If the measured frequency is Fmin, then the scaled result is 0. If the measured frequency were Fmax, then thescaled result would be 4096 but is limited to 4095. Measured frequencies below Fmin are scaled as 0;
frequencies above Fmax are scaled as 4095. The highest frequency that produces an accurate result is theone that converts to a DAC value of 4095; that is, Fmin + 4095/4096 (Fmax - Fmin) which is the same as
Fmax - 1/4096 (Fmax - Fmin).

Digital-to-Analog Conversion
The 12-bit scaled result of the frequency measurement is stored in a DAC to be read by the data acquisition
system. The DBK55 makes use of two DACs. The first DAC is shared by channels 0 through 3 and thesecond by channels 4 through 7. Each time the LogBook or Daq device addresses a different DBK55
channel, the associated DAC supplies the corresponding voltage (Vout) according to the formula:
Vout = 10.0 (D/4096) - 5.0 V
Since DAC values (D) range from 0 to 4095, DBK55 output voltages range from -5.0000 to +4.9976 V.
Calibration for the DBK55 is automatic. When the DBK55 is initialized through software, its gain andoffset errors are measured. The output circuits are then adjusted so the LogBook or Daq device
measurements correspond to the DAC settings. The DBK55’s software-adjustable gain and offset cancorrect for small errors in the DBK55 or the LogBook or Daq device. This automatic calibration
eliminates the periodic need for manual calibration.

Hardware Setup
CAUTION
DBK55 modules must be configured before connecting them to inputs and outputs.
Failure to do so could result in damage to equipment.
Hardware-related steps for setting up DBK55 include:••••

Configuring the DBK55 for the application
Configuring the Daq device to which the DBK55 is being connected toConnecting the input cables to sensors
Connecting the module’s output cable to a Daq device or LogBook.

Configuring the DBK55 Module
Unless the factory default settings are going to be used, several jumpers and one switch must be set on the
DBK55 module to match both the system setup and the signal-conditioning requirements. Each channel
can have its own individual hardware and software settings.
The default settings are:
• Input Circuit – set to Analog• Attenuation – set to Enabled (less sensitive)• Low Pass Filter – set to 100 kHz

The following table indicates the possible settings of each jumper and includes an illustration to facilitate
the location of jumpers. More detailed information concerning jumper settings immediately follows thetable.

DBK55, pg. 6988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK55 On-board Jumper Configurations
Configuration
Input Circuit Selection, pg. 8

Jumpers

ChannelJP3 and JP4

CH 0

JP23 and JP24

CH 1

Pins 1 and 2 connected for
two associated jumpers.

JP43 and JP44

CH 2

• For Digital Input mode; pins

JP63 and JP64

CH 3

JP103 and JP104

CH 4

JP123 and JP124

CH 5

JP143 and JP144

CH 6

JP163 and JP164

CH 7

JP1

CH 0

JP21

CH 1

JP41

CH 2

JP61

CH 3

JP101

CH 4

JP121

CH 5

JP141

CH 6

JP161

CH 7

JP2

CH 0

JP22

CH 1

JP42

CH 2

JP62

CH 3

JP102

CH 4

JP122

CH 5

JP142

CH 6

JP162

CH 7

• The default is Analog Input;

2 and 3 are connected forthe two associated jumpers.

Attenuation Selection, pg. 8• The default is Attenuation
Enabled (reduced
sensitivity). Pins 1 and 2
are connected.

• For Full Sensitivity(Attenuation Disabled) pins
2 and 3 are connected.

Low Pass Filter Selection, pg. 8• The default LPF is 100 kHz.

Pins 1 and 2 are connected.

• For an LPF of 300 Hz, pins
2 and 3 are connected.

• For an LPF of 30 Hz, pins 3
and 4 are connected.

Jumper Locations
DBK Option Cards and Modules

988793

Selected Functions

Analog(Default)

Digital* Two jumpers are required to set Analog
or Digital. For example, JP3 and JP4,
which are at the input and output ends ofthe circuit, respectively.

Attenuation
Enabled(Default)

Full
Sensitivity

Partial Board, Not Drawn to Scale
DBK55, pg. 7

Input Circuit Selection: Analog or Digital
Each input channel can be set for the analog (default) or digital circuit. Two jumpers must be set for eachchannel. These are listed in the preceding table, along with the associated channels.
Refer to the previous figure and table; then select the input circuit for each input channel as follows:1.

Determine the best circuit type for each channel.
• The digital input circuit works best for DC-coupled signals where the low level is less than
0.5 V and the high level is above 2.5 V and the voltage does not exceed ±15 V. By using apull-up resistor, switches and relays can create the signal. Frequencies can be as high as
960 kHz. The digital input circuit does not attenuate or filter the input signal.

•

The analog input circuit is AC-coupled and is sensitive to signals from 100 mV to 84 V p-p.
It also provides attenuation and low-pass filtering to reduce the effects of noise.

2.

Position each channel’s circuit jumpers (2 jumpers per channel) for analog or digital.

3.

Verify that both jumpers for a channel are set the same, i.e., both set to pins 1 and 2 for Analog, orboth set to pins 2 and 3 for Digital.

Attenuation Selection (Analog Input Circuit Only)
When measuring strong analog signals, the attenuator can reduce the input sensitivity and the effects ofnoise. If enabled, the attenuator reduces the input sensitivity by a factor of 50.
Refer to the previous figure and table; then set the attenuation for each channel as follows:1.

Decide whether or not you want attenuation for a given channel. Attenuation enabled, which
reduces sensitivity, is the default setting.
• Use attenuation (reduced sensitivity) if the input signal’s peak level exceeds 1 V.
• Disable attenuation (full sensitivity) if the input signal’s peak level is less than 1 V.

2.

For attenuation, position the associated jumper across pins 1 and 2. To disable attenuation (fullsensitivity), position the jumper across pins 2 and 3.

3.

Verify the jumper position for each input channel.

Low-Pass Filter Selection (Analog Input Circuit Only)
The low-pass filter removes high-frequency noise that would otherwise have the DBK55 detecting a higher
frequency than desired. To set the low-pass filter:

DBK55, pg. 8

1.

Determine the highest frequency you expect to measure on each input channel.

2.

Select the next higher cutoff frequency (30 Hz, 300 Hz, or 100 kHz) for each corresponding channel.
Verify that the DBK55’s sensitivity will accommodate the expected input signal strength. Page 3
includes a graph of typical sine-wave sensitivity (peak-to-peak voltage) verses frequency (Hz).

3.

Refer to the previous figure and table; then set the associated jumpers for the desired low-pass filter
selection.

988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Address Configuration via Rear Panel DIP Switch
You can connect 1 or 2 DBK55 modules to a single main channel on the primary data acquisition device.
Thus, a 16-channel LogBook or Daq device can support up to 32 DBK55 modules. Since each module has
8 input channels, a fully populated system can use 256 input sensors (32 modules x 8 channels per
module).
To keep the large number of inputs organized, each DBK55 module is given a unique address via its DIP
switch, S1[located on the rear panel].

CAUTION
Each DBK55 must be configured before connecting the module to inputs and outputs.
In addition, adjustment of the channel address must only be performed when thesystem’s power is OFF. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.
S1’s four leftmost micro-switches are used to set the module’s channel address in binary. Set the microswitches to the desired address only after ensuring that the system power is OFF. Several example address
settings are provided below. Other settings can be easily derived.
Each DBK55 module in the system must have a unique channel address for the primarydata acquisition device. Valid addresses are 0 to 15. Note that two modules can have asetting for the same primary channel, for example, two modules could be set to channel
0; as long as one module is set to “L” to indicate the lower sub-channels 0-7 and theother is set to “U” to indicate the upper sub-channels of 8-15. Examples of various
settings follow.
Primary Acquisition Device Channel 0
DBK55 Lower Sub-Channels 0-7
Channel 0 / Lower

The four leftmost micro-switches are set to “0” (Open). This sets the unit to
primary acquisition device Channel 0. The rightmost switch is at “L,”setting the module to the “lower” DBK55 sub-channels (0 through 7).
Note: If connecting a second module to primary device Channel 0, the U/L
switch for that module would be set to “U” for sub-channels 8 thru 15.
Primary Acquisition Device Channel 5
DBK55 Lower Sub-Channels 0-7

Channel 5 / Lower

The micro-switches for binary 4 and binary 1 are closed. This sets the unit to
primary acquisition device Channel5. The rightmost switch is at “L,” setting
the module to the “lower” DBK55 sub-channels (0 through 7).
Primary Acquisition Device Channel 15
DBK55 Lower Sub-Channels 0-7

Channel 15 / Lower

The micro-switches for binary 8, 4, 2, and 1 are closed, thus setting thechannel to “15” (8 + 4 + 2 + 1) for the primary acquisition device. The
rightmost switch is at “L,” setting the module to the “lower” DBK55 subchannels(0 through 7).
Primary Acquisition Device Channel 2
DBK55 Upper Sub-Channels 8-15

Channel 2 / Upper

DBK Option Cards and Modules

The micro-switch for binary 2 is closed, thus setting the channel to “2” for the
primary acquisition device. The rightmost switch is at “U,” setting the module
to the “upper” DBK55 sub-channels (8 through 15).

988793

DBK55, pg. 9

Configuring the Primary Data Acquisition Device
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Several setup steps of DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series devices
and DaqBoards [ISA type] are required to use DBK55
modules in a system.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, place the JP1 jumper inthe expanded analog mode.

Note: This default position is necessary to power theinterface circuitry of the DBK42 via the internal±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power(DBK32A/33), you must remove both JP1 jumpers(refer to the Section Power Requirements in the
document module DBK Basics, in regard to
calculating system power requirements).

CAUTION
When using the SSH output, do not use an external voltage reference for DAC1.
Applying an external voltage reference for DAC1, when using the SSH output, will
result in equipment damage due to a conflict on P1, pin #26.
2.

Place the JP2 jumper in the SSH position (See previous CAUTION).

3.

For DaqBook/100, /112 and /120 only, place JP3 jumpers in bipolar mode.

4.

For DaqBook/100, /112 and /120 only, place JP4 jumpers in single-ended mode.

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series
No jumper configurations are required on the DaqBook/2000 series and DaqBoard/2000 series devices inregard to connecting a DBK55.
LogBooks
No jumper configurations are required on LogBook devices in regard to connecting a DBK55.

CE ComplianceIf your data acquisition system needs to comply with CE standards, the DBK55 must be connected to the
LogBook or Daq device by a CA-143-x cable.
Note that in the presence of 3 V/m RF fields, the following conditions must exist in order to meet CE
requirements:•

500 mVpp signals are required to maintain 0.1% accuracy.

•

Metal shells of the BNC connectors must be directly connected to the chassis ground in orderto maintain 100 mV sensitivity and 0.1% accuracy.

•

The host computer must be properly grounded.

•

The host computer and peripheral equipment must be CE compliant.
Reference Notes: If your data acquisition system needs to comply with CE standards,
refer to the CE Compliance section of Signal Management chapter.

DBK55, pg. 10988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Connecting the DBK55 to Signals and to the Primary Data Acquisition Device
You can connect the DBK55 module to your primary data acquisition device and to its signal inputs after
you have completed the following:•••

set the DBK55 module’s addressconfigured the DBK55 on a channel-by-channel basis for the application
configured the primary data acquisition device, if applicable

You can connect up to eight sensors to one DBK55, i.e., one per BNC. A CA-37-x (or CA-131-x) cable isused to connect the module to a LogBook or Daq device via the module’s DB37 connector (P1).

WARNING
Electric shock hazard! Do not exceed a sensor input of 30 Vrms (42 Vpeak, 84 Vp-p)
for analog or ±15 Volts for digital. Exceeding these values may present an electric
shock hazard that could possibly result in injury or death, in addition to DBK55
damage.
Connect the DBK55 module as follows. If your system needs to be CE Compliant, be sure to read thepreceding CE Compliance section prior to connecting the DBK55.
1.

Connect each sensor’s BNC connector to a mating connector on the DBK55 module
Label each sensor with its associated channel/sub-channel information.

2.

3.

For a single DBK55 module, connect one end of the P1 cable to the module’s male
DB37 output connector.
•

For DaqBook applications - use a CA-37-1 cable.

•

For DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Series boards - use a CA-37-1 with a
DBK200 Series adapter.

•

For DaqBoard [ISA type] boards - use a CA-131-1 cable.

Connect the free end of the cable to the P1 port of the LogBook or Daq device. For multiple DBK55
modules, use a CA-37-x (or CA-131-x) cable to daisy-chain several modules or an expansion
module. For example, three DBK55s could be connected to a LogBook or a Daq device with via a
CA-37-3 cable.

Note: For longer cable runs, use a CA-113 to add 6 ft of cable length where needed.

Software Setup
LogView does not include the means to directly select DBK55. However, since a single
DBK55 has the functionality of two DBK7 cards we can still use a DBK55 with
LogBook. To do this, select DBK7 in LogView. This will recognize the DBK55, but will
identify it as a DBK7. Next do one of the following, as applicable:(a) If the DBK55 is set to the L sub-address, Select DBK7 (0) and DBK7 (1)(b) If the DBK55 is set to the H sub-address, Select DBK7 (2) and DBK7 (3)Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to Chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to Chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView. See above note.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987693

DBK55, pg. 11

Specifications - DBK55
Name/Function: 8-Channel Frequency-to-Voltage Input Card
Input Channels per Module: 8
Maximum Modules per System: 32
Maximum Channels per System: 256
Input Connector: 1 BNC connector per channel
Connector: DB37 male, mates with P1
Frequency Ranges: (programmable) 0 Hz to 960 kHz
Output Voltage Range: -5 V to +5 V
Debounce Delays: (software selectable) 0, 0.6, 2.5, 10 ms
Measurement Rate: up to 500 per second per channel, 1000 per second total
Accuracy: 0.1%
Power Required: 840 mW

Analog Input
Low-level:
50 mV typical (100 mV max) p-p sine wave @ 10 Hz to 100 kHz
Any edge of 50 (100 max) mV amplitude and 5 V/s rate.
Input impedance: AC-coupled (0.33 µF), in series w/ 20 KΩ to ground.
15 mV hysteresis.
High-level:0.75 V typical (1.25 V max) p-p sine wave @ 10 Hz to 100 kHz
Any edge of 0.75 V (1.25 V max) amplitude and 50 V/s rate.
Input impedance: AC-coupled (0.33 µF), in series w/ 20 KΩ to ground.
250 mV hysteresis.
Maximum Input Voltage: 30 Vrms (84 Vp-p)
Low-Pass Filters: (hardware selectable) 30 Hz, 300 Hz, 100 kHz, single pole

Digital Input
TTL-Level: 0.001 to 960 kHz.
Input Impedance: 27 KΩ pull-up to +5 V || 50 pF
V Low (“0”): 0.8 V typ, 0.5 V min
V High (“1”): 1.6 V typ, 2.1 V max
Hysteresis: 400 mV min
Pulse Width (high or low): 520 nsec min.
Maximum Input Voltage: -15 V to +15 V

DBK55, pg. 12988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK603-Slot Expansion Chassis with Termination Panels
Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

1 – Turn off system power and disconnect DBK60 …… 3
2 – Remove the top cover (optional) …… 3
3 – Remove the card drawer …… 3
4 – Remove termination panels …… 3
5 – Determine power requirements …… 3
6 – Configure the chassis for power source …… 4
7 – Install a power card, if needed …… 5
8 – Configure the DBK cards …… 5
9 – Install the DBK cards …… 5
10 – Connect the internal signals …… 5
11 – Install the termination panels …… 5
12 – Install the card drawer …… 6
13 – Connect external signals …… 6
14 – Install the top cover …… 6
15 – Connect the DBK60 to the rest of your acquisition system …… 6
16 – Turn on system power and check operation …… 6

DBK60 – Specifications …… 6

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK60 expansion chassis holds up to three analog DBK cards, or up to three digital DBK cards, andprovides termination panels with connectors for various sensors. Several DBK60 units can be linked
together and then to the primary acquisition device, e.g., a DaqBook, DaqBoard, or LogBook.
Splice plate kits can be used to stack multiple DBK60 units to the primary device.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989594

DBK60, pg. 1

The front panel has a male DB37 connector
that leads to the acquisition processor via a
CA-37-x, CA-37-xT, or equivalent cable.

The rear panel is made of three termination panels with connectors for the various sensors.

Hardware Setup
Hardware setup involves configuring the DBK60, configuring up to three DBK cards that will be used withthe module, installing the DBK cards, then connecting signal lines to the DBK60’s termination panels.
Read over the following WARNING and CAUTION, then complete the steps to successfully setup yourhardware.

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard! To avoid injury or equipment damage, turn off power to all
connected equipment during setup.

CAUTIONUse ESD tools, containers, and procedures during setup of DBK cards. Electrostatic
discharge can damage some of the components.
To prevent pin damage, align DBK cards with the backplane DB37 connectors before
gently pressing them together.

DBK60, pg. 2989594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

1 – Turn off system power and disconnect the DBK60
If the DBK60 is presently connected in a system, turn off all system devices and disconnect the
DBK60 from the system.

2 – Remove the top cover (optional)
Removing the top cover is not necessary, but it does make it easier to set the JP2 jumper in step 6.
A removed cover also allows for configuration and signal connection changes to be made to cards
later on in the procedure, after the card drawer is returned to the DBK60.
To remove the top cover, simply remove the top cover screws and slide the cover towards thetermination panels.

3 – Remove the card drawer
To remove the card drawer, refer to the A, B, and C
call-outs in the figure at the right; then complete thecorresponding steps below.
A. Remove the two screws that hold the card
drawer to the chassis.
B. Loosen the three captive thumbscrews that holdthe termination panels to the chassis.
C. Using the handle, carefully slide out the card
drawer.

Three Steps for Removing the Card Drawer

4 – Remove the termination panels
Remove the two screws [two per panel] that secure each termination panel to the card drawer(see figure).

5 – Determine the power requirements
Depending on the power needs of your system’s DBK cards, you may need to add a power card.
Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section in regard to calculating your system’s
power needs.
A. Use the DBK Power Requirements Work Table to calculate the power requirements of yoursystem’s DBK cards.
B. Use the Available Power Chart to determine your system’s power availability.
C. If the required power in step 5A is more than the available power in step 5B, or very close to it,
you will need to use auxiliary power. There are two DBK auxiliary power supply cards for use
in LogBook, DaqBook, and DaqBoard applications. These are the DBK32A and the DBK33.

DBK Option Cards and Modules•

DBK32A – provides power at ±15 V.

•

DBK33 – provides power at +5 V and ±15 V.

989594

DBK60, pg. 3

6 – Configure the chassis for the power source
Use one power source, and only one power source, for cards on the P1 bus!
+5 V is selected with the DBK60’s JP2 jumper, located inside the expansion chassis on the P1
interconnect board (see the following figure for location).
±15 V is selected with two JP1 jumpers, located on the board of the primary dataacquisition device, such as a DaqBook or ISA-type DaqBoard.
DO NOT CONFUSE THESE JP1 JUMPERS WITH THE JP1 JUMPER IN THE DBK60.
A. If +5 V will be supplied from a source outside the expansion chassis, place a jumper on DBK60’s JP2
header. JP2 is located on the P1 interconnect board (see figure).
B. If +5 V will be supplied from a DBK33 power card inside the expansion chassis, remove the jumper
from the JP2 header (located on the P1 interconnect board).
C. If using a DBK32A or DBK33 power card anywhere in the system, remove the +15 V and -15 Vjumpers from JP1 on the primary data acquisition device, such as a DaqBook or ISA-type
DaqBoard. DO NOT CONFUSE THESE JP1 JUMPERS WITH THE JP1 JUMPER IN THE DBK60.
Reference Notes:
Refer to the DBK32A or DBK33 sections, if applicable.

DBK60, pg. 4989594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

7 – Install a power card, if needed
If you determined [in step 5] that additional power is needed, add a DBK32A or DBK33 power card to theacquisition processor chassis, or to the DBK60 expansion chassis.
To install a power card in a DBK60 complete steps 7A and 7B. Refer to the previous figure as needed.
A. Carefully align the power card’s DB37 connector with a DB37 connector on DBK60’s P1 interconnectboard and gently press the power card to establish a complete and solid connection.
B. Use two screws to secure the power card to DBK60’s card drawer standoffs.

8 – Configure the DBK cards
Configure channel addresses that are unique to each card; i.e., do not duplicate addresses. Some cards makeuse of jumpers for address configuration, while others make use of DIP switches.
Reference Note:
Refer to the appropriate DBK document modules in regard to specific DBK configuration.

9 – Install the DBK cards
You cannot mix analog and digital DBK cards in the DBK60; in other words, use all analog or
all digital, but not both.
A. Carefully align the DBK card’s DB37 connector with a DB37 connector on the interconnect board andgently press gently press the DBK card to establish a complete and solid connection (see previous figure).
B. Use two screws to secure the DBK card to the standoffs on the DBK60 card drawer (see previous figure).
C. Repeat installation steps 9A and 9B for additional DBK cards, as applicable. Be sure that all cards to beinstalled are analog, or all digital. Analog and digital can not be mixed within a DBK60.

10 – Connect the internal signals
Connect signal inputs from DBK cards to the termination panels. DBK cards connect to the termination
panels in various ways. Refer to the following figure and to the specific DBK document modules as needed.
•••

Single-ended connections use analog common.
Differential connections require the proper polarity, typically red-to-red for high (+) andblack-to-black for low (-).
For thermocouples, red is generally the low side. The T/C connector and wire type must match the T/Ctype used.

11 – Install the termination panels
Mount the termination panels to the card drawer. Use two screws to secure each panel.
Refer to the DBK60 Hardware Setup figure.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989594

DBK60, pg. 5

12 – Install the card drawer
A. Hold the card drawer by its handle and tilt it up slightly. Place it on the bottom track of the DBK60.
B. Carefully slide the card drawer into the chassis. When it engages the bottom track, level the card drawer
and continue inserting it until it engages with the P1 interconnect board.
C. Tighten the three captive thumbscrews [on the termination panels] into the chassis(see DBK60 Hardware Setup figure).
D. Install the two bottom screws that hold the card drawer to the chassis.

13 – Connect external signals
Connect signal inputs from the sensors to termination panels.

14 – Install the top coverIf the top cover had been removed, slide it back into position and secure the cover with the two
top cover screws.

15 – Connect the DBK60 to the rest of your acquisition system
A. If using analog DBK cards, connect the DBK60 to P1 of the system.
B. If using digital DBK cards, connect the DBK60’s P1 to a P2 port of the system.
Then Re-label the DBK60 front panel connector “P2.”

16 – Turn on system power and check operation

DBK60 - Specifications
Description: DBK Card Expansion chassis accommodating 3 DBK cards, configurable power
capability. Selection of 7 termination panels to allow custom user input connection.
Capacity: Accommodates any 3 DBK expansion cards.
Analog and Digital DBK cards cannot be mixed within a single DBK60 enclosure.
Material: Aluminum and Steel
Finish: Black, powder-coatedDimensions: 280 mm x 330 mm x 89 mm (11” x 13” x 3.5”)
Weight: 3.08 kg empty (7 lbs.); cards .25 to .75 kg each (8 to 12 oz)

DBK60, pg. 6989594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK658-Channel Transducer Interface Module

The DBK65 is campatible with: WaveBook, ZonicBook, LogBook, DaqBook, DaqLab, DaqScan, and DaqBoard/2000 Series devices.

Overview …… 1
DBK65 Power Requirements …… 2
Power Available for Transducers …… 2
DBK65 Voltage Regulation ...... 2
Selecting an Excitation Voltage …… 3
Customizing a Voltage …… 4
Creating a 4 to 20mA Current Loop …… 5
Source Impedance and Settling Time ….. 6
Configuring the DBK65 Address …… 7
Configuring the Primary Data Acquisition Device …… 8Connecting the DBK65 to Signals and to the Primary Data Acquisition Device …… 9
Software Setup …… 10
Calibrating a Transducer using the “Shunt Calibration” Technique …… 11
DBK65 Specifications …… 12

Overview
The DBK65 is an 8 channel transducer
interface module. Transducers of 2, 3, 4,
and 6 wire type can be easily connectedto the device by means of removablescrew terminal blocks, 1 per channel.
The module is ideally suited fortransducer outputs of the following
types. Wiring schematics are provided
on page 2 of this DBK65 section.
•
4 to 20 mA•
3-wire string pots•
4-wire bridge based transducers•
6-wire bridge based transducers

DBK65

DBK65 Block Diagram
Note 1: The user can install a resistor for use with the programmable regulator. The programmable voltage source can bewithin the range of 5 to 20 VDC.
Note 2: The user can install a 250Ω resistor across the positive and negative signal lines (+Signal and -Signal) for
4 to 20 mA transducer outputs.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

988793

DBK65

pg. 1

Each of the 8 channels can be set for a different excitation voltage. 5, 10, 15, and 24 VDC are provided
internally from the DBK65 and are selected via placement of a jumper. In addition, a fifth jumper position
can be used to select a custom voltage between 5 and 20 VDC. The user must install a resistor if thisoption is desired. The following section, Customizing a Voltage, contains additional information.
Each channel includes 2 screw terminals that allow for a relay closure. Designated as CAL+ and
CAL-, the terminals can be used to switch in a calibration resistor for 6-wire transducers. Note that the
DBK65’s rear panel CAL switch will open or close the internal calibration switches for all 8 channels
simultaneously.

DBK65 Power Requirements
The amount of DC power required, which is supplied to the DBK65 through its Power-In DIN5 connector,
is 15 V @ 833 mA, 20 V @ 625 mA, assuming max load. In addition, the amount of power drawn fromthe P1-based host acquisition device, such as a Daq device or a LogBook is 25 mA from ±15 V, 750 mW
total. For purpose of our discussion here, a P1-based device is one which is connecting to the DBK65 via
the DB37 (P1) connector.

Power Available for Transducers
At the excitation voltages available from the DBK65 (5 to 24 V) a single transducer will typically draw
from 10 to 100mA. This fact and the per-channel and per-module current limits must be taken into accountto avoid overloading the system.
•••

Total current available, for all 8 channels: 240mA.
Current available for a single channel: 100mA.
Transducer, typical current draw: 10 to 100mA

DBK65 Voltage Regulation
Better voltage regulation results in a lower variance of the source output voltage [excitation voltage], asload is applied. Graphs depicting DBK65 voltage regulation for excitation set at 5, 10, 15, and 24 V are
included with the product’s specifications.
The following graph is intended to provide a better understanding of voltage regulation. In the graph, theoutput voltage (VOut) exhibits less than ±5% variance from nominal voltage, i.e., 5, 10, 15, or 24 VDC.
This also applies to the user settable 5 to 20 VDC.
The ±5% variance factor holds true up to the limiting current (Max Current). Refer to the graphs at the endof Specifications for typical voltage and current values.

Typical Current Limiting Voltage Curve

DBK65

pg. 2

988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Selecting an Excitation Voltage
Each channel has a voltage select header, which consists of 5 pairs of pins and a jumper. The jumper
position determines the excitation voltage. Possible voltages are 5, 10, 15, and 24 VDC. A fifth possibility
exists for a custom voltage that resides within the range of 5 to 20 V. To obtain a custom voltage you must
install a resistor in the excitation line labeled “PGM.” The method is discussed shortly.

Reference for Selecting a Pre-Set Voltage Value

The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components.
Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should
always handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or
circuit components unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESDcontrolled area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats andwrist straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.

WARNING
HOT COMPONENTS! Allow the DBK65 module to cool for at least 30 minutes
before removing the top cover. Some internal components can become very hot
and may cause burns.

To select a pre-set voltage (5, 10, 15, or 24V):
1. Remove the DBK65 from power and disconnect all signal lines.
2. Allow the unit to cool for at least 30 minutes.
3. Remove the 4 screws from the top cover plate. Then remove the plate.
4. Position the voltage select header’s jumper to the desired setting. See the preceding figure.
5. Re-install the top cover plate and secure it with the 4 screws that were removed in step 3.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

988793

DBK65

pg. 3

Customizing a Voltage
To make use of the custom voltage feature you will need to acquire a resistor of the calculated value. The
formula to use is:
R2 = (Vout – 1.2V) / 0.007645
Example:Suppose you wanted an excitation source of 12V. Simply replace the Vout variable with 12V and solve for
R2. Thus, R2 = (12 - 1.2) / 0.007645 = 1412.688Ω Ιn practice, a 1400 ohm, 1% resistor would be used.
Of course, 1400Ω is a little off from the 1412.688Ω, which was calculated. To see the actual nominal
voltage that would result from 1400Ω we can use a second equation.
Vout = 1.2V (1 + R2/158) + 0.00005*R2
Vout = 1.2 (1 + 1400/158) + 0.00005*1400 = 11.903 volts

After the resistor value is known, it can be installed as follows.
The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components.
Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should
always handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or
circuit components unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESDcontrolled area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats andwrist straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.

WARNING
HOT COMPONENTS! Allow the DBK65 module to cool for at least 30 minutes
before removing the top cover. Some internal components can become very hot
and may cause burns.

1.

Remove the DBK65 from power and disconnect all
signal lines.

2.

Allow the unit to cool for at least 30 minutes.

3.

Remove the 4 screws from the top cover plate. Thenremove the plate.

4.

Remove solder from the 2 holes at the resistor mounting
location.

5.

Using rosin core solder and proper soldering technique,solder the resistor into position for the applicablechannel. Be sure that the resistor leads are shortenough to avoid making contact with the metal
chassis.
The figure to the right indicates the resistor location for
use with channel 0 (CH00). The location scenario is similar
for all 8 channels.
Refer to the following table for a channel’s PGM Resistor Location
number. The location numbers appear on the circuit board.

DBK65

pg. 4

988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Channel

PGM Resistor
Location

Voltage Out
Jumper Header

CH00

R110

J11

CH01

R120

J21

CH02

R130

J31

CH03

R140

J41

CH04

R150

J51

CH05

R160

J61

CH06

R170

J71

CH07

R180

J81

Voltage
Set

Resistor
Value

Vout

R2

6.

On the jumper header, reposition the channel’s voltage out jumper to the “PGM” position. Refer tothe table for a channel’s applicable Jumper Header. The header numbers appear on the circuit board.

7.

If applicable, install resistors for other channels, and set the applicable voltage out jumper headers to
PGM.

8.

Re-install the top cover plate and secure it with the 4 screws that were removed in step 3.

Creating a 4 to 20mA Current Loop
Inputs to monitor the commonly used 4 to 20mA current loops most often employ a 250Ω precisionresistor to develop a 1 to 5 VDC voltage drop.
Ideally, a resistor for such purpose should have a 0.1% tolerance (or better) with a minimum power ratingof 0.25W and a temperature coefficient of at least 25ppm/°C.
Lower values of resistance, for example, 62.5Ω [for a lower voltage drop within the loop of 0.25 to 1.25
VDC] will require that the host data acquisition device use a gain of x4 to maximize the signal resolution.

The discharge of static electricity can damage some electronic components.
Semiconductor devices are especially susceptible to ESD damage. You should
always handle components carefully, and you should never touch connector pins or
circuit components unless you are following ESD guidelines in an appropriate ESDcontrolled area. Such guidelines include the use of properly grounded mats andwrist straps, ESD bags and cartons, and related procedures.

WARNING
HOT COMPONENTS! Allow the DBK65 module to cool for at least 30 minutes
before removing the top cover. Some internal components can become very hot
and may cause burns.

To create a 4 to 20mA current loop:
1.

Remove the DBK65 from power and disconnect all signal lines.

2.

Allow the unit to cool for at least 30 minutes.

3.

Remove the 4 screws from the top cover plate. Then remove the plate.

4.

Remove solder from the 2 holes at the resistor mounting location (see the following figure forlocation).

DBK Option Cards and Modules

988793

DBK65

pg. 5

5.

Using rosin core solder and proper soldering technique,solder the resistor into position for the applicablechannel. Be sure that the resistor leads are shortenough to avoid making contact with the metal
chassis.
The figure to the right indicates the resistor location for
use with channel 0 (CH00). The location scenario issimilar for all 8 channels.

6.

Re-install the top cover plate and secure it with the
4 screws that were removed in step 3.

Source Impedance and Settling TimeHigh speed multiplexing of signal sources with non-zero impedance will result in reading errors caused bysettling time. In the simplest form, a multiplexing system consists of a group of switches, with internal
resistance, and an output capacitance at the input of an amplifier feeding an A/D converter with a samplehold circuit on the input. During the short time a channel signal is connected to the A/D amplifier, thesignal must charge the output capacitance to the true value of the signal so that the sample-hold captures anaccurate value for the A/D converter to digitize. If the source has significant internal impedance thevoltage reading will be reduced.
Source impedance below 1000 ohms will create negligible error. Above 1000 ohms, the effects are
increasingly noticeable. An accurate source in series with a variable resistance will readily demonstratethis. Although the effect is exponential, an easy reference point to remember is that 25K of source
impedance will result in approximately a 10% error.

Reading Error vs. Source ResistanceSource Resistance in Ohms

DBK65

pg. 6

988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Configuring the DBK65 Address
You can connect 1 or 2 DBK65 modules to a single main channel on the primary data acquisition device.
Thus, a 16-channel Daq device can support up to 32 DBK65 modules. Since each module has 8 input
channels, a fully populated system can use 256 input sensors (32 modules x 8 channels per module).
To keep the large number of inputs organized, each DBK65 module is given a unique address via its DIP
switch, S1 [located on the rear panel].

CAUTION
Each DBK65 must be configured before connecting the module to inputs and outputs.
In addition, adjustment of the channel address must only be performed when thesystem’s power is OFF. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.
S1’s four leftmost micro-switches are used to set the module’s channel address in binary. Set the microswitches to the desired address only after ensuring that the system power is OFF. Several example address
settings are provided below. Other settings can be easily derived.
Each DBK65 module in the system must have a unique channel address for the primarydata acquisition device. Valid addresses are 0 to 15. Note that two modules can have asetting for the same primary channel, for example, two modules could be set to channel
0; as long as one module is set to “L” to indicate the lower sub-channels 0-7 and theother is set to “U” to indicate the upper sub-channels of 8-15. Examples of various
settings follow.
Primary Acquisition Device Channel 0
DBK65 Lower Sub-Channels 0-7
Channel 0 / Lower

The four leftmost micro-switches are set to “0” (Open). This sets the unit to
primary acquisition device Channel 0. The rightmost switch is at “L,”setting the module to the “lower” DBK65 sub-channels (0 through 7).
Note: If connecting a second module to primary device Channel 0, the U/L
switch for that module would be set to “U” for sub-channels 8 thru 15.
Primary Acquisition Device Channel 5
DBK65 Lower Sub-Channels 0-7

Channel 5 / Lower

The micro-switches for binary 4 and binary 1 are closed. This sets the unit to
primary acquisition device Channel 5. The rightmost switch is at “L,”setting the module to the “lower” DBK65 sub-channels (0 through 7).

Primary Acquisition Device Channel 15
DBK65 Lower Sub-Channels 0-7
Channel 15 / Lower

The micro-switches for binary 8, 4, 2, and 1 are closed, thus setting thechannel to “15” (8 + 4 + 2 + 1) for the primary acquisition device. The
rightmost switch is at “L,” setting the module to the “lower” DBK65 subchannels(0 through 7).
Primary Acquisition Device Channel 2
DBK65 Upper Sub-Channels 8-15

Channel 2 / Upper

DBK Option Cards and Modules

The micro-switch for binary 2 is closed, thus setting the channel to “2” for the
primary acquisition device. The rightmost switch is at “U,” setting the module
to the “upper” DBK65 sub-channels (8 through 15).
988793

DBK65

pg. 7

Configuring the Primary Data Acquisition Device
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of a DBK65 with a DaqBook/100 Series, DaqBook/200 Series, or with an ISA-type DaqBoard device
requires the configuration of jumpers JP1 and JP4 located on that device, as applicable.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, set the JP1 jumper for Analog Option Card Use [also referred to as the
expanded analog mode].

Note:
These jumpers do
not apply to /2000
Series Devices.

Required Jumper Settings for DaqBook/100 Series,
DaqBook /200 Series, and ISA-Type DaqBoards
The JP1 default position (above) is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the
DBK65 via the internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power you must
remove both JP1 jumpers.
2.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112, and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in the single-ended
mode.

Note: Analog expansion cards convert all input signals to single-ended voltages that are referenced toanalog common.
DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series
No jumper configurations are required on the DaqBook/2000 series and DaqBoard/2000 series devices inregard to connecting a DBK65.
LogBooks
No jumper configurations are required on LogBook devices in regard to connecting a DBK65.

DBK65

pg. 8

988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Connecting the DBK65 to Signals and to the Primary Data Acquisition Device
You can connect the DBK65 module to your primary data acquisition device and to its signal inputs after
you have completed the following:•••

set the DBK65 module’s addressconfigured the DBK65 on a channel-by-channel basis for the application
configured the primary data acquisition device, if applicable

You can connect up to eight sensors to one DBK65. A CA-37-x, CA-131-x, or a CA-255-xT cable is used
to connect the module to a LogBook or Daq device via DB37 connectors (P1).
To connect a DBK65 to a WaveBook or ZonicBook, refer to the final portion of this section, Connecting toa BNC Connector.

If your system needs to be CE Compliant, be sure to read the applicable Declarations ofConformity prior to connecting the DBK65.

Connect the DBK65 module as follows.
1.

Connect each input to a screw terminal block on the DBK65. Example wiring diagrams are provided
below. Note that the screw-terminal blocks can be removed from the DBK65 to allow for easierwiring.

CAUTION
Do not connect the excitation source to a non-isolated, powered transducer. Making
such a connection can cause damage to both the DBK65 and to the transducer.

Wiring Scenarios
A Note Regarding the Excitation Source
The excitation source is ground-referenced, not floating, i.e., the -Excitation (EXC -) terminal is connectedto the DBK65’s ground. The Excitation Source is designed to interface with transducers such that it is the
only power source, or its connection is electrically isolated from other power sources.
DBK Option Cards and Modules

988793

DBK65

pg. 9

Tip: Label each transducer with its associated channel/sub-channel information.

2.

3.

For a single DBK65 module, connect one end of the P1 cable to the module’s male DB37 output
connector.
•

For DaqBook applications - use a CA-37-1, or a CA-255-xT cable.

•

For DaqBoard/2000 Series applications - use a CA-37-1 with a DBK200 Series adapter.

•

For DaqBoard [ISA type] boards - use a CA-131-1 cable.

Connect the free end of the cable to the P1 port of the LogBook or Daq device. For multiple DBK65
modules, use a CA-37-x, CA-131-x, or a CA-255-xT cable to daisy-chain several modules or an
expansion module. For example, three DBK65s could be connected to a LogBook or a Daq device
with via a CA-37-3 cable.

Connecting to a BNC Connector (Used with WaveBooks and ZonicBooks)
To connect a BNC connector to a DBK65 channel as signal input we make use of the two-wire scenario.
The positive wire comes from the BNC central pin and connects to a DBK65 channel SIG+ terminal. The
negative wire connects the negative of the pin hub to a DBK65 channel SIG- terminal. A “BNC to Male
Binding Post” connector is convenient for making such two-wire connections.

Connecting a BNC to SIG+ and SIG-

BNC to Male Binding Post (for 2-wire connection)

Software Setup
The DBK65 has no special software settings. The software controls are equivalent to those for a directconnection; e.g., for a DaqBoard/2000 Series board there are Type selections of x1 to x64, representing theinternal gain of that board. When using the DBK65 with that board you will have the same Type options,since the DBK65 is always a constant gain of x1.
LogView does not include the means to directly select a DBK65. To use a DBK65
with LogBook: First select DBK80 in LogView. This will recognize the DBK65, butwill identify it as a DBK80 (which has eight additional channels). Next do one of thefollowing as applicable:(a) If the DBK65 is set to the L sub-address, use channels 0 through 7; and ignore
the displayed unused channels (8 through 15).
(b) If the DBK65 is set to the H sub-address, use channels 8 through 15; andignore the displayed unused channels (0 through 7).
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to Chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to Chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView. See above note.

DBK65

pg. 10987693

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Calibrating a Transducer using the “Shunt Calibration Technique”
The “shunt calibration” technique involves applying a known resistance across one leg of a transducer.
When the resistance is applied, the transducer’s output changes as it would if an actual load was applied.
Typically, transducers with internal amplifiers already have a built-in shunt calibration resistor. The shuntcalibration resistor can be activated via the DBK65 by use of its rear panel CAL switch.
Prior to making use of the CAL switch, two transducer wires must be connected from the transducer to theapplicable channel’s CAL+ and CAL- terminals on the DBK65. The wiring section of the transducer’s
calibration data sheet will indicate which terminals (or wires) are to be connected.
To perform shunt calibration:
1.

Verify that each transducer to be calibrated has been properly connected to a DBK65
channel’s CAL+ and CAL- terminals.

2.

Ensure that the transducer has no initial load, i.e., that it is initially at “zero.”

3.

Adjust the data instruments zero-control to obtain a value of 0.0 volts.
In the case of 4 to 20 mA outputs, this value would be 4 mA.

4.

Slide the CAL switch on the DBK65 rear panel to the “CLOSED” position. Each channel’sinternal calibration switch will simultaneously close, activating the calibration shunts [ifpresent].
A step change in the channel output will occur.

5.

If the amount of the step change does not agree with the expected change as indicated by thetransducer’s calibration data sheet, adjust the transducer as needed. This is typicallyaccomplished with SPAN and/or GAIN control. Refer to the documentation for your specifictransducer.

6.

Return the “CAL” switch to the “OPEN” position. This removes the shunt calibration
resistance from each channel.

7.

Recheck the “zero.” Note that there may be some interaction if the GAIN or SPAN control
adjustments were large.
In regard to 4 to 20 mA circuits, several full cycles of adjusting the ZERO and SPAN controls
may be needed.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

988793

DBK65

pg. 11

DBK65 Specifications
Dimensions: 285 mm W x 220 mm D x 45 mm H (11” x 8.5” x 1.75”)
Weight: 1.13 kg (2.5 lbs.)
Operating Temperature: -30°C to +70°C
System Connector: DBK37 male, mates with P1 connectors
Transducer Connectors: 8 removable screw-terminal blocks. Each block has 6 terminals.
Power Connectors: DIN5 Power In, DIN5 Power Out
DC Power Input: +10 to +30 VDC
DC Power Required (through DBK65 Power-In DIN5): 15 V @ 833 mA, 20 V @ 625 mA, assuming max load
DC Power Required (from P1-based host acquisition device): 25 mA from ±15 V, 755 mW total
Gain Ranges: x1
Inputs: 8 differential voltage inputs
Maximum Voltage Range: ±10 V
Input Impedance: 20M Ohm
Accuracy: ±[0.025% +150 µV] (typ), ±[0.1% +250 µV] (max)Noise: 60 µVRMS (typ)Temperature Coefficient: 10ppm for every degree outside the range of 0° to 50°C
Maximum Signal Input Voltage (without damage): ±35 V
3 dB Bandwidth: 2.6 MHz
CMRR: 80 dB (typ)Output Voltage: Each channel, jumper-selectable to +5 V, +10 V, +15 V, and +24 V
or to a custom voltage setting within the range of +5 to +20 V (user set via resistor)
Voltage Accuracy: ±2% (typical)
Current Limit: 100 mA per channel
Load Regulation: 5% (typ)Total Output: 240 mA max, total of all 8 channels

Accessories and Cables
Rack mount kit

RackDBK3

Shielded P1 T cable for use with DaqBook/2020, LogBook/360, WBK40, WBK41

CA-255-4T

Shielded P1 T cable for use with DaqBook/2001, /2005, LogBook/300, DaqLab/2001, /2005

CA-255-2T

Ribbon cable for use with DaqScan

CA-37-x (see note)

Note: The CA-37-x ribbon cable can also be used in lieu of the CA-255-x molded T cables.

The following 4 graphs illustrate the current limiting capabilities of the DBK65 for 5, 10, 15, and 24 VDC excitation
values.

DBK65

pg. 12988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK Option Cards and Modules

988793

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

9

2

6

2

0

0

3

0

2

0

4

8

6

3

7

5

0

6

6

6

0

02
4

02
6

02
7

02
9

03
1

03
3

03
5

03
8

04
1

04
5

04
9

05
4

06
1

07
0

08
1

09
7

12
1

15
9

20
4

26
6

00
0

5
2
3
7
4
6
3
8
1
8
5
7
4
8
6
7
1
6

02
9
03
1
03
3
03
5
03
8
04
1
04
5
04
9
05
5
06
1
07
0
08
1
09
7
11
1
11
4
11
7
12
1
12
4

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0

4
4

12
1
12
4

11
3

6

5

09
9

11
8

2

08
3

11
6

8
3

07
1

4
1

06
3

1

05
1
05
6

7
5

04
6

4

03
9
04
2

4
7

2

03
2

03
6

3

03
0

03
4

2
7

02
8

02
47
02
58
0.
02
7
0. 2
02
8
0. 7
03
0
0. 5
03
24
0.
03
4
0. 7
03
7
0. 2
04
0
0. 2
04
3
0. 7
04
7
0. 9
05
25
0.
05
8
0. 5
06
6
0. 2
07
6
0. 1
08
97
0.
10
9
0. 0
11
6
0. 4
11
8
0. 6
12
00
0.
12
35

0.

0.

0.000

CURRENT IN AMPS

DBK65 I-V CURVE AT 10V EXCITATION
12

10

8

6

4

2

0

CURRENT IN AMPS

DBK65 I-V CURVE AT 15V EXCITATION
16

14

12

10

8

6

4

2

0

CURRENT IN AMPS

DBK65 I-V CURVE AT 24V EXCITATION
25

20

15

VOLTS

9

02
7

02
7

9

02
5

1.000

VOLTS

4

02
6

0.

0.

2.000

V

V

V

1

02
5

3.000

V

V

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

0.

DBK65 I-V CURVE AT 5V EXCITATION
6.000

5.000

4.000

10
V

5

0

CURRENT IN AMPS

DBK65

pg. 13

DBK65

pg. 14

988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK70

Vehicle Network Interface
The DBK70 has the following features:•

Measures up to 16 vehicle network parameters•

Synchronously records vehicle network data along with analog and digital measurementsfrom primary data acquisition systems (see fifth bullet listing)•Supports J1850 VPW, J1850 PWM, ISO-9141, CAN*, SW CAN*•

Up to 4 network types can be attached•

Attaches to a variety of data acquisition products including:
DaqBoard/2000 Series
DaqBook
DaqLab
DaqScan
LogBook
WaveBook
ZonicBook

Reference Note: The DBK70 is detailed in a separate document, the DBK70 User’s Manual(p/n 1056-0901). The document is shipped with the device and is available for web-viewing
and download from our web-site.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989594

DBK70ref, pg. 1

DBK70ref, pg. 2989594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK8016-Channel Differential Voltage Input Cardwith Excitation Output

Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Card Connection …… 2
Card Configuration …… 4
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 5
DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 6

Software Setup …… 6
DBK80 – Specifications …… 6
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK80 is a low-noise, high-speed, unity-gain multiplexer card that provides 16 channels ofdifferential voltage input. Up to 16 such cards can be attached to a single Daq device, providing a possible
256 differential input channels. The card’s unity gain combines with DaqBook, DaqBoard, and LogBook
gains to accept full scale inputs from ±156 mV to ±10 V. The DBK80’s expansion channels can bescanned at the maximum 200 kHz rate while maintaining measurement integrity.
The DBK80 includes an on-board excitation voltage source that is jumper-selectable to be +5 or +10 VDC.
This source can be used to bias transducers or to measure resistors and thermistors without additional
instrumentation.

Note 1:

Offset adjustment is only intended for use duringcalibration.

Note 2: JP2 is used to select an excitation source output
voltage of +5 VDC or +10 VDC. The factory default
is +5 VDC.

DBK80 Block Diagram
DBK Option Cards and Modules

989494

DBK80

pg. 1

Hardware Setup
Card Connection

DBK80 Board Layout
Referring to the figure above, voltage input signals are connected to the screw terminal blocks labeled J1,
J2, J3, and J4. Each channel is labeled with “H” and “L” to denote its polarity. These inputs accept
voltages up to ±10 VDC.
Excitation Source
J5 and J6 provide the excitation source output, again labeled with “H” and “L” to denote polarity. Notethat J5 and J6 are connected in parallel. There is only one voltage source; two connectors are simply
provided for wiring convenience.
The excitation source is ground-referenced, not floating. That is, its low terminal is connected to theground of the Daq device. It is designed to interface to circuits where it is the only power source, or where
its connection is electrically isolated from other power sources. An example of the latter is an optocoupler.

CAUTION
Do not connect the excitation source to a non-isolated, powered circuit. Making such aconnection can cause damage to both the DBK80 and to the circuit under test.
The excitation source outputs should also be used together, with the “L” of the source providing the groundreference to the connecting circuit. This provides two benefits. It maintains the accuracy of the source,
since the regulation of the “H” terminal is referenced to the “L” terminal. It also returns the load current
directly to its source, where its path is designed to not influence any other part of the measurement system.

DBK80

pg. 2

989494

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Three examples of using the excitation source follow. They are Position Sensing, Resistance/Thermistor
Measurement, and Reading a Transducer.

Source Impedance and Settling TimeHigh speed multiplexing of signal sources with non-zero impedance will result in reading errors caused bysettling time. In the simplest form, a multiplexing system consists of a group of switches, with internal
resistance, and an output capacitance at the input of an amplifier feeding an A/D converter with a samplehold circuit on the input. During the short time a channel signal is connected to the A/D amplifier, thesignal must charge the output capacitance to the true value of the signal so that the sample-hold captures anaccurate value for the A/D converter to digitize. If the source has significant internal impedance thevoltage reading will be reduced.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989494

DBK80

pg. 3

Source impedance below 1000 ohms will create negligible error. Above 1000 ohms, the effects are
increasingly noticeable. An accurate source in series with a variable resistance will readily demonstratethis. Although the effect is exponential, an easy reference point to remember is that 25K of source
impedance will result in approximately a 10% error.

Reading Error vs. Source ResistanceAnalog GroundJ7 and J8 provide access to analog ground. The most common use for them is to provide a groundreference point for differential measurements. This is discussed in the Signal Management section ofChapter 1.
Although J7 and J8 are electrically equivalent to the "L" signal of the excitation source,
they should never be used as the return point for the excitation source.

Card Configuration
Configuration of the DBK80 involves setting the channel address and selecting theexcitation output voltage.
Up to sixteen DBK80 cards can be attached to a single LogBook or Daq device, providing
up to 256 differential input channels.
Since multiple cards are connected via a parallel interface, each card must have a uniquechannel address. To assign a channel number to the card, locate the 16×2-pin header(labeled JP1). JP1’s jumper locations are labeled CH0 through CH15. Place the jumperon the two pins that correspond with the intended channel.

Only one channel configuration jumper is to be used per card.
Each card in the system must have a unique jumper setting.

DBK80

pg. 4

989494

DBK Option Cards and Modules

The excitation output voltage is set via JP2.

JP2 Location Reference
The above figure is of a partial DBK80. JP2 is shown selected to +5VDC. Note that the card’s overlay forJP2’s voltage selection, also depicted in the figure, indicates the jumper positions that are required to selectthe +5 or +10 VDC excitation output.

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of a DBK80 with a DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series devices, or with an ISA-type DaqBoard,requires the configuration of jumpers JP1 and JP4 located on the DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series
devices, or DaqBoard [ISA type], as applicable.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, set the JP1 jumper for Analog Option Card Use,also referred to as the expanded analog mode.

Note:
These jumpers do not
apply to /2000 Series
Devices.

Required Jumper Settings in DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series
and ISA-Type DaqBoards
The JP1 default position (above) is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the
DBK80 via the internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power (e.g.,
DBK32A or DBK33) you must remove both JP1 jumpers.
Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section and to the DBK32A andDBK33 sections for more detailed information, as applicable.
2.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112, and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in the single-ended
mode.

Note: Analog expansion cards convert all input signals to single-ended voltages that are referenced toanalog common.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989494

DBK80

pg. 5

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No jumper configurations are required for the /2000 series devices.

Software Setup
The DBK80 has no special software settings. The software controls are equivalent to those for a directconnection; e.g., for a DaqBoard/2000 Series board there are Type selections of x1 to x64, representing theinternal gain of that board. When using the DBK80 with that board you will have the same Type options,since the DBK80 is always a constant gain of x1.
Note that there is no software control related to the excitation source. The selection of a +5 VDC or+10 VDC source is determined by JP2.

Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to Chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to Chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.

DBK80 - Specifications
Connector: DBK37 male, mates with P1 pinout on a DaqBook, DaqBoard,or LogBook. The board includes screw-terminals for signal connection.
Gain Ranges: 1, x1
Inputs: 16 differential voltage inputs
Maximum Voltage Range: ±10 V
Input Impedance: 20M Ohm
Accuracy: ±[0.025% +150 µV] (typ), ±[0.1% +250 µV] (max)Noise: 60 µVrms (typ)Maximum Input Voltage (without damage): ±25 V
3 dB Bandwidth: 2.6 MHz
CMRR: 80 dB typ
Excitation Voltage: 1 channel, jumper-selectable to +5 V or +10 V
Excitation Voltage Accuracy: ±0.5%
Excitation Voltage Current Limit: 20 mA Src, 1 mA Sink
Power: 25 mA max from ±15 V (with no load on excitation voltage)

DBK80

pg. 6

989494

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK81, DBK82, and DBK83

Thermocouple Cards
DBK81 – 7 Channel Card
DBK82 – 14 Channel Card
DBK83 – 14 Channel Card with
External Connection Pod

Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Card Connection …… 2Open Thermocouple Detection …… 3
Installing the DBK82 in the DBK41 Enclosure ……3
Using the Connection POD, DBK83 Only…… 4
POD-1 Dimensions ….. 5
Card Configuration …… 6
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 6
DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 6

Software Setup …… 7
Using a Temperature Calibrator …… 8
DBK81, DBK82, DBK83 – Specifications …… 9
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable toyour system, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics locatednear the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK81, DBK82, and DBK83 are used in temperature measurement applications that make use ofthermocouples. The DBK81 provides connections for 7 thermocouples. Both the DBK82 and the DBK83
provide connections for 14 thermocouples. The two 14 channel cards differ from each other in that the
input connectors of the DBK82 are on the board, but connectors of the DBK83 are located in an external
connection pod.
All three cards feature on-board cold junction compensation (CJC) for direct measurement of type J, K, T,
E, N28, N14, S, R, and B thermocouples. The following table provides the temperature range for each ofthese thermocouple types.
T/C Type
Temperature
Range °C
Temperature
Range °F

J-200 to760-328 to1400

Thermocouple Temperature Ranges
K
T
E
N28
N14
-200 to-200 to-270 to-270 to
0 to
1200
400
650
400
1300
-328 to-328 to-454 to-454 to
32 to
2192
752
1202
752
2372

S
-50 to1768-58 to3214

R-50 to1768-58 to
3214

B
50 to
1780
122 to3236

The three DBK cards connect to external thermocouples via channels, as follows:•

DBK81 – up to seven thermocouples can be connected, using channels 1 through 7, inclusive•

DBK82 and DBK83 - up to fourteen thermocouples can be connected, using channels
1 through 7 for the first seven and channels 9 through 15 for the second set of seven.

Note: On the DBK81, there is one CJC. It is measured on channel 0. On the DBK82 and DBK83 there
are two CJCs, measured on channels 0 and 8.
In addition to thermocouple measurements, each input channel can be configured for a fixed voltage gainof 100. When in this mode, voltage can be measured in the range of ±100 mV, or ±50 mV, depending on
the type of Daq device being used.
Up to sixteen DBK81, DBK82, or DBK83 cards can be attached to a single LogBook or Daq device,providing up to 224 temperature channels. The cards need not be the same. For example, you could haveten DBK81 cards, three DBK82 cards, and three DBK83 cards in one system.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989494

DBK81, DBK82, and DBK83

pg. 1

DBK81 Block Diagram**The DBK81 block diagram can be applied to the DBK82 and DBK83, as their diagrams only differ to theone above in regard to the number of input channels provided.
In comparison to other DBK cards, the DBK81, DBK82, and DBK83 demand significant
power from the system’s ±15V power supplies. It is important that you calculate yoursystem’s power demand, as you may need to add auxiliary power supplies.
Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section for additional information.

Hardware Setup
Card Connection
Connect the thermocouple wires to the intended input terminals on the card. The DBK81 provides input
connections for channels 1 through 7, while the DBK82 and DBK83 offer input connections for channels
1 through 7 and 9 through 15. All channels have the same level of functionality.
Thermocouple wire is standardized, color-coded, and polarized, as noted in the following table.
Thermocouple Standards
T/C
Type
J
K
T
E
N28
N14
S
R
B

(+) Lead toChannel HighWhite
YellowBlue
VioletOrangeOrange
Black
Black
Gray

(-) Lead toChannel Low
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red
Red

Input connections for the three cards are labeled “H” and “L” to denote polarity.
For isothermal performance, an exposed, grounded copper plane surrounds the input
connectors. It is important that non-insulated input wires do not contact the groundedplane − since such contact can degrade measurement integrity.

pg. 2,DBK81, DBK82, & DBK83

989494

DBK Option Cards and Modules

It should be noted that thermocouples output very small voltages and that long thermocouple leads canpickup a large amount of noise. However, the DBK81, DBK82, and DBK83 inherently provide a highlevel of noise immunity via their 4 Hz signal bandwidth and input filtering. If desired, further noise
reduction can be achieved through the use of shielded thermocouples and/or averaging.
You can minimize the effect of noise by (1) using shielded thermocouples,(2) averaging readings, or (3) employing both of these practices.
To accommodate shielding, grounded connections, labeled “SHIELD,” are provided. A typical use of theconnection would be the attachment of the shield to a shielded thermocouple.
If a thermocouple shield is connected on the DBK card, leave the shieldunconnected at the other end of the thermocouple.

Open Thermocouple Detection
The DBK81, DBK82, and DBK83 are equipped with open thermocouple detection for each channel. Thismeans that a broken thermocouple wire [or otherwise unconnected input] that is measured will result in an
off-scale reading. This is accomplished by applying a small bias current to each of the channel inputs.
Whenever a valid input is absent, the bias current saturates the input amplifier, resulting in the off-scalereading. When in this “off-scale” state, however, the input amplifier draws more current from the power
supply. Specifically, the power draw of a card from ±15 V will increase by 0.75 mA for each open
channel.
If available power is limited, short unused channels by connecting a short length of wire
between the H and L terminals. This will minimize power consumption. Note that it is notenough to simply avoid scanning unused channels; to minimize power consumption thechannels must be physically shorted in the hardware.
The power requirements, detailed in the product specification, assume worst caseconnection conditions.

Installing the DBK82 in the DBK41 Enclosure
Because of its physical size, the DBK82 will not fit into 1-slot enclosures such as the DBK10 or
DaqBook/216. It does fit, however, in the DBK41 enclosure, and in “drawer-type” products, such as the
DaqBook/260.
Installation of the DBK82 is possible in DBK41 connectors CN3, CN5, CN7, and CN9. The connector
labels are visible near the upper edge of the DBK41’s printed circuit board, as indicated in the following
figure.

DBK41’s Printed Circuit Board
DBK82 cards can be connected to CN3, CN5, CN7, and CN9.
DBK Option Cards and Modules

989494

DBK81, DBK82, and DBK83

pg. 3

Using the Connection POD, DBK83 Only
Unlike other DBK units, the input connections for the DBK83 do not exist on the card itself. Instead, they
exist in an external connection pod, POD-1. POD-1 simply represents a physical relocation of the input
screw terminals and cold junction sensors that reside on the card in the case of the DBK81 and DBK82.
POD-1 connects to the DBK83 unit via the CA-239 cable. POD-1 dimensions are provided at the end of
this section.

You must remove the four cover screws
and the cover plate to access the pod’s
terminal blocks. The terminal blocklayout is provided in the following
figure.

The female-end of the CA-239
cable connects to POD-1’s
male 44-pin connector.

POD-1
To install thermocouple wires in POD-1:
1.

Remove the four screws of the POD-1 cover.

2.

Route the thermocouple wires through the input hole of the POD-1 and connect them to theintended channels. Note the “H” and “L” polarity designations on the channels for proper
connection. (See the following figure).

3.

Replace the POD-1 cover and secure it with the four screws that were removed in step 1.

The CA-239
cable connects
here.

Thermocouple wires route
through this opening.

POD-1 Connection Terminals
For isothermal performance, an exposed, grounded copper plane surrounds the input
connectors. It is important that non-insulated input wires do not contact the groundedplane − since such contact can degrade measurement integrity.

pg. 4,DBK81, DBK82, & DBK83

989494

DBK Option Cards and Modules

To connect the POD-1 to the DBK83:
1.

Connect the male end of the CA-239 cable to the female 44-pin connector on the DBK83.

2.

Connect the female end of the CA-239 cable to the male 44-pin connector on the POD-1.

The system design of the DBK83 allows for the quick connection/disconnection of up to 14
thermocouples at one time. You may find it advantageous to have several POD-1 modules
permanently wired to different sets of thermocouples and to simply swap the CA-239 cablebetween them and one DBK83 card, as desired.
Because of the opposing gender on the CA-239 cable ends, it is possible to mate multiple
CA-239 cables together to increase the distance from the POD-1 to the DBK83. Because ofcharacteristics of the cable design and the signals on it, measurement integrity is notaffected by doing so, and there are no practical limits on how many cables can be used.

POD-1 Dimensions

POD-1 Dimensions. POD-1 is for use with DBK43.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989494

DBK81, DBK82, and DBK83

pg. 5

Card Configuration
Up to sixteen DBK81, DBK82, or DBK83 cards can be attached to a single LogBook or
Daq device, providing up to 224 temperature channels. The cards need not be the same.
For example, you could have ten DBK81 cards, three DBK82 cards, and three DBK83 cards
in one system.
Since multiple cards are connected via a parallel interface, each card must have a uniquechannel address. To assign a channel number to the card, locate the 16×2-pin header(labeled JP1). JP1’s jumper locations are labeled CH0 through CH15. Place the jumper on
the two pins that correspond with the intended channel.

Only one channel configuration jumper is to be used per card.
Each card in the system must have a unique jumper setting.

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of a DBK81, DBK82, or DBK83 with a DaqBook/100 Series device, /200 Series device, or an
ISA-type DaqBoard, requires the configuration of jumpers JP1 and JP4 located on the DaqBook or
DaqBoard, as applicable.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, set the JP1 jumper for Analog Option Card Use,also referred to as the expanded analog mode.
Note:
These jumpers do not
apply to /2000 Series
devices.

Required Jumper Settings in DaqBook/100 Series &DaqBook/200 Series Devices and ISA-Type DaqBoards
The JP1 default position (above) is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the
DBK81, DBK82, and DBK83 cards via the internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using
auxiliary power (e.g., a DBK32A or DBK33), you must remove both JP1 jumpers.
Refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section and to the DBK32A andDBK33 sections as applicable.
2.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112, and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in the single-ended
mode.

Note: Analog expansion cards convert all input signals to single-ended voltages that are referenced toanalog common.

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No jumper configurations are required for the /2000 series devices.

pg. 6,DBK81, DBK82, & DBK83

989494

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to Chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to Chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.
o Programmers using Daq devices should refer to related sections in the Programmer’s Manual.

Note: LogView and DaqView software each include functions for the conversion and linearization ofthermocouple readings into temperature data.
When a DBK81, DBK82, or DBK83 is selected in DaqView or LogView, thermocouple types must also be
selected for the card’s channels. The two programs each use a different method for selecting thethermocouple types.
In LogView …
In LogView, the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window is used to select the thermocouple types.
After selecting DBK81, DBK82, or DBK83, set each of the card’s channels according to the actual
thermocouple being used for the channel’s input.
In the following screen-shot [from LogView], we see a J-type thermocouple being selected for Channel 1of a DBK81.

LogBook Hardware Configuration Window
In DaqView ….
In DaqView, after selecting the DBK81, DBK82, or DBK83 in the Configure System Hardware Window,
the Channel Setup Tab (on the main window) is used to select the thermocouple types (see following
figure). The channel types can be changed by double-clicking in the Types column, or by using the
Channel Type pull-down list.
In the following screen-shot [from DaqView], we see a J-type thermocouple being selected for a DBK81
card’s Channel 1. Note that the channel is designated “P1 0-1” in the Channel column.

DaqView, Channel Setup

DBK Option Cards and Modules

989494

DBK81, DBK82, and DBK83

pg. 7

Using a Temperature Calibrator
The DBK81, DBK82, and DBK83 thermocouple cards provide accurate and repeatable temperature
measurements across a wide range of operating conditions. However, all instrumentation is subject to driftwith time and with ambient temperature change. If the ambient temperature of the operating environmentis below 18°C or above 28°C, or if the product is near or outside its one-year calibration interval, then theabsolute accuracy may be improved through the use of an external temperature calibrator.
A temperature calibrator is a temperature simulation instrument that allows selection of thermocouple type
and temperature. For proper operation, it must be connected to the DBK81, DBK82, or DBK83 with thesame type thermocouple wire and connector that is used in normal testing. The calibrator then generates
and supplies a voltage to the card. The supplied voltage corresponds to that which would be generated by
the chosen thermocouple type at the selected temperature.
The temperature selected on the calibrator will be dictated by the nature of normal testing. 0°C is usually
the best choice. Calibrators are the most accurate at this setting, and the connecting thermocouple wire willcontribute very little error at this temperature. However, if the dynamic range of the normal testing is, forexample, 100°C to 300°C, a selection of 200°C may give better results. In either case, the level ofadjustment is determined by comparing the unit reading to the selected calibrator temperature. For
example, if the calibrator is set to 0°C output, and the DBK unit reads 0.3°C, then an adjustment of –0.3°C
is required. That is, the adjustment value is determined by subtracting the DBK reading from the calibrator
setting.
To implement the adjustment in DaqView:
1.

Ensure that the acquisition process is turned off.

2.

Click on the cell in the Units column for the channel that is connected to the calibrator. The
engineering units pull-down menu above the grid becomes active.

3.

Click on the down arrow and select the “mx+b” option. This option allows post-acquisition
mathematical manipulation.

4.

For the example adjustment, enter –0.3 for “b.” The channel under calibration will now
read 0°C.

Note that this adjustment is a mathematical operation only, and in no way alters the hardware
calibration of the product. Moreover, it operates on a per channel basis, with the settings for agiven channel having no influence on any other channels.
To implement the adjustment in LogView:
1.

Ensure that the acquisition process is turned off.

2.

In the Analog Input Channel Configuration window, select the “User Scaling” tab.

3.

Click on the “Offset” cell for the channel that is connected to the calibrator.

4.

For the example adjustment, enter -0.3 for “Offset.” The channel under calibration will now
read 0°C.

Note that this adjustment is a mathematical operation only, and in no way alters the hardware
calibration of the product. Moreover, it operates on a per channel basis, with the settings for agiven channel having no influence on any other channels.

pg. 8,DBK81, DBK82, & DBK83

989494

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK81, DBK82, DBK83 - Specifications
Name/Function:
DBK81 – 7 Channel High-Accuracy Thermocouple Card
DBK82 – 14 Channel High-Accuracy Thermocouple Card
DBK83 – 14 Channel High-Accuracy Thermocouple Card with external TC/mV
screw-terminal connection pod
System Connector: All DBK options have a DB37 male, which mates with P1 on the DaqBoard, DaqBook,
LogBook, or other DBK options
TC/mV Connector
DBK81: Board-mounted screw terminals
DBK82: Board-mounted screw terminals
DBK83: External pod-mounted screw terminals
Functions: TC types J, K, S, T, E, B, R, N; x100 (voltage)
Inputs

DBK81: 7 differential TC/mV inputs
DBK82: 14 differential TC/mV inputs
DBK83: 14 differential TC/mV inputs

Input Voltage Range: ±100 mV with a DaqBoard/2000 or LogBook±50 mV with a DaqBook or DaqBoard
Input Impedance: 40M Ohm (differential); 20M Ohm (single-ended)
Input Bandwidth: 4 Hz
Input Bias Current: 10 nA typ
CMRR: 100dB typ
Maximum Working Voltage (signal + common mode): ±10 V
Over-Voltage Protection: ±40 V
Power Requirements
DBK81: 35 mA max from ±15V; 2 mA max from +5 V
DBK82 and DBK83: 60 mA max from ±15V; 2 mA max from +5 V
Operating Temperature: 0°C to 50°C
Voltage Accuracy: ±(0.2% of reading +50 µV)
TC Accuracy: See table and accuracy conditions. Valid for one year, 18 to 28°C
Minimum Resolution: 0.1°C for all TC types

TC Accuracy at Measurement Temperature in °C (±°C)
Type

Min

Max

-100

0

100

300

500

700

900

1100

1400

J

-200

760

0.8

0.7

0.7

0.8

0.9

0.9

—

—

—

K

-200

1200

0.9

0.8

0.8

0.9

1.1

1.1

1.2

1.3

—

T

-200

400

0.9

0.8

0.8

0.8

—

—

—

—

—

E

-270

650

0.8

0.7

0.7

0.7

0.8

—

—

—

—
2.1

S

-50

1768

—

3.1

2.4

2.0

2.0

1.9

2.0

2.1

R

-50

1768

—

3.1

2.1

2.0

1.9

1.9

1.7

1.9

2.0

B

50

1780

—

—

—

4.9

3.2

2.8

2.4

2.3

2.0

N28

-270

400

1.2

0.9

0.9

0.9

—

—

—

—

—

N14

0

1300

—

0.9

0.9

0.9

1.1

1.1

1.2

1.3

—

Accuracy conditions:
•
•
•
•
•

Data is based on the use of a calibrated DaqBoard/2000
The table reflects total system absolute accuracy, including accuracy of the CJC and DaqBoard/2000
Excludes possible error from thermocouples
Excludes noise
VCM = 0DBK Option Cards and Modules

989494

DBK81, DBK82, and DBK83

pg. 9

TC Accuracy at Measurement Temperature in ˚C (±˚C)

pg. 10,

DBK81, DBK82, & DBK83

989494

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK8414-Channel Thermocouple Module

Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Module Connection …… 2Open Thermocouple Detection …… 3
Module Configuration …… 4
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration …… 5
DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration …… 5

Software Setup …… 6
Using a Temperature Calibrator …… 7
DBK84 – Specifications …… 8
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable toyour system, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

Overview
The DBK84 is used in temperature measurement applications and provides connections for 14
thermocouples through convenient mini-TC connectors.
The DBK84 features on-board cold junction compensation (CJC) for direct measurement of type J, K, T, E,
N28, N14, S, R, and B thermocouples. The following table provides the temperature range for each ofthese thermocouple types.

Thermocouple Temperature Ranges
T/C Type
Temperature
Range °C
Temperature
Range °F

J

K

T

E

N28

N14

S

R

B

-200 to760-200 to1200-200 to400-270 to650-270 to
400

0 to
1300

-50 to1768-50 to
1768

50 to
1780

-328 to1400-328 to2192-328 to752-454 to1202-454 to
752

32 to
2372

-58 to3214-58 to3214

122 to3236

Up to fourteen external thermocouples can be connected to the DBK84 module. Channels 1 through 7 areused for the first seven thermocouples, and channels 9 through 15 are used for the second set of seven.
Note: DBK84 has two on-board CJCs. They are measured on channels 0 and 8.
In addition to thermocouple measurements, each input channel can be configured for a fixed voltage gainof 100. When in this mode, voltage can be measured in the range of ±100 mV, or ±50 mV, depending on
the type of Daq device being used.
Up to sixteen DBK84 modules can be attached to a single LogBook or Daq device, providing up to 224
temperature channels.

DBK Option Cards and Module

989494

DBK84

pg. 1

In comparison to typical DBK options, the DBK84 demands significant power from thesystem’s ±15 V power supplies. It is important that you calculate your system’s power
demand, as you may need to add auxiliary power supplies. For additional informationrefer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section.

Hardware Setup
Module Connection
The DBK84 accepts up to 14 mini-TC plugs in its channels 1 through 7 and 9 through 15. All channels
have the same level of functionality.
Thermocouple wire is standardized, color-coded, and polarized, as noted in the following table.

T/C
Type
J
K
T
E
N28
N14
S
R
B

Thermocouple Standards(+) Lead to(-) Lead toChannel High
Channel Low
White
Red
Yellow
Red
Blue
Red
VioletRed
OrangeRed
Orange
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Gray
Red

Mini-TC plugs are type-specific, and for best measurement operation the plug TC type should match thewire TC type. If necessary, copper/copper (Type U) plugs may be used, but measurement stability will beslightly degraded. Mini-TC plugs are polarized as well, and it is critical for proper measurement operationthat this polarity be followed when connecting the thermocouple wire. Once wired, the TC plugs will only
mate into the DBK84’s connectors in one orientation, ensuring a correct connection.
It should be noted that thermocouples output very small voltages and that long thermocouple leads canpickup a large amount of noise. However, the DBK84 inherently provides a high level of noise immunity
via its 4 Hz signal bandwidth and input filtering. If desired, further noise reduction can be achieved
pg. 2,

DBK84

989494

DBK Option Cards and Modules

through the use of shielded thermocouples and/or averaging.
You can minimize the effect of noise by (1) using shielded thermocouples,(2) averaging readings, or (3) employing both of these practices.

To accommodate shielding, grounded connections, labeled “Analog Common,” are provided. A typicaluse of the connection would be to attach the shield of a shielded thermocouple.

If a thermocouple shield is connected to the DBK84 module, leave the shieldunconnected at the other end of the thermocouple.

Open Thermocouple Detection
The DBK84 is equipped with open thermocouple detection for each channel. This means that a broken
thermocouple wire [or otherwise unconnected input] that is measured will result in an off-scale reading.
This is accomplished by applying a small bias current to each of the channel inputs. Whenever a valid
input is absent, the bias current saturates the input amplifier, resulting in the off-scale reading. When in
this“off-scale” state, however, the input amplifier draws more current from the power supply. Specifically, thepower draw of the module from ±15 V will increase by 0.75 mA for each open channel.
If available power is limited, insert shorted TC plugs into unused channels. This will
minimize power consumption. Note that it is not enough to simply avoid scanning unused
channels; to minimize power consumption the channels must be physically shorted in the
hardware.

The power requirements, detailed in the product specification, assume worst caseconnection conditions.

DBK Option Cards and Module

989494

DBK84

pg. 3

Module Configuration
Up to sixteen DBK84 modules can be attached to a single LogBook or Daq device. Since multiple
modules are connected via a parallel interface, each must have a unique channel address.

CAUTION
Adjustment of the channel address must only be performed when the system
power is OFF. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.

To assign a channel address to the DBK84 module, first locate the DIP switch on the front panel (next toP1). Four micro-switches [on the DIP switch] are used to set the module’s channel address in binary.
After ensuring that the system power is OFF, adjust the micro-switches to set the desired address.

Each module in the system must have a unique address.

DBK84 Channel Address Settings

pg. 4,

DBK84

989494

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of a DBK84 with a DaqBook/100 Series device, DaqBook/200 Series device, or with an ISA-type
DaqBoard requires the configuration of jumpers JP1 and JP4 located on the DaqBook or DaqBoard device.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, set the JP1 jumper for Analog Option Card Use,also referred to as the expanded analog mode.
Note:
These jumpers do not
apply to /2000 Series
devices.

Required Jumper Settings in DaqBook/100 Series Devices,
DaqBook/200 Series Devices, and ISA-Type DaqBoards
The JP1 default position (above) is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the
DBK84 module via the internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power(e.g., a DBK32A or DBK33), you must remove both JP1 jumpers. Refer to Power
Requirements in the DBK Basics section and to the DBK32A or DBK33 sections asapplicable.
2.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112, and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in the single-ended
mode.

Note: Analog expansion options convert all input signals to single-ended voltages that are referenced toanalog common.

DaqBook/2000 Series and DaqBoard/2000 Series Configuration
No jumper configurations are required for the /2000 series devices.

DBK Option Cards and Module

989494

DBK84

pg. 5

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to Chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to Chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView.
o Programmers using Daq devices should refer to related sections in the Programmer’s
Manual.

Note: LogView and DaqView software each include functions for the conversion and linearization ofthermocouple readings into temperature data.
When a DBK84 is selected in DaqView or LogView, thermocouple types must also be selected for themodule’s channels. The two programs each use a different method for selecting the thermocouple types.
In LogView …
In LogView, the LogBook Hardware Configuration Window is used to select the thermocouple types.
After selecting DBK84, set each of the module’s channels according to the actual thermocouple being used
for the channel’s input.
In the following screen-shot [from LogView], we see a J-type thermocouple being selected for Channel 1of a DBK84.

LogBook Hardware Configuration Window
In DaqView ….
In DaqView, after selecting the DBK84 in the Configure System Hardware Window, the Channel Setup
Tab (on the main window) is used to select the thermocouple types (see following figure). The channel
types can be changed by double-clicking in the Types column, or by using the Channel Type pull-down list.
In the following screen-shot [from DaqView], we see a J-type thermocouple being selected for a DBK84
module’s Channel 1. Note that the channel is designated “P1 0-1” in the Channel column.

DaqView, Channel Setup

pg. 6,

DBK84

989494

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Using a Temperature Calibrator
The DBK84 thermocouple module provides accurate and repeatable temperature measurements across awide range of operating conditions. However, all instrumentation is subject to drift with time and with
ambient temperature change. If the ambient temperature of the operating environment is below 18°C or
above 28°C, or if the product is near or outside its one-year calibration interval, then the absolute accuracy
may be improved through the use of an external temperature calibrator.
A temperature calibrator is a temperature simulation instrument that allows selection of thermocouple type
and temperature. For proper operation, it must be connected to the DBK84 with the same typethermocouple wire and connector that is used in normal testing. The calibrator then generates and supplies
a voltage to the module. The supplied voltage corresponds to that which would be generated by the chosen
thermocouple type at the selected temperature.
The temperature selected on the calibrator will be dictated by the nature of normal testing. 0°C is usually
the best choice. Calibrators are the most accurate at this setting, and the connecting thermocouple wire willcontribute very little error at this temperature. However, if the dynamic range of the normal testing is, forexample, 100°C to 300°C, a selection of 200°C may give better results. In either case, the level ofadjustment is determined by comparing the unit reading to the selected calibrator temperature. For
example, if the calibrator is set to 0°C output, and the DBK unit reads 0.3°C, then an adjustment of –0.3°C
is required. That is, the adjustment value is determined by subtracting the DBK reading from the calibrator
setting.
To implement the adjustment in DaqView:
1.

Ensure that the acquisition process is turned off.

2.

Click on the cell in the Units column for the channel that is connected to the calibrator. The
engineering units pull-down menu above the grid becomes active.

3.

Click on the down arrow and select the “mx+b” option. This option allows post-acquisition
mathematical manipulation.

4.

For the example adjustment, enter -0.3 for “b.” The channel under calibration will now
read 0°C.

Note that this adjustment is a mathematical operation only, and in no way alters the hardware
calibration of the product. Moreover, it operates on a per channel basis, with the settings for agiven channel having no influence on any other channels.
To implement the adjustment in LogView:
1.

Ensure that the acquisition process is turned off.

2.

In the Analog Input Channel Configuration window, select the “User Scaling” tab.

3.

Click on the “Offset” cell for the channel that is connected to the calibrator.

4.

For the example adjustment, enter -0.3 for “Offset.” The channel under calibration will now
read 0°C.

Note that this adjustment is a mathematical operation only, and in no way alters the hardware
calibration of the product. Moreover, it operates on a per channel basis, with the settings for agiven channel having no influence on any other channels.

DBK Option Cards and Module

989494

DBK84

pg. 7

DBK84 - Specifications
Name/Function:
DBK84 – 14 Channel High-Accuracy Thermocouple Module
System Connector: All DBK options have a DB37 male, which mates with P1 on the DaqBoard, DaqBook,
LogBook, or other DBK options
TC/mV Connector: Mini-TC connectors
Functions: TC types J, K, S, T, E, B, R, N; x100 (voltage)
Inputs: 14 differential TC/mV inputs
Input Voltage Range: ±100 mV with a DaqBoard/2000 or LogBook±50 mV with a DaqBook or DaqBoard
Input Impedance: 40M Ohm (differential); 20M Ohm (single-ended)
Input Bandwidth: 4 Hz
Input Bias Current: 10 nA typ
CMRR: 100dB typ
Maximum Working Voltage (signal + common mode): ±10 V
Over-Voltage Protection: ±40 V
Power Requirements: 60 mA max from ±15V; 2 mA max from +5 V
Operating Temperature: 0°C to 50°C
Voltage Accuracy: ±(0.2% of reading +50 µV)
TC Accuracy: See table and accuracy conditions. Valid for one year, 18 to 28°C
Minimum Resolution: 0.1°C for all TC types

TC Accuracy at Measurement Temperature in °C (±°C)
Type

Min

Max

-100

0

100

300

500

700

900

1100

1400

J

-200

760

0.8

0.7

0.7

0.8

0.9

0.9

—

—

—

K

-200

1200

0.9

0.8

0.8

0.9

1.1

1.1

1.2

1.3

—

T

-200

400

0.9

0.8

0.8

0.8

—

—

—

—

—

E

-270

650

0.8

0.7

0.7

0.7

0.8

—

—

—

—
2.1

S

-50

1768

—

3.1

2.4

2.0

2.0

1.9

2.0

2.1

R

-50

1768

—

3.1

2.1

2.0

1.9

1.9

1.7

1.9

2.0

B

50

1780

—

—

—

4.9

3.2

2.8

2.4

2.3

2.0

N28

-270

400

1.2

0.9

0.9

0.9

—

—

—

—

—

N14

0

1300

—

0.9

0.9

0.9

1.1

1.1

1.2

1.3

—

Accuracy conditions:•••Exclusive of thermocouple errors
Exclusive of noise
VCM = 0Accuracy at Measurement Temperature in ˚C (±˚C)

pg. 8,

DBK84

989494

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK8516-Channel Differential Voltage Module

Overview …… 1
Hardware Setup …… 2

Configuring the DBK85 Module …… 2
Configuring the Primary Data Acquisition Device ……3
CE Compliance …… 4
Connecting the DBK85 to Signals and to the Primary Data Acquisition Device …… 4

Software Setup …… 5
Specifications …… 6

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

DBK85 Front Panel

DBK85 Block Diagram

DBK Option Cards and Modules

988793

DBK85

pg. 1

Overview
The DBK85 is a low-noise, high-speed, unity-gain multiplexer module that provides 16 channels ofdifferential voltage input. Up to 16 DBK85 modules can be attached to a single LogBook or Daq device,providing a possible 256 differential input channels. The module’s unity gain of x1 combines with
DaqBook, DaqBoard, and LogBook gains to accept full scale inputs from ±156 mV to ±10 V. The
DBK85’s channels can be scanned at the maximum 200 kHz rate while maintaining measurement integrity.

Hardware Setup
Configuring the DBK85 Module
Up to sixteen DBK85 modules can be attached to a single LogBook or Daq device. Each module musthave a unique channel address because they connect to the primary data acquisition device via parallelinterface.

CAUTION
Adjustment of the channel address must only be performed when the system
power is OFF. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.

To assign a channel address to the DBK85 module, first locate the DIP switch on the right side of the rear
panel. Four micro-switches [on the DIP switch] are used to set the module’s channel address in binary.
After ensuring that the system power is OFF, adjust the micro-switches to set the desired address. The 16
possible addresses are illustrated in the following figure.

Each module in the system must have a unique primary device channel address.

The 16 Possible Address Settings for DBK85 Modules

DBK85

pg. 2

988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Configuring the Primary Data Acquisition Device
DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series and DaqBoard [ISA type] Configuration
Use of a DBK85 with a DaqBook/100 Series, /200 Series devices, or with an ISA-type DaqBoard requires
the configuration of jumpers JP1 and JP4. These jumpers are located on the DaqBook/100 Series, /200
Series devices, and DaqBoard [ISA type] board.
1.

If not using auxiliary power, set the JP1 jumper for Analog Option Card Use,also referred to as the expanded analog mode.

Note:
These jumpers do not
apply to /2000 Series
Devices.

Required Jumper Settings in DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series
and ISA-Type DaqBoards
The JP1 default position (above) is necessary to power the interface circuitry of the
DBK85 via the internal ±15 VDC power supply. If using auxiliary power (e.g.,
DBK32A or DBK33) you must remove both JP1 jumpers.
For additional information refer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section andto the DBK32A and DBK33 sections, as applicable.
2.

For DaqBook/100, DaqBook /112, and DaqBook /120 only, place the JP4 jumper in the single-ended
mode.
Reference Note: Analog expansion cards convert all input signals to single-ended
voltages that are referenced to analog common. The DBK85’s analog common connector
is located next to the channel 1 BNC. The connector is typically used to provide a groundreference point for differential measurements as discussed in Chapter 1, Signal
Management.

DaqBook/2000 Series & DaqBoard/2000 Series
No jumper configurations are required on the DaqBook/2000 series and DaqBoard/2000 series devices inregard to connecting a DBK85.

LogBooks
No jumper configurations are required on LogBook devices in regard to connecting a DBK85.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

988793

DBK85

pg. 3

CE ComplianceIf your data acquisition system needs to comply with CE standards, the DBK85 must be connected to the
LogBook or Daq device by a CA-143-x cable. In addition, the CE compliant operating conditions must be
met as specified on the DBK85 module’s Declaration of Conformity card, which is shipped with themodule.

Reference Notes: If your data acquisition system needs to comply with CE standards,
refer to the following:o the DBK85’s Declaration of Conformityo the CE Compliance section of Signal Management chapter of this manual

Connecting the DBK85 to Signals and to the Primary Data Acquisition Device
You can connect the DBK85 module to your primary data acquisition device and to its signal inputs after
you have completed the following:••

set the DBK85 module’s addressconfigured the primary data acquisition device, if applicable

You can connect up to 16 signal lines to one DBK85, i.e., one per BNC. These inputs accept voltages up
to ±10 VDC.
Connect the DBK85 module as follows. Note that if your system needs to be CE Compliant, be sure toread the preceding CE Compliance section prior to connecting the DBK85.
1.

Connect each signal input line’s BNC connector to a mating connector on the module. Overlays forCH0 to CH15 identify the associated BNC. Remember, signal input is limited to ±10 VDC.
Tip: Label each signal input line with its associated channel information.

2.

For a single DBK85 module, connect one end of the P1 cable to the module’s male DB37 output
connector.
•••

For DaqBook applications - use a CA-37-x cable.*
For DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Series boards - use a CA-37-x with a DBK200 Series
adapter.*
For DaqBoard [ISA type] boards - use a CA-131-x cable.** CA-37-x and CA-131-x cables do not meet CE compliance requirements. Refer to thepreceding CE section if CE compliance must be met.
3.

Connect the free end of the cable to the P1 port of the LogBook or Daq device. For multiple DBK85
modules, use a CA-37-x (or CA-131-x) cable to daisy-chain several modules or an expansion
module. For example, three DBK85s could be connected to a LogBook or a Daq device via a CA37-3 cable.

Note: For longer cable runs you can use a CA-113 cable to add 6 ft of length.

DBK85

pg. 4

988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Analog Common
DBK85’s analog common connector is located just left of the channel 1 BNC. The connector is typicallyused to provide a ground reference point for differential measurements as discussed in the Signal
Management section of Chapter 1.

Software Setup
The DBK85 has no special software settings. The software controls are equivalent to those for a directconnection; e.g., for a DaqBoard/2000 Series board there are Type selections of x1 to x64, representing theinternal gain of that board. When using the DBK85 with that board you will have the same Type options
since the DBK85 has a fixed gain of x1.

LogView does not include the means to directly select a DBK85. To use a DBK85 with
LogBook, select DBK80. This will recognize the DBK85, but will identify it as a
DBK80.

Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to Chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o LogView users - Refer to Chapter 4, DBK Setup in LogView. See above note.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

988793

DBK85

pg. 5

Specifications – DBK85
Connectors:
DBK37 male connector designated as P1. Connects to P1 on a DaqBook, DaqBoard, or LogBook via a CA-37-x
or a CA-131-x cable.
BNC: 16 BNC connectors (CH0 through CH15) for signal connection.
Analog Common: Binding Post/Banana Jack. Provides a ground reference point for differential measurements.
Gain Ranges: fixed gain at x1
Inputs: 16 differential voltage inputs
Maximum Voltage Range: ±10 VDC
Input Impedance: 20M Ohm
Accuracy: ±[0.025% +150 µV] (typ), ±[0.1% +250 µV] (max)Noise: 60 µVrms (typ)Maximum Input Voltage (without damage): ±25 V
3 dB Bandwidth: 2.6 MHz
CMRR: 80 dB typ
Power: 25 mA max from ±15 VDC

A Note Regarding Source Impedance and Settling TimeHigh speed multiplexing of signal sources with non-zero impedance will result in reading errors caused by settling
time. In the simplest form, a multiplexing system consists of a group of switches, with internal resistance, and an
output capacitance at the input of an amplifier feeding an A/D converter with a sample-hold circuit on the input.
During the short time a channel signal is connected to the A/D amplifier, the signal must charge the output
capacitance to the true value of the signal so that the sample-hold captures an accurate value for the A/D converterto digitize. If the source has significant internal impedance the voltage reading will be reduced.
Source impedance below 1000 ohms will create negligible error. Above 1000 ohms, the effects are increasingly
noticeable. An accurate source in series with a variable resistance will readily demonstrate this. Although theeffect is exponential, an easy reference point to remember is that 25K of source impedance will result inapproximately a 10% error.

Reading Error vs. Source Resistance

DBK85

pg. 6

988793

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK9056-Channel Thermocouple Module
For use with DaqBook/2000 Series Devices, WBK40, & WBK41

Overview …… 2
Hardware Setup …… 3
Connecting DBK90 Modules to Thermocouples …… 3Open Thermocouple Detection …… 4
Module Configuration …… 4

Connecting DBK90 Modules to other Devices ……5
Mounting…
DBK90 Modules to Each Other…… 5
One or two DBK90 Modules to a Primary Data Acquisition Device…...6
One, two, or three DBK90 Modules to a DBK60 ……7
DBK90 to a Rack ……8
Vehicle Testing and Noise Reduction……9Power Connections and Analog Common …… 9
Shielding ……10
TC Common Mode …… 10

Software Setup …… 11
Using a Temperature Calibrator …… 12
DBK90 – Specifications …… 13

Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to your system,as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

DBK Option Cards and Module

907492

DBK90

pg. 1

Overview
The DBK90 is used in temperature measurement applications and provides connections for 56
thermocouples through convenient mini-TC connectors.
The DBK90 features on-board cold junction compensation (CJC) for direct measurement of type
J, K, T, E, N28, N14, S, R, and B thermocouples. The following table provides the temperature
range for each of these thermocouple types.

Thermocouple Temperature Ranges
T/C Type
Temperature
Range °C
Temperature
Range °F

J

K

T

E

N28

N14

S

R

B

-200 to760-200 to1200-200 to400-270 to650-270 to
400

0 to
1300

-50 to1768-50 to
1768

50 to
1780

-328 to1400-328 to2192-328 to752-454 to1202-454 to
752

32 to
2372

-58 to3214-58 to3214

122 to3236

Note: There are four CJCs on the DBK90, one per row of thermocouple connectors.
Up to sixteen DBK90 modules can be attached to a single DaqBook/2000 Series device, WBK40, or
WBK41. Using Sixteen DBK90 modules provides up to 896 temperature channels.

DBK90 Block Diagram

In comparison to typical DBK options, the DBK90 demands significant power from thesystem’s ±15 V power supplies. It is important that you calculate your system’s power
demand, as you may need to add auxiliary power supplies. For additional informationrefer to Power Requirements in the DBK Basics section.

pg. 2,

DBK90

907492

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Hardware Setup
Connecting DBK90 Modules to Thermocouples
The DBK90 accepts up to 56 mini-TC plugs in its channels 0 through 55. All channels have the same levelof functionality.
Thermocouple wire is standardized, color-coded, and polarized, as noted in the following table.

T/C
Type
J
K
T
E
N28
N14
S
R
B

Thermocouple Standards(+) Lead to(-) Lead toChannel High
Channel Low
White
Red
Yellow
Red
Blue
Red
VioletRed
OrangeRed
Orange
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Gray
Red

Red (-) connects
to Channel Low

The (+) color,see table,
connects toChannel HighMini-TC plugs are type-specific, and for best measurement operation the plug TC type should match thewire TC type. If necessary, copper/copper (Type U) plugs may be used, but measurement stability will beslightly degraded. Mini-TC plugs are polarized as well, and it is critical for proper measurement operationthat this polarity be followed when connecting the thermocouple wire. Once wired, the TC plugs will only
mate into the DBK90’s connectors in one orientation, ensuring a correct connection.
It should be noted that thermocouples output very small voltages and that long thermocouple leads canpickup a large amount of noise. If desired, noise reduction can be achieved through the use of shielded
thermocouples and/or averaging.
You can minimize the effect of noise by (1) using shielded thermocouples,(2) averaging readings, or (3) employing both of these practices.
Each DBK90 includes a jack labeled “ACOM.” The jack is typically used for connecting the shield of ashielded thermocouple to the DBK90’s analog common. When this connection is made the shield at theother end of the thermocouple is left unconnected.
If a thermocouple shield is connected to the DBK90 module, leave the shieldunconnected at the other end of the thermocouple. Connecting the shield to common
at both ends will result in a ground loop.
The jack accepts a removable 2mm banana plug for ease of making and breaking the analog common
connection. The 2mm banana plug that is shipped with the product is part number 5936-0 from Pomona®
Electronics.
The ACOM connector is a 2mm banana jack. To ensure a good connection that will notdamage the jack, use a Pomona® Electronics 2mm banana plug (p/n 5936-0). The use of adifferent plug (including a 0.08 inch tip type) may damage the ACOM jack.

Reference Note:
In regard to automotive applications, refer to the upcoming section entitled, Vehicle Testing.
The section begins on page 9.

DBK Option Cards and Module

907492

DBK90

pg. 3

Open Thermocouple Detection
The DBK90 is equipped with open thermocouple detection for each channel. This means that a broken
thermocouple wire [or otherwise unconnected input] that is measured will result in an off-scale reading.
This is accomplished by applying a small bias current to each of the channel inputs. Whenever a valid
input is absent, the bias current saturates the input amplifier, resulting in the off-scale reading.

Module Configuration
Up to sixteen DBK90 modules can be attached to a single DaqBook/2000 Series device, WBK40, or
WBK41. Since multiple modules are connected via a parallel interface, each must have a unique channel
address.

CAUTION
Adjustment of the channel address must only be performed when the system
power is OFF. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.

To assign a channel address to the DBK90 module, first locate the DIP switch on the unit’s underside (theside opposite of the mini-TC connectors). Four micro-switches [on the DIP switch] are used to set themodule’s channel address in binary. After ensuring that the system power is OFF, adjust the microswitches to set the desired address. The following figure shows DIP switch settings for the 16 possible
addresses.

DBK90 Channel Address Settings

Each module in the system must have a unique address.

pg. 4,

DBK90

907492

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Connecting DBK90 Modules to other Devices
Mounting DBK90 Modules to Each Other – Using Kit # 1109-0800
Each 1109-0800 mounting kit includes two splice bars and eight screws. The kit is only intended for
mounting one DBK90 module to another. However, other kits are available for mounting DBK90s toprimary acquisition devices, for example, to a DaqBook/2000 Series device. Those kits are discussed
shortly.

Two DBK90 Modules, Combined via Kit # 1109-0800
Follow these steps if you desire to mount DBK90 modules to each other using 8-hole splice bars.
1. Push the two DBK90 modules together such that their P1 connectors properly mate. Note thateach DBK90 has a female P1 DB37 connector on one side and a male P1 DB37 connector on
the other.
2. Align four holes of an 8-hole splice bar as indicated in the preceding figure. Note that the twoholes for one DBK90 will be vertical, while the two holes for the other DBK90 will bediagonal (see figure).
3. Secure the splice bar to the DBK90 modules using the provided screws.
The screws are 8-32 x 1/4 Phillips Pan Head Screws.
4. Use the second splice bar and set of 4 screws, to secure the other side of the assembly.
Note: Additional splice bar kits can be used to add more DBK90 modules to the assembly.
5. Connect one end of a DB37 cable to the DBK90 male P1 connector (see figure).
6. Connect the other end of the DB-37 cable to the male P1 connector located on the primary dataacquisition device.
This completes the procedure.

Note 1:DBK Option Cards and Module

A female-to-female 37 pin connector can be used to connect a DBK90 to the host dataacquisition device. The use of a CA-143-x shielded cable is recommended for scenarios inwhich signal noise is a problem. Page 14 of this section includes a list of cables compatible
with DBK90 use.

907492

DBK90

pg. 5

Mounting one or two DBK90 Modules to a Primary Data Acquisition Device –Using Kit # 1109-0802
Note: Kit 1109-0802 is for use with a primary data acquisition device that has
no molded protective ears. The ears would interfere with the kit’s splice plates.
Mounting kit p/n 1109-0802 includes two splice plates and the associated screws for securing the plates tothe main data acquisition device, and then securing up to two DBK90 modules to the plates. An optional
handle can be added, as discussed in step 1.

Two DBK90 Modules mounted to a DaqBook/2000E, via Kit # 1109-0802
Note that the DaqBook/2000 Series devices and the kit’s splice-plates each have a length of 8.5 inches.
1. If you are attaching an optional handle:(a) Position the handle’s mounting holes over the indicated holes in one splice plate.
(b) Secure the handle by threading screws through the counter-sunk holes on the opposite
side of the splice plate.
2. Align the lower two screw-holes of one splice-plate with the mating holes on the primaryacquisition device.
3. Secure the splice-plate using two of the provided screws. The screws are 8-32 x 1/4 Phillips
Pan Head Screws.
4. Mount the second splice-plate to the other side of the acquisition device.
5. Position a DBK90 module such that its male P1 connector is located on the same plane as theP1 connector on the primary device.
6. With the screw holes of the DBK90 aligned with those of a splice-plate (see figure), secure themodule to the plate. Repeat this step for the other side of the module.
7. If you are connecting a second DBK90 module:(a) Mate the male P1 connector of the second DBK90 module with the female P1
connector of the first DBK90 module.
(b) Secure the second DBK90 module to the two splice plates using two screws per side(see figure).
8. Connect one end of a DB37 cable to the first DBK90’s P1 male connector (see figure).
9. Connect the other end of the CA-37 cable to the male P1 connector of the data acquisition
device.
This completes the procedure.
Note 1:

pg. 6,DBK90

A female-to-female 37 pin connector can be used to connect a DBK90 to the host dataacquisition device. The use of a CA-143-x shielded cable is recommended for scenarios inwhich signal noise is a problem. Page 14 of this section includes a list of cables compatible
with DBK90 use.

907492

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Mounting one, two, or three DBK90 Modules to a DBK60 – Using Kit # 1109-0803
Mounting kit p/n 1109-0803 is used to mount up to three DBK90 modules to a DBK60. The mounting kit
includes two splice plates and the necessary screws.
Note: Kit 1109-0803 is for use with a DBK60 that has no molded protective ears.
The ears would interfere with the kit’s splice plates.

Three DBK90 Modules Mounted to a DBK60 via Kit # 1109-0803
Note that the DBK60 and the splice-plates each have a length of 13 inches.
1.

If you are attaching an optional handle:(a) Position the handle’s mounting holes over the indicated holes in one splice plate.
(b) Secure the handle by threading screws through the counter-sunk holes on the
opposite side of the splice plate.

2.

Align the lower three screw-holes of the splice-plate with the mating holes on the DBK60.

3.

Secure the splice-plate to the DBK60 using three of the provided screws. Note that thescrews are 8-32 x 1/4 Phillips Pan Head Screws.

4.

Secure the second splice-plate to the other side of the DBK60.

5.

Position a DBK90 module such that its male P1 connector is located on the same plane as theP1 connector of the DBK60.

6.

Align the two lower screw holes of the DBK90 module with those on the splice-plate [theside nearest the DBK60’s P1 connector] (see figure).

7.

Use two of the provided screws to secure the DBK90 module to the splice-plate. Repeat thisstep for the other side of the assembly.

8.

If you are connecting a second and/or third DBK90 module:(a) Mate the female P1 connector of the second [or third] DBK90 module with the maleP1 connector of the previously mounted DBK90 module.
(b) Secure the second [or third] DBK90 module to the two splice-plates using twoscrews per side (see figure).

9.

Connect one end of a DB37 cable to the first DBK90’s male P1 connector (see figure).

10. Connect the other end of the DB37 cable to the male P1 connector of the DBK60.
Note 1:

A female-to-female 37 pin connector can be used to connect a DBK90 to the host dataacquisition device. The use of a CA-143-x shielded cable is recommended for scenarios inwhich signal noise is a problem. Page 14 of this section includes a list of cables compatible
with DBK90 use.

This completes the procedure.

DBK Option Cards and Module

907492

DBK90

pg. 7

Mounting a DBK90 to a Rack – Using Rack-Mount Kit # 1109-0801
You can use Rack-Mount Kit # 1109-0801 to mount a DBK90 module to a standard instrument rack. The
kit includes 2 rack mount ears, 2 rack-mount extenders, 4 button-head hex screws, 4 Phillips flatheadscrews, and a hex wrench.

Rack-Mount Kit # 1109-0801
Refer to the figures and to the following steps to prepare a DBK90 module for rack mounting.

Mounting an Ear/Extender Assembly to a DBK90
1. Align the screw-holes of a Rack-Mount Ear to the matching holes on a Rack-Mount Extender.
2. Fasten the two parts together using 2 of the Phillips Flathead Screws. The Ear/Extenderassembly should resemble the one in the above illustration.
3. Using 2 Button-head Hex Screws, secure the Ear/Extender assembly to the DBK90 module.
Proper orientation is indicated in the above figure.
4. Using the Hex Wrench [provided], tighten the Hex Screws.
5. Repeat steps 1 through 4 for assembling the remaining Ear/Extender components and attachingthem to the other side of the DBK90.
At this point the assembly can be mounted to a standard instrument rack.

pg. 8,

DBK90

907492

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Vehicle Testing and Noise Reduction
Power Connections and Analog Common
To properly measure vehicle-attached thermocouples differentially, it is necessary to have an analog common
connection to the negative side of the vehicle’s electrical system. A jack labeled ACOM, located on the DBK90’s
mini-TC panel, provides a connection point for analog common. If analog common is not connected, true
differential readings cannot be obtained due to noise. For this reason, the chassis of the primary data acquisition
device, e.g., DaqBook/2000A, must also have a good connection to the negative side of the vehicle’s electricalsystem.
All grounds should come together at the negative terminal of the test vehicle’s battery. Connecting the grounds at
any other point may introduce noise. One line, with a 2mm banana plug is used to connect the battery’s negative
terminal to the DBK90’s ACOM jack. The ACOM jack connects internally to the DBK90’s P1, pin # 28 (AGND).

Connections for a Vehicle Test
Note 1: The ACOM connector is a 2mm banana jack. To ensure a good connection that will notdamage the jack, use a Pomona® Electronics 2mm banana plug (p/n 5936-0). The useof a different plug (including a 0.08 inch tip type) may damage the ACOM jack.
Note 2: It is best to use a male DIN5 connector to connect the lines from the battery to the
DaqBook/2000’s female DIN5 connector. A Switchcraft® male DIN5 Connector(p/n 12BL5M) can be used for making your own cable.

The lines that will connect to the vehicle battery are soldered to the male DIN5 connector. As indicated in the first
figure on this page, the +VIN line connects to the battery’s positive (+) terminal and should have a 7.5 amp fuse inseries with the line. The -VIN and Chassis Ground lines both connect to the battery’s negative terminal.
DBK Option Cards and Module

907492

DBK90

pg. 9

Shielding
Using shielded TC wire with the shield connected to analog common [DBK90’s ACOM jack] will result in further
noise reduction. Using a shielded ribbon cable to connect the DBK90’s male P1 connector to the P1 connector of
the primary data acquisition device will also help minimize noise. CA-143-7 and CA-143-18 are female-to-female,
DB37 shielded ribbon cables of 7-inch and 18-inch lengths, respectively.
If a thermocouple shield is connected to the DBK90 module, leave the shield unconnected at theother end of the thermocouple. Connecting the shield to common at both ends will result in aground loop.

TC Common Mode
The maximum common-mode voltage for the DBK90 is ±10 volts. Common-mode voltage is the DC or AC voltage
signal that is applied equally to both sides of a differential input.
If a thermocouple is connected directly to a component in the vehicle at a potential that is over the maximum
common-mode voltage, then very noisy or incorrect readings will be seen. Thermocouple connections that are
made directly to the alternator or engine block may also result in high noise. Two methods of reducing noise are:(a) Run a ground line from the bolt, as indicated in the first figure.
(b) Isolate the thermocouple leads with a set of washers, one of which is mica.
This is indicated in the second figure.

Running a Ground Wire to the Battery’s Negative Terminal

A thin layer of heat-sinkcompound on the indicatedsurfaces will improve
thermal conductivity.
The length of the shoulder
washer’s hub must not exceed
the combined thickness of theterminal ring and mica washer.

Using a Washer Set and Heat Sink to Isolate the Thermocouple

pg. 10,DBK90907492

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to DBK Setup in the DaqView PDF.
o Programmers using Daq devices should refer to related sections in the Programmer’s
Manual.
Note: DaqView includes functions for the conversion and linearization of thermocouple readings into
temperature data.
When a DBK90 is selected in DaqView, thermocouple types must also be selected for the module’schannels. The steps for this are as follows:1.

In DaqView’s Configure System Hardware Window, select DBK90.

2.

From the Channel Setup Tab (following figure) select the thermocouple types as applicable.
Do this for each channel.
Note: Channel types can be changed by double-clicking in the Type column, or by using the
Channel Type pull-down list.

In the DaqView figure below we see that J-type thermocouples have been selected for a DBK90 module’s
Channels 0 through 25; possibly more, but we would have to scroll down to view information for the otherchannels. Note that channel 0 is designated as P1 0-0 and that channel 1 is seen as P1 0-1. The “0”indicates that the DBK90 module is the first such module in the acquisition system. A second DBK90
module would list channel 0 as P1 1-0 and would show channel 1 as P1 1-1. A third module would have
P1 2-0, P1 2-1, and so on …

DaqView, Channel Setup
DBK Option Cards and Module

907492

DBK90

pg. 11

Using a Temperature Calibrator
The DBK90 thermocouple module provides accurate and repeatable temperature measurements across awide range of operating conditions. However, all instrumentation is subject to drift with time and with
ambient temperature change.
Note: The ambient temperature should be stabilized for at least one hour.
If the ambient temperature of the operating environment is below 18°C or above 28°C, or if the product isnear or outside its one-year calibration interval, then the absolute accuracy may be improved through theuse of an external temperature calibrator.
A temperature calibrator is a temperature simulation instrument that allows selection of thermocouple type
and temperature. For proper operation, it must be connected to the DBK90 with the same typethermocouple wire and connector that is used in normal testing. The calibrator then generates and supplies
a voltage to the module. The supplied voltage corresponds to that which would be generated by the chosen
thermocouple type at the selected temperature.
The temperature selected on the calibrator will be dictated by the nature of normal testing. 0°C is usually
the best choice. Calibrators are the most accurate at this setting, and the connecting thermocouple wire willcontribute very little error at this temperature. However, if the dynamic range of the normal testing is, forexample, 100°C to 300°C, a selection of 200°C may give better results. In either case, the level ofadjustment is determined by comparing the unit reading to the selected calibrator temperature. For
example, if the calibrator is set to 0°C output, and the DBK unit reads 0.3°C, then an adjustment of –0.3°C
is required. That is, the adjustment value is determined by subtracting the DBK reading from the calibrator
setting.
To implement the adjustment in DaqView:
1.

Ensure that the acquisition process is turned off.

2.

Click on the cell in the Units column for the channel that is connected to the calibrator. The
engineering units pull-down menu above the grid becomes active.

3.

Click on the down arrow and select the “mx+b” option. This option allows post-acquisition
mathematical manipulation.

4.

For the example adjustment, enter -0.3 for “b.” The channel under calibration will now
read 0°C.

Note that this adjustment is a mathematical operation only, and in no way alters the hardware
calibration of the product. Moreover, it operates on a per channel basis, with the settings for agiven channel having no influence on any other channels.

pg. 12,

DBK90907492

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK90 – Specifications
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
System Compatibility: Attaches to DaqBook/2000 Series, or to a WBK40 or WBK41
System Connectors: 1 male and 1 female DB37 connector for unit-to-unit mating and for mating with P1 on the primary dataacquisition device.
TC Connectors: 56 Mini-TC connectors, oriented in 4 rows of 16
ACOM (Analog Common) Connector: DBK90’s ACOM connector accepts a 2 mm banana plug (Pomona® Electronics p/n
5936-0). The ACOM connector and 2mm jack pin provide a convenient means of connecting a line to DBK90’s
analog common.
Inputs: 56 differential TC inputs, open TC detection per channel
TC Types: J, K, T, E, S, R, B, N28, N14
Speed: Maximum TC measurement rate is 1 ms/channel
Dimensions: 285 mm W x 88 mm D x 52 mm H (11” x 3.44” x 2.05”)
Weight: 0.96 kg (2.12 lbs)
Power Requirements: 40 mA max from ±15V; 60 mA max from +5V

DBK90 Maximum Channel Capacity
DeviceMax. Channel Capacity
per Device

Max. Channel Capacity
per System

Max. DBK90 Power
Capacity per Device

DaqBook/2000
SeriesWBK40, WBK41

896

using 16 DBK90s

3,584*

using 16 DBK90s

10 DBK90s ***854

using 15 DBK90s

2,562**

using 15 DBK90s

10 DBK90s ****Presumes 4 DaqBook/2000 Series devices per system.
** Presumes 3 WBK40 / WBK41 devices attached to a WaveBook/516E*** Presumes that no other active DBK modules are attached. A DBK32A power supply is necessary to power additional DBK90s
or other active DBK options.
Input Impedance: 4 MΩ (differential) in parallel with 400pF
Input Bandwidth: 1 kHz
Minimum Resolution: 0.1˚C for all TC types
TC Accuracy: Valid for one year 25˚C ambient, see following table and accuracy conditions
Operating Temperature: -20˚ to +80˚C
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing
Temperature Coefficient of Accuracy: ±0.05˚C for every ˚C away from 25°C
Channel-to-Channel Crosstalk: -90 dB typ (0 to 100 Hz)
DC CMRR: -80 dB typ
AC CMRR: -80 dB typ (0 to 60 Hz)
Maximum Common Mode Voltage: ±10V
Over-Voltage Protection: ±40V

TC Accuracy at Measurement Temperature in °C (±°C)
Type

Min

Max

-100

0

100

300

500

700

900

1100

J

-200

760

0.8

0.7

0.7

0.8

0.9

0.9

—

—

1400
—

K

-200

1200

0.9

0.8

0.8

0.9

1.1

1.1

1.2

1.3

—

T

-200

400

0.9

0.8

0.8

0.8

—

—

—

—

—

E

-270

650

0.8

0.7

0.7

0.7

0.8

—

—

—

—
2.1

S

-50

1768

—

3.1

2.4

2.0

2.0

1.9

2.0

2.1

R

-50

1768

—

3.1

2.1

2.0

1.9

1.9

1.7

1.9

2.0

B

50

1780

—

—

—

4.9

3.2

2.8

2.4

2.3

2.0

N28

-270

400

1.2

0.9

0.9

0.9

—

—

—

—

—

N14

0

1300

—

0.9

0.9

0.9

1.1

1.1

1.2

1.3

—

Accuracy conditions:•••Exclusive of thermocouple errors
Exclusive of noise
VCM = 0DBK Option Cards and Module

907492

DBK90

pg. 13

Ordering Information

Note: Ordering information is subject to change without notice.

Description

Part No.

1

DBK90 56 channel thermocouple input module

DBK90

2

Mounting kit for mounting one DBK90 to another DBK901109-0800

3

Rack-mount kit (2U high rack-mount kit for rack mounting one DBK90
module)1109-0801

4

Mounting kit for attaching 1 or 2 DBK90 modules on top of a
primary data acquisition device which has no protective ears

1109-0802

5

Mounting kit for attaching 1,2, or 3 DBK90 modules on top of a DBK60
which has no protective ears

1109-0803

6

Molded corner mounting kit for attaching 1 or 2 DBK90 modules on top ofa primary data acquisition device which has protective ears

1109-0804

Cables, DB37 type, female-to-female
Note: The CA-37x ribbon cable can be used in lieu of the CA-255-x molded T cables.
8

CA-255-2T

2.38" Molded T-Cable Kit*
Used with 1U(Short) devices, e.g., LogBook/300, DaqBook/2001, DaqBook/2005,
DaqLab/2001, and DaqLab/2005

CA-255-4T

94" Molded T-Cable Kit*

10

Ribbon Cable
Various lengths represented by x. The CA-37-x ribbon cable can be used in

Typically used with 2U(Tall) devices, e.g., LogBook/360, DaqBook/2020, and WBK40/41

CA-37-x

lieu of the CA-255-x molded T cables. CA-37-x is typically used with DaqScan.

117” Shielded Ribbon Cable
Recommended for scenarios in which signal noise is a problem.

CA-143-7

1218” Shielded Ribbon Cable
Recommended for scenarios in which signal noise is a problem.

CA-143-18132mm banana plug for DBK90’s analog common connector (ACOM).

Pomona®
Electronics
p/n 5936-0* Molded T-Cable Kits include cable, guide sheet, cap plug and panel screws

pg. 14,DBK90907492

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK100 Series

In-Vehicle Thermocouple Measurement System
DBK100/D, DBK100/T, and DBK101

Overview …… 2

System Compatibility:

Hardware Setup …… 5

Connecting Thermocouples …… 5Open Thermocouple Detection …… 7
DBK101 Hub Configuration …… 7

DaqBook/2000* Series, DaqScan/2000 Series,
and DaqLab/2000 Series Devices.
*Cannot be used with DaqBook/2000A,/2000E, or /2000X.

Vehicle Testing and Noise Reduction……9Power Connections and Analog Common …… 9
Shielding ……10
TC Common Mode …… 10

Software Setup …… 11
Using a Temperature Calibrator …… 14
Specifications …… 15

DBK100/D

DBK100/T

DBK101

DBK100/D is terminated in a Deutsch connector, enabling watertight connections to a mating connector with up to 14
thermocouples. Custom pin-configurations are available to match with existing mating connectors. Inside the Deutsch
connector [tethered to the DBK100/D] is the cold junction sensor, which is measured by the system and used to calculate
the TC reading.

DBK100/T accepts 14 industry standard mini-TC connectors.
DBK101 You can connect one or two DBK101 hubs to a DaqBook/2000 series A/D module. A total system channel
capacity of 896 channels per DaqBook/2000 system is possible when two DBK100 hubs are used.
Reference Notes:
o Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to your system,as needed.
o In regard to calculating system power requirements, refer to DBK Basics located near
the front of this manual.

DBK Option Cards and Module

907994

DBK100 Seriespg. 1

Overview
Featureso Measure vehicle engine temperatures with remote DBK100s
o One cable transmits up to 56 channels of TC measurements from the engine
compartment to the data acquisition systemo Up to 896 TCs per system
DBK100/D and DBK100/T provide thermocouple measurement capability for in-vehicle applications, andare well suited for TC measurements in proximity to a vehicle engine. With operating temperatures in therange of -40° to +125°C, DBK100 Series devices are ideally suited for applications where engine
compartment temperature measurements are required.
The DBK100/D is housed in a rugged and water resistant, all-metal package designed specifically for harshenvironments. TC and system connections to each DBK100/D are water resistant, and are accessible fromone direction, enabling the DBK100/D to be mounted and its I/O accessed without having to be removed.
Maximum system capacity is 896 thermocouples when two DBK101 modues are used; or 448
thermocouples when one DBK101 module is used, as indicated in the following figure. For clarity,
thermocouple lines are not shown.

DBK100 System Example
These capacities were derived as follows:o 14 thermocouples can be connected to each DBK100/T or DBK100/D.
o Up to four DBK100/T or DBK100/D units can be connected to a each DBK101 channel. This is
illustrated in the preceding figure.
o DBK101 has 8 channels. Thus 32 DBK100 units can be connected to a DBK101. With 14
thermocouples possible per DBK100, 448 thermocouple connections are possible.
o Two DBK101 hubs can be connected to a DaqBook/2000 Series unit. When 2 hubs are used thesystem can have up to 896 thermocouples (448 x 2).

pg. 2,DBK100 Series

907994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

The benefit of a DBK100 system is that for every 56 TC input channels, only a single cable is required
back to the measurement equipment. Thus the length of the TC wire can be much shorter, and the numberof long cables back to the equipment is reduced by a factor of 56. Besides reducing the length of TC wire,
this system substantially reduces the opening required between the engine compartment and the primaryacquisition equipment, which is typically located in the passenger compartment of the test vehicle.
All linearization and cold-junction compensation is automatically corrected in the system, resulting instable and accurate temperature measurements with typical accuracy of better than 2°C. Two versions of
the DBK100 are available, differing by the way in which thermocouples are attached to the unit. With bothmodels, the included software driver automatically determines the temperature based on the user’s input as
to what TC type is attached to each channel.
Each DBK100/D and DBK100/T includes a built-in cold junction compensation thermistor (CJC) for direct
measurement of type J, K, T, E, N28, N14, S, R, and B thermocouples. The following table provides thetemperature range for each type.

Thermocouple Temperature Ranges
T/C Type
Temperature
Range °C
Temperature
Range °F

J

K

T

E

N28

N14

S

R

B

-200 to760-200 to1200-200 to400-270 to650-270 to
400

0 to
1300

-50 to1768-50 to
1768

50 to
1780

-328 to1400-328 to2192-328 to752-454 to1202-454 to
752

32 to
2372

-58 to3214-58 to3214

122 to3236

Cable Note:
There are three different sizes of CA-257-x interconnect cable. Any can be used to connect DBK100 units toeach other, or to a DBK101. The cable lengths, in inches, are indicated by the last two digits of the partnumber. Thus:oooCA-257-18 (18 inches)
CA-257-36 (36 inches)
CA-257-72 (72 inches)

DBK Option Cards and Module

907994

DBK100 Seriespg. 3

DBK100

Connectors: 2 control connectors allow for daisy
chaining between units and connection to the
DBK101 hub. Each control connector has 9 signals(power, differential analog input, digital control.)
DBK100/D is terminated in a Deutsch connector forconnecting up to 14 thermocouples via a mating
connector. Though DBK100/D is not shown in theblock diagram, the circuitry is the same as thatindicated. Only the thermocouple connection differs.
DBK100/T accepts 14 industry standard mini-TC
connectors.
Circuitry: The internal circuitry consists of a 16channel multiplexor (MUX), differential
instrumentation amplifier with a gain of 100, anddigital control. The units include open thermocouple
detection.

DBK101Connectors: The DBK101 hub has 8 connectors
located on the front panel, which link to DBK100 pods
via cable. The rear panel of the DBK101 includes a
P1 connector and an address switch.
Each DBK101 uses up to 8 of P1’s 16 available input
channels. A total of two DBK101 hubs can beconnected to one DaqBook.
Circuitry: The circuitry inside the DBK101 provides
the digital control and analog signal conditioning forthe DBK100 pre-amplifier. The DBK101 contains a
multiplexed pre-charge circuit. A digital control circuit
monitors the addressing of DaqBook’s P1 andgenerates serial bit streams for each DBK100 string.
The DBK101 draws all of its power from thehost DaqBook through P1.

DBK100 / DBK101 System Block Diagram
In comparison to typical DBK options, the DBK101 demands significant power from P1.
It is important that you calculate your system’s power demand, as you may need to add
auxiliary power supplies. For additional information refer to Power Requirements in the
DBK Basics section.

pg. 4,DBK100 Series

907994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Hardware Setup
Connecting Thermocouples
Each DBK100/D and DBK100/T can accept up to 14 mini-TC plugs in its channels 0 through 13. All
channels have the same level of functionality. Up to four DBK/100 units can be attached to a single
channel of a DBK101 hub. With its 8 channels, a total of 32 DBK100 units can be connected to a single
DBK101.
o 14 thermocouples can be connected to each DBK100/T or DBK100/D.
o Up to four DBK100/T or DBK100/D units can be connected to a each DBK101 channel.
o DBK101 has 8 channels. Thus 32 DBK100 units can be connected to a DBK101. With 14
thermocouples possible per DBK100 unit, 448 thermocouple connections are possible for one
DBK101 hub.
o Two DBK101 hubs can be connected to a DaqBook/2000 Series unit. When 2 hubs are used thesystem can have up to 896 thermocouples (448 x 2).

Thermocouple wire is standardized, color-coded, and polarized, as noted in the following table.

T/C
Type
J
K
T
E
N28
N14
S
R
B

Thermocouple Standards(+) Lead to(-) Lead toChannel High
Channel Low
White
Red
Yellow
Red
Blue
Red
VioletRed
OrangeRed
Orange
Red
Black
Red
Black
Red
Gray
Red

Red (-) connects
to Channel Low

The (+) color,see table,
connects toChannel HighDBK100/T users need to be aware that mini-TC plugs are type-specific. For best measurement operation
the plug TC type should match the wire TC type. If necessary, copper/copper (Type U) plugs may be used,
but measurement stability will be slightly degraded. Mini-TC plugs are polarized as well, and it is criticalfor proper measurement operation that this polarity be followed when connecting the thermocouple wire.
Once wired, the TC plugs will only mate into the DBK100/T connectors in one orientation, ensuring acorrect connection.
It should be noted that thermocouples output very small voltages and that long thermocouple leads canpickup a large amount of noise. If desired, noise reduction can be achieved through the use of shielded
thermocouples and/or averaging.
You can minimize the effect of noise by employing one or both of the following practices:o using shielded thermocouples
o averaging readings
DBK101 includes a jack labeled “ACOM.” The jack is typically used for connecting the shield of ashielded thermocouple to the DBK101 analog common. When this connection is made the shield at theother end of the thermocouple is left unconnected.
If a thermocouple shield is connected to the DBK101 hub, leave the shield unconnected at
the other end of the thermocouple. Connecting the shield to common at both ends will
result in a ground loop.

DBK Option Cards and Module

907994

DBK100 Seriespg. 5

DBK100/D is terminated in a Deutsch connector, enabling watertight connections to a mating connector
with up to 14 thermocouples. Custom pin-configurations are available to match with existing mating
connectors. Inside the Deutsch connector [tethered to the DBK100/D] is the cold junction sensor, which ismeasured by the system and used to calculate the TC reading. The pinout follows.

Female Pin

Male Pin(Looking at back side of Deutsch)

P1

Signal* f
CH 6 LOR
CH 13 LO* g
CH 6 HIS
CH 13 HI* h
CH 5 LOT
CH 12 LO* i
CH 5 HIU
CH 12 HI* j
CH 4 LOV
CH 11 LO* x
CH 4 HIW
CH 11 HI* z
CH 3 LOA
CH 10 LO
* Asterisk denoted lowercase letter.

pg. 6,DBK100 Series

907994(Looking at back side of Deutsch)

P1

Signal

* a
B
* k
C
* m
D
* n
E
* p
F
* q
* b
* r
* c

CH 3 HICH 10 HICH 2 LO
CH 9 LO
CH 2 HICH 9 HICH 1 LO
CH 8 LO
CH 1 HICH 8 HICH 0 LO
CH 7 LO
CH 0 HICH 7 HI

P1
* t
* s

Signal
CJC+
CJC-

NOTE!
Do not make connections topins t and s! Do not shortpins t and s! Pins t and s areconnected internally to Cold
Junction Compensation!

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Open Thermocouple Detection
DBK101 is equipped with open thermocouple detection. This means that a broken thermocouple wire [orotherwise unconnected input] that is measured will result in an off-scale reading. This is accomplished byapplying a small bias current to each of the channel inputs. Whenever a valid input is absent, the bias
current saturates the input amplifier, resulting in the off-scale reading.

DBK101 Hub Configuration
Up to thirty-two DBK100/D or DBK100/T pods can be attached to a single DBK101 hub. Up to two
DBK101 hubs can be attached to a DaqBook/2000 Series device.* Each DBK101 must have a uniqueaddress setting according to the base channels which occupy it..

CAUTION
Adjustment of the channel address must only be performed when the system
power is OFF. Failure to do so may result in equipment damage.

To assign a channel address to a DBK101; first locate the DIP switch on the unit’s rear panel. Three offour micro-switches [on the DIP switch] are used to set the address. Position of the right-most switch isirrelevant. After ensuring that the system power is OFF, adjust the micro-switches to set the desired
address. The following table explains various DIP switch settings.
Switch Number:Starting Address

8 4 2

1

Bank SelectSwitch2

Switch1Base Channels
occupied by DBK101

Switch8

Switch4000 - Half(4 channels)

N/A

Channels (00-03)

0

0

1 - Full(8 channels)

N/A

Channels (00-07)

01

0 - Half(4 channels)

N/A

Channels (04-07)

0

1

1 - Full(8 channels)

N/A

Channels (04-11)

10

0 - Half(4 channels)

N/A

Channels (08-11)

10

1 - Full(8 channels)

N/A

Channels (08-15)

1

1

0 - Half(4 channels)

N/A

Channels (12-15)

1

1

1 - Full(0 channels)

N/A

No selected Channels.
DBK101 is inhibited.

Example A: Two DBK101 hubs, one with 8 channels and one with 4 channels.
1st DBK101 has 8 strings of DBK100 pods (1 string per DBK101 channel).
2nd DBK101 has 4 strings of DBK100 pods (1 string each for DBK101channels: 0, 1, 2, and 3)
In this example the first DBK101 is using 8 channels and the user wants these assigned as channels (00 through07) so he sets the DIP-switch to “0 0 1 0.” (See preceding table).
The second DBK101 is using 4 channels and the user wants these assigned as channels (08 through 11) so he sets
the DIP-switch to “1 0 0 0.” (See preceding table). If he set the switch to 0 0 0 0 in he would have an address
conflict since 00-03 is already accounted for by the first DBK101’s DIP-switch setting.
Example B: Two DBK101 hubs, both with 8 channels.
DBK Option Cards and Module

907994

DBK100 Series

pg. 7

Both DBK101 hubs have 8 strings of DBK100 modules (1 string per DBK101channel).
In this example the first DBK101 is using 8 channels and the user wants these assigned as channels (00 through07) so he sets the DIP-switch to “0 0 1 0.” (See preceding table).
The second DBK101 is also using 8 channels. To avoid conflict these must be 08 through 15. Thus the DIPswitch is set to “1 0 1 0.” (See preceding table).
Example C: Two DBK101 hubs, both with 4 channels.
Both DBK101 hubs have 4 strings of DBK100 modules. Each is half occupied.
In this example the first DBK101 is using 4 channels and the user wants these assigned as channels (00 through03) so he sets the DIP-switch to “0 0 0 0.” (See preceding table).
The second DBK101 is also using 4 channels. The user decides to have these channels assigned as 04 through 07.
The DIP-switch is set to “0 1 0 0.” (See preceding table).

pg. 8,DBK100 Series

907994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Vehicle Testing and Noise Reduction
Power Connections and Analog Common
To properly measure vehicle-attached thermocouples differentially, it is necessary to have an analog common
connection to the negative side of the vehicle’s electrical system. A jack labeled ACOM, located on the DBK101
front panel, provides a connection point for analog common. If analog common is not connected, true differential
readings cannot be obtained due to noise. For this reason, the chassis of the primary data acquisition device, e.g.,
DaqBook/2000 Series device, must also have a good connection to the negative side of the vehicle’s electricalsystem.
All grounds should come together at the negative terminal of the test vehicle’s battery. Connecting the grounds at
any other point may introduce noise. One line, with a banana plug is used to connect the battery’s negative terminal
to the DBK101 ACOM jack. The ACOM jack connects internally to the DBK101 P1, pin # 28 (AGND).

Connections for a Vehicle Test
Note 1: The ACOM connector is a banana jack. A stripped wire can be secured by:(1) unscrewing the banana jack housing, (2) inserting the wire sideways through thehole, and then (3) tightening the housing.
Note 2: It is best to use a male DIN5 connector to connect the lines from the battery to the
DaqBook/2005 Series female DIN5 connector. A Switchcraft® male DIN5 Connector(p/n 12BL5M) can be used for making your own cable.

DBK Option Cards and Module

907994

DBK100 Seriespg. 9

The lines that will connect to the vehicle battery are soldered to the male DIN5 connector. As indicated in
the first figure on this page, the +VIN line connects to the battery’s positive (+) terminal and should have a
7.5 amp fuse in series with the line. The -VIN and Chassis Ground lines both connect to the battery’s
negative terminal.

Shielding
Using shielded TC wire with the shield connected to analog common [DBK101 ACOM jack] will result infurther noise reduction. Using a shielded ribbon cable to connect the DBK101 male P1 connector to the P1
connector of the primary data acquisition device (DaqBoard/2000) will also help minimize noise.
CA-143-7 and CA-143-18 are female-to-female, DB37 shielded ribbon cables of 7-inch and 18-inch
lengths, respectively.
If a thermocouple shield is connected to a DBK101 module, leave the shield unconnected
at the other end of the thermocouple. Connecting the shield to common at both ends will
result in a ground loop.

TC Common Mode
The maximum common-mode voltage for the DBK100 is ±5 volts. Common-mode voltage is the DC or
AC voltage signal that is applied equally to both sides of a differential input.
If a thermocouple is connected directly to a component in the vehicle at a potential that is over the
maximum common-mode voltage, then very noisy or incorrect readings will be seen. Thermocouple
connections that are made directly to the alternator or engine block may also result in high noise. Two
methods of reducing noise are:(a) Run a ground line from the bolt, as indicated in the first figure.
(b) Isolate the thermocouple leads with a set of washers, one of which is mica.
This is indicated in the second figure.

Running a Ground Wire to the Battery’s Negative Terminalpg. 10,

DBK100 Series

907994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

A thin layer of heat-sinkcompound on the indicatedsurfaces will improve
thermal conductivity.
The length of the shoulder
washer’s hub must not exceed
the combined thickness of theterminal ring and mica washer.

Using a Washer Set and Heat Sink to Isolate the Thermocouple

Software Setup
Reference Notes:
o DaqView users - Refer to DBK Setup in the DaqView PDF.
o Programmers using Daq devices should refer to related sections in the Programmer’s
Manual.

Note: DaqView includes functions for the conversion and linearization of thermocouple readings into
temperature data.
When a DBK101 is selected in DaqView, thermocouple types must also be selected for the module’schannels. The steps for this are as follows:1.

In DaqView’s Configure System Hardware Window, select DBK101.

2.

If you will be using more than 4 channels for one DBK100, select to Enable Full Bank
Mode. If using 4 or less, do not enable the full bank mode. See following figure.

Full-Bank Mode Disabled**When Full Bank Mode is enabled a DBK101 can be occupied with up to 8 Base Channels.

DBK Option Cards and Module

907994

DBK100 Seriespg. 11With One DBK101 and Full Bank Mode Disabled
Base Channels 0, 1, 2, and 3 are occupied

Reference Note:
In relation to the above figure, you may want to review the section, DBK101 Hub Configuration,
on page 7. The section pertains to full-banks, half-banks, base channels, and associated DIP
switch settings.
3.

From the Channel Setup Tab (following figure) select the thermocouple types as applicable.
Do this for each channel. Note that channels will be listed as DBK100 channels.
Channel types can be changed by double-clicking in the Type column, or by using the
Channel Type pull-down list.

pg. 12,

DBK100 Series

907994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

In the following figure we see that J-type thermocouples have been selected for Channels 0 through 23;
possibly more, but we would have to scroll down to view information for the other channels.
Notice Channel 0 is designated as P1 0-0 and that channel 1 is seen as P1 0-1. The “0” preceding the dashindicates that the DBK101 module is the first such module in the acquisition system. A second DBK101
module would list Channel 0 as P1 1-0 and would show Channel 1 as P1 1-1.

DaqView, Channel Setup

DBK Option Cards and Module

907994

DBK100 Seriespg. 13

Using a Temperature Calibrator
DBK100 Series / DBK101 systems provide accurate and repeatable temperature measurements across awide range of operating conditions. However, all instrumentation is subject to drift with time and with
ambient temperature change.
Note: The ambient temperature should be stabilized for at least one hour.
If the ambient temperature of the operating environment is below 18°C or above 28°C, or if the product isnear or outside its one-year calibration interval, then the absolute accuracy may be improved through theuse of an external temperature calibrator.
A temperature calibrator is a temperature simulation instrument that allows selection of thermocouple type
and temperature. For proper operation, it must be connected to the DBK100 device with the same typethermocouple wire and connector that is used in normal testing. The calibrator then generates and supplies
a voltage to the module. The supplied voltage corresponds to that which would be generated by the chosen
thermocouple type at the selected temperature.
The temperature selected on the calibrator will be dictated by the nature of normal testing. 0°C is usually
the best choice. Calibrators are the most accurate at this setting, and the connecting thermocouple wire willcontribute very little error at this temperature. However, if the dynamic range of the normal testing is, forexample, 100°C to 300°C, a selection of 200°C may give better results. In either case, the level ofadjustment is determined by comparing the unit reading to the selected calibrator temperature. For
example, if the calibrator is set to 0°C output, and the DBK unit reads 0.3°C, then an adjustment of -0.3°C
is required. That is, the adjustment value is determined by subtracting the DBK reading from the calibrator
setting.
To implement the adjustment in DaqView:
1.

Ensure that the acquisition process is turned off.

2.

Click on the cell in the Units column for the channel that is connected to the calibrator. The
engineering units pull-down menu above the grid becomes active.

3.

Click on the down arrow and select the “mx+b” option. This option allows post-acquisition
mathematical manipulation.

4.

For the example adjustment, enter -0.3 for “b.” The channel under calibration will now
read 0°C.

Note that this adjustment is a mathematical operation only, and in no way alters the hardware
calibration of the product. Moreover, it operates on a per channel basis, with the settings for agiven channel having no influence on any other channels.

pg. 14,

DBK100 Series

907994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Specifications – DBK100 Series
Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice.
DBK100 Series Devices
Part No.
Description
DBK100/D

14-channel thermocouple input with Deutsch #AFD51-20-41PN1A connector

DBK100/T

14-channel thermocouple input with mini-TC connectors

DBK1018-port hub for DBK100 (accepts up to 448 TC channels)

System Compatibility:
DaqBook/2000* Series, DaqScan/2000 Series, and DaqLab/2000 Series Devices
Connection is made via DBK101 hub.
*Cannot be used with DaqBook/2000A, /2000E, or /2000X.
System Capacity (max): 896 thermocouples

o 14 thermocouples can be connected to each DBK100/T or DBK100/D.
o Up to four DBK100/T or DBK100/D units can be connected to a each DBK101 channel.
o DBK101 has 8 channels. Thus 32 DBK100 units can be connected to a DBK101. With 14
thermocouples possible per DBK100, 448 thermocouple connections are possible.

o Two DBK101 hubs can be connected to a DaqBook/2000 Series unit. When 2 hubs are used thesystem can have up to 896 thermocouples (448 x 2).

Connectivity:
To Connect
To Connect

DaqBook
DBK100 or DBK101

toto

DBK101
DBK100use

CA-255-2T (2 in.)or

CA-255-4T (4 in.)use

CA-257-18 (18 in.)or

CA-257-36 (36 in.)or

CA-257-72 (72 in.)

Total cabling length for one string of DBK100 pods should not exceed 20 ft.
TC Connectors, DBK100/D: 1 pigtail cable assembly to Deutsch MS3471L20-41P military style connector;
CJC thermistor assembled onto connector.
TC Inputs: 14 differential TC inputs, open TC detection per channel
TC Types: J, K, T, E, S, R, B, N28, N14
Dimensions
DBK100/D:
Pod: 102 mm W x 57 mm D x 30 mm H (4” x 2.25” x 1.18”)
Deutsch Connector: 66.8 mm L x 31.8 mm diameter (2.63” x 1.25”); connected to DBK100/D via 8” cable
DBK100/T: 186 mm W x 44 mm D x 30 mm H (7.3” x 1.7” x 1.18”)
DBK101: 285 mm W x 220 mm D x 45 mm H (11” x 8.5” x 1.75”)
Weight
DBK100/D: 0.36 kg (0.80 lbs.)
DBK100/T: 0.36 kg (0.80 lbs.)
DBK101: 1.13 kg (2.5 lbs.)

DBK Option Cards and Module

907994

DBK100 Seriespg. 15Power Requirements
DBK100/D: 10 mA from +15V, 10 mA from -15V, 300 mW total
DBK100/T: 10 mA from +15V, 10 mA from -15V, 300 mW total
DBK101: 40 mA from +15V, 40 mA from -15V, 300 mA from +5V, 2700 mW total
Input Impedance: 4M Ohm (differential) in parallel with 400 pF
Input Bandwidth: 1 kHz
Minimum Resolution: 0.1°C for all TC types
Measurement Temperature in °C (�°C)

TC Accuracy at Measurement Temperature in °C (±°C)
Type

Min

Max

-100

0

100

300

500

700

900

1100

J

-200

760

1.2

1.0

1.0

1.2

1.4

1.4

--

--

1400
--

K

-200

1200

1.4

1.2

1.2

1.4

1.6

1.6

1.8

2.0

--

T

-200

400

1.4

1.2

1.2

1.2

--

--

--

--

--

E

-270

650

1.2

1.0

1.0

1.0

1.2

--

--

--

--

S

-50

1768

--

4.6

3.6

3.0

3.0

2.8

3.0

3.2

3.2

R

-50

1768

--

4.6

3.2

3.0

2.8

2.8

2.6

2.8

3.0
3.0

B

50

1780

--

--

--

7.4

4.8

4.2

3.6

3.4

N28

-270

400

1.8

1.4

1.4

1.4

--

--

--

--

--

N14

0

1300

--

1.4

1.4

1.4

1.6

1.6

1.8

2.0

--

TC Accuracy: Valid for one year 25°C ambient; see table above.
Accuracy conditions:o Exclusive of thermocouple errorso Exclusive of noiseo VCM = 0o 25°C ambient temperature, stabilized for 1 hour
For applications where higher common-mode TC measurements are required, DaqBook systems offer
high-isolation options up to 500V. These options would reside at the DaqBook, and require running the
TC wire from the engine to the passenger compartment.
TC Accuracy* at
Operating Temperature:
DBK100/D & DBK100/T: -40° to +125°C
DBK101: -30° to +70°C
Storage Temperature: -40° to +125°C
Relative Humidity: 0 to 95% non-condensing
DBK100/D & DBK100/T: Water resistantTemperature Coefficient of Accuracy for Type T TC: ±0.05°C for every °C away from 25°C
Channel-to-Channel Crosstalk: -90 dB typ (0 to 100 Hz)
DC CMRR: -80 dB typ
AC CMRR: -80 dB typ (0 to 60 Hz)
Maximum Common Mode Voltage: ±5V
Over-Voltage Protection: ±40V

pg. 16,

DBK100 Series

907994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK200 Series Matrix
The DBK200 Series Matrix is presented on the following page. It is preceded by information concerning
connectivity issues. The matrix provides a quick comparison of the DBK200 Series adapter boards. Details foreach board are provided in subsequent sections of this manual.
The DaqBoard/2000 Series devices communicate [external from the host PC] through a 100-pin P4 connector.
DaqBoard/2000 Series boards have no on-board P1, P2, or P3 connectors.
The DaqBook/2000 Series devices communicate through 37-pin P1, P2, and P3 connectors and/or the device’s
P4 connector. In regard to DaqBook/2000 Series devices, it must be realized that P4 offers no additional I/O tothat which is already provided for by P1, P2, and P3.
The DaqBoard/500 Series and DaqBoard/1000 Series devices communicate through a 68-pin SCSI
connector. DBK215 was designed for use with the /500 and /1000 series devices.

CAUTION
DaqBook/2000 Series Users: Signal conflicts between a DaqBook/2000 Series device’s P1,
P2, P3 connectors and its P4 connector can result in erroneous readings and possible
equipment damage.
Therefore, when DaqBook/2000 Series device connections have been made to P1, P2,
and/or P3, use caution when making connections through P4, and visa versa.
DaqBook/2000 Series Users: The 100-pin P4 connector shares signal connections with the
P1, P2, and P3 connectors. P4 offers no additional I/O. You can connect a DBK200 Series
Option to P4 on a DaqBook/2000 Series device via a CA-195 cable. This essentiallydistances the P1, P2, P3 connections from the DaqBook/2000. See the preceding Caution.
The P4 connector on the DaqBoard/2000 Series boards typically connects to a P4 connector on one of the
DBK200 Series adapter boards. Depending on which adapter board is used, the P4 lines terminate to P1, P2,
and/or P3 connectors on the DBK option. Several of the adapter boards include related screw terminals.
The P4 connector on the DaqBook/2000 Series devices may or may not be used, as indicated in the following
note.

DaqBook/2000 Series Users:
There are two ways to connect a DBK option to a DaqBook/2000 Series device. The first
method is preferable, as it introduces less noise.
Preferred Method – (a) Connect a CA-37-x cable to the appropriate DB37 connector[P1, P2, or P3] on the DaqBook/2000 Series device. (b) Connect thefree end of the cable to the DBK card or module.
Optional Method – (a) Connect a CA-195-x cable to the P4 connector on the DaqBook/2000
Series device. (b) Connect the free end of the cable to a DBK200
Series device. (c) Connect the DBK option to the DBK200 Series
device, as applicable.
The primary reason that less noise is seen in the “preferred” method is that a DaqBook/2000
Series device’s P1 connector pertains only to analog acquisition signals and the P2 connector
pertains only to digital I/O. This provides a strong degree of isolation between the two
signal types. However, in the case of a CA-195-x cable connected to P4, digital and analog
signals co-exist in one cable.
If you need to use the P4 connection method, use of the 8-inch ribbon cable (CA-195-1) will
result in the lowest level of crosstalk [for that method].

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967194

DBK200 Series, Adapter Board Matrix, pg. 1

The following matrix provides a quick comparison of the DBK200 Series adapter boards. Details for eachboard are provided in subsequent document modules.

DBK200 Series, Adapter Board Matrix
DBK

P1

P2

P3

P4

AnalogDigital

200
201
202
203
204

Yes
Yes
Yes

No

No

Yes
Yes

Yes
40-pinheaderfor P3

Yes
Yes
Yes

Yes

Custom RC
Filter Setup.

205

No

No

12
screwterm.

Yes

Yes

No

206

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

No

207
207/CJC(Qty. 2)

Yes

No

No

Yes

Yes

Can carry
5B modules.

Yes

No

Yes

Yes

Can carry
relay modules.

Yes
Yes

Yes

Yes
Yes

No

No

No

Yes

Can carry Digital
I/O
mini-modules.
3 Card-Slots

Pulse,
Freq.,
DigitalSpecialFeatures

Comments

No

No

No

No

Analog I/O use only.
Like DBK209, except for form-factor.
DBK202 is a bare board. DBK203
consists of a DBK202 mounted in achassis. DBK204 consists of a DBK203
and a CA-209 CE cable kit.
Only used with DaqBoard/2003 or/2003c. Can plug directly into P4. Screw
terminals are related to P3.
Similar to DBK202, but has a different
form-factor and has no RC filter setup.
Supports 5B-compatible Analog I/O
modules. DBK207/CJC includes Cold
Junction Compensation. Includes two P1
connectors. Screw terminals are for 5B
module connections.
Supports Opto-22 compatible SolidState-Relay (SSR) digital modules.
Includes two P2 connectors.
Like DBK201, except for form-factor.
Supports Grayhill 70M-series minimodules. Includes two P2 connectors.

Screw
Terminals

208

No

209
210

Yes
Yes

213

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

214

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

215

No

No

No

No

Yes

(Qty. 2)

(Qty. 2)

BNC connectors
3 Card-Slots
BNC connectors
68-pin SCSIClosely related to DBK203.
Includes three card-slots
Closely related to DBK203. Includes 16
BNC connectors and three card-slots
Closely related to DBK203. Includes 16
BNC connectors and one 68-pin SCSI
connector (P5). Only used with
DaqBoard/500 Series or
DaqBoard/1000 Series boards.

Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4.
DBK215 is used for DaqBoard/500 Series and DaqBoard/1000 Series boards. Refer to the DBK215 section ofthis document for details, including pinouts.

DBK200 Series, Adapter Board Matrix, pg. 2967194

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK202, DBK203, DBK204 Series
For Analog I/O, Digital I/O, & Pulse/Frequency

Overview …… 2
Connection Tips…… 4
Using Screw-Terminal Blocks …… 6
Using the P3 Header …... 11
Adding Resistor/Capacitor
Filter Networks …… 12

P4-to-P1 / P2 / P3 Adapters
For Use with DaqBook/2000 Series or
DaqBoard/2000 Series Devices

DBK203A, Rear Panel

DBK

Decription

DBK202Screw-terminal adapter board. Board only, no chassis.

DBK203Screw-terminal adapter module with pull-out drawer. Superseded by DBK203A.

DBK203A

Screw-terminal adapter module (supersedes DBK203). DBK203A is the most popular ofthese 5 DBK options.

DBK204

DBK203A plus CA-209 CE cable kit. DBK204 units shipped prior to the release of
DBK203A use a DBK203.

DBK204c

DBK203A plus CA-209c CE cable kit. For use with compact PCIs and DaqBoard/2000c
Series boards. DBK204c units shipped prior to the release of DBK203A use a DBK203.

Each of these units includes:(a) P1, Analog Input, DB37 connector(b) P2, Digital I/O DB37 connector(c) P3, internal 40-pin header, for Digital I/O and Analog Out. The 40-pin header connects to a
Pulse/Frequency DBK card, or to a module’s P3 connector via a
CA-60 cable. These cables have a 40-pin female connector at one end and a DB37 (37-pin)male connector at the other end.
(d) P4, 100-pin connector which includes all signals found in P1, P2, and P3, collectively.
(e) Internal, on-board, screw-terminal blocks which correlate with P1, P2, and P3(f) Internal, on-board socket locations for custom RC Filter networks

Reference Notes:
In regard to calculating system power requirements refer to the DBK Basics section.
Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
For a quick comparison of all DBK200 Series boards, refer to the DBK200 Series Matrix.
The matrix is located just before the DBK200 section.
Refer to the DaqBoard/2000 Series User’s Manual (p/n 1033-0901) or the
DaqBook/2000 Series User’s Manual (p/n 1103-0901) for information pertaining
to those products, as needed.
The DBK213, /214, and /215 sections contain information on devices which are closely
related to DBK203A.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

938994

DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series, pg. 1

Overview
The various part numbers [DBK202, /203, /203A, /204, and /204c] of these closely related products aredescribed in the table on page 1. With exception of the DBK202 being a “board only,” the layout for eachis as indicated in the following figure.

DBK203A, Cover Plate Removed*

Custom RC Filter Setup is discussed in the section entitled, Adding Resistor/Capacitor Filter
Networks, page 12.

** To remove the cover plate, remove the upper inside screw from each of the corner mounting
brackets (often referred to as protective ears); then lift the plate from the unit.
The information included in this section, when combined with that found in related DBK card and DBK
module sub-sections should enable you to set up your desired configuration.
It is important to note that the DaqBoard/2000 Series boards communicate [external from the host PC]
through a 100-pin P4 connector. The P1, P2, and P3 connectors discussed in association with these boards
are subset connectors of the 100-pin P4 connector. Certain DaqBook/2000 Series devices have both a P4
connector and a set of P1, P2, and P3 connectors on the unit. The System Connections and Pinouts chapter
includes pinouts for both types of devices, i.e., boards and “books.”
Each of the adapters discussed in this section provide a DB37 P1 connector, DB37 P2 connector, and a
40-pin “on-board” P3 header.
ooooP1 is used for Analog Input
P2 for Digital I/O
P3 for Pulse/Frequency (Digital and Counter/Timer) I/O
P4 includes all signals found in P1, P2, and P3

In addition to these four connectors, each device includes terminal blocks designated TB1 through TB12.
The screw terminal blocks tie-in to P1, P2, and P3 and provide for easy signal connection.
pg. 2, DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series

938994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Screw-Terminal Adapter Board
The DBK202 Board provides a means of connecting channel input signals to a /2000 Series device throughone of three methods:•

With cables connected to P1, P2, and P3 connectors, as applicable.

•

With signal wires connected to the appropriate screw-terminal blocks (TB1 through TB12).
Note that the DBK202 board’s silkscreen clearly identifies all screw terminals.

•

With a combination of the above two methods.

When connecting a DBK202 to a P4 connector, a CA-195 cable is used. The cable has a P4 connector
located at each end.
Note: DBK202 contains mounting holes that allow the board to be secured inside a user-provided
enclosure.

Screw-Terminal Adapter Modules
The DBK203, DBK203A, DBK204, and DBK204c each consist of a DBK202 board housed in a chassis.
The DBK203 [and DBK204 and DBK204c units that use it] include a card drawer that can be slid free ofthe module. The sliding card drawer provides easy access to the twelve terminal blocks and to the 40-pin
P3 header. The DBK203A (which supersedes the DBK203) and the DBK204 and DBK204c units which
use the DBK203A have no slide out drawer.

DBK203 Includes a Slide-Out DBK202 Board
DBK203A has no Slide-Out Option

Reference Note for Custom RC Filter Setup:
You can install resistors and capacitors to create RC networks for P1 Analog Input Channels.
For detailed information, refer to Adding Resistor/Capacitor Filter Networks, which begins on
page 12 of this DBK section.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

938994

DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series, pg. 3

Connection Tips
CAUTION
Turn off power to the host PC and externally connected equipment prior to connecting
cables or signal lines to the DBK. Electric shock or damage to equipment can result
even under low-voltage conditions.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle
boards by their edges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure boards do not come into
contact with foreign elements such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.
Do not confuse connectors. Ensure that you only connect P1 I/Os to P1, P2 I/Os to P2,
and P3 I/Os to P3. Improper connection may result in equipment damage.
Be sure to align the P4 orientation indicators () prior to mating the P4 connectors.

Example of a DBK202 Connected to Analog and Digital DBK Cards via P1 and P2, Respectively

The illustrations and actual board silkscreen are the only references you should need to make proper
connections.
A list of connection tips follows:
1.

Ensure power is removed from the device(s) to be connected.

2.

Observe ESD precautions when handling the board and making connections.

3.

Do not make redundant connections. For example, for ANALOG IN you can use the P1(DB37) connector or Terminal Blocks TB9 through TB12. You would not use both sets of
ANALOG IN connectors.

4.

There is no need to access the board within a DBK203, DBK203A, DBK204, or DBK204c
unless you need to make connections to P3 or to a terminal block.

pg. 4, DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series

938994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

5.

The board’s 100-pin P4 connector connects to the DaqBoard/2000 P4 connector via a
CA-195 Cable.

6.

To obtain maximum protection from static, connect the CHASSIS terminal to earth ground.

Notes: Regarding connections to DB37 connectors and to the P3 (40-pin) header:(a) P1 connects to an analog DBK card or module’s P1 connector via a CA-37 cable.
(b) P2 connects to a Digital DBK card or module’s P2 connector via a CA-37 cable.
(c) The 40-pin header (P3) connects to a Pulse/Frequency DBK card, or to a module’s
P3 connector via a CA-60 cable. Note that CA-60 cables have a 40-pin female
connector at one end and a DB37 (37-pin) male connector at the other end.
7. To access the board, i.e., to connect to P3 or to terminal blocks:a) DBK202 – access of the board is direct, or as determined by your own custom
enclosure.
b) DBK203 – Loosen the two thumbscrews on the front panel and slide the card
drawer free of the unit.
c) DBK203A – Remove the upper inside screw from each of the four corner brackets(see figure, page 2) and lift the cover plate from the unit.
d) DBK204 and DBK204c – Follow step 2b or 2c as applicable to your unit.

8. For DBK204 and DBK204c refer to the separate CE Cable Kit instructions that are included
with the associated CE cable kit.

Example of a DaqBoard/2000 System using a DBK203 (or DBK203A)DBK Option Cards and Modules

938994

DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series, pg. 5

Using Screw-Terminal Blocks
CAUTION
Turn off power to the host PC and externally connected equipment prior to connecting cables orsignal lines to the DBK. Electric shock or damage to equipment can result even under low-voltage
conditions.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle boards by theiredges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure boards do not come into contact with foreign elements
such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.
Do not confuse connectors. Ensure that you only connect P1 I/Os to P1, P2 I/Os to P2, and P3
I/Os to P3. Improper connection may result in equipment damage.
Be sure to align the P4 orientation indicators () prior to mating the P4 connectors.

1.

Review the preceding CAUTIONS and the P4 alignment note.

2.

Access the terminal blocks:a) DBK202 – access of the board is direct, or as determined by your own custom
enclosure.
b) DBK203 – Loosen the two thumbscrews on the front panel and slide the card
drawer free of the unit.
c) DBK203A – Remove the upper inside screw from each of the four corner brackets(see figure, page 2) and lift the cover plate from the unit.
d) DBK204 and DBK204c – Follow step 2b or 2c as applicable to your unit.

3.

Make the wiring connections to the terminals. Refer to the board’s silkscreen and to the pincorrelations on the next few pages.

4.

Tighten the terminal block screws snug. Do not over-tighten.

In general, the following terminal block-to-signal relationships apply:o TB9, TB10, TB11, and TB12 are used for ANALOG IN and provide a connection
option to the P1 (DB37) connector.
o TB5, TB6, TB7, and TB8 are used for DIGITAL I/O and provide a connection
option to the P2 (DB37) connector.
o TB1, TB2, TB3, and TB4 are used for Pulse/Frequency/Digital I/O and provide aconnection to the 40-pin header (P3).

pg. 6, DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series

938994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

The following pages correlate the DBK202 terminal block connectors with the associated pins of
the P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors. Note that the System Connections and Pinouts chapter
contains additional pin-outs, and includes references to the 100-pin P4 connector.

P4 (100 pins)

P2 (37-pins)

P1 (37-pins)

P3 40-pin
Header

DBK202 BoardDBK Option Cards and Modules

938994

DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series, pg. 7

Correlation to P1 – Pertains to Terminal Blocks TB9, TB10, TB11, and TB12 for Analog I/O.
TB9
DIFF
SE
0H
0
0L
8
1H
1
1L
9
2H
2
2L
10
3H
3
3L
11
FILT CAP LO
SGND
TB10
DIFF
SE
4H
4
4L
12
5H
5
5L
13
6H
6
6L
14
7H
7
7L
15
FILT CAP LO
SGND

P1 Pin Number and Description (see Note 1)
37
18
36
17
35
16
34
15
N/A
19

CH 0 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 0 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 8 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 0 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 1 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 1 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 9 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 1 LO IN (Differential Mode)CH 2 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 2 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 10 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 2 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 3 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 3 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 11 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 3 LO IN (Differential Mode)
For RC filter networks install a wire jumper between the relevant FILT CAP LO and
AGND. Note that there is no association between FILT CAP LO and P4.
Signal Ground, Sense Common; reference ground, not for general use.

P1 – TB9

P1 Pin Number and Description (see Note 1)
33
14
32
13
31
12
30
11
N/A
19

CH 4 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 4 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 12 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 4 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 5 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 5 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 13 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 5 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 6 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 6 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 14 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 6 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 7 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 7 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 15 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 7 LO IN (Differential Mode)
For RC filter networks install a wire jumper between the relevant FILT CAP LO and
AGND. Note that there is no association between FILT CAP LO and P4.
Signal Ground, Sense Common; reference ground, not for general use.

TB11
TTL TRIG
A/I CLK
EXP 5
EXP 6
EXP 7
EXP 8
EXP 9
EXP 10
EXP 11AGND

P1 Pin Number and Description
25
TTL Trigger, Digital IN, External TTL Trigger Input
20
A/I Clock, External ADC Pacer Clock Input/ Internal ADC Pacer Clock Output
5
Expansion 5. Digital OUT, external GAIN select bit 1
6
Expansion 6. Digital OUT, external GAIN select bit 0
3
Expansion 7. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 3
22
Expansion 8. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 2
4
Expansion 9. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 1
23
Expansion 10. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 026
Expansion 11. Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH)*
Analog Ground, Common

TB12
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
+ 15 V- 15 V
AGND+5V

P1 Pin Number and Description*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common
21
Expansion, +15 V Power
2
Expansion, -15 V Power*
Common Ground1
Expansion, +5 V Power*Refer to Ground Correlation Tables in the System Connections and Pinouts chapter.

P1 – TB10

P1 – TB11

P1 – TB12

Note 1: For TB9 and TB10, the filter network portion of the silkscreen is not shown. Instead, the DIFF and SE channel
identifiers have been moved next to the screws for ease in identification.
pg. 8, DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series

938994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Correlation to P2 – Pertains to Terminal Blocks TB5, TB6, TB7, and TB8 for Digital I/O.
TB5
DGND
DGND
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0

P2 Pin Number and Description*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common
30
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 7; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 15
31
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 6; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 14
32
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 5; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 13
33
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 4; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 12
34
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 3; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 11
35
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 2; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 10
36
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 1; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 9
37
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 0; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 8

TB6
+5 V
+5 V
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND

P2 Pin Number and Description
18
Expansion +5 V Power
20
Expansion +5 V Power*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common

TB7
DGND
DGND
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
C0

P2 Pin Number and Description*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common
22
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 7; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 7
23
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 6; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 6
24
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 5; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 5
25
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 4; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 4
26
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 3; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 3
27
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 2; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 2
28
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 1; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 1
29
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 0; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 0

TB8
DGND
DGND
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

P2 Pin Number and Description*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common
10
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 0; or P2 Expansion READ Output
9
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 1; or P2 Expansion WRITE Output
8
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 2; or P2 Expansion RESET Output
7
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 3; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 4 Out
6Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 4; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 3 Out
5Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 5; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 2 Out
4Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 6; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 1 Out
3Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 7; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 0 Out

P2 – TB5

P2 – TB6

P2 – TB7

P2 – TB8* Refer to Ground Correlation Tables in the System Connections and Pinouts chapter.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

938994

DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series, pg. 9

Correlation to P3 – Pertains to Terminal Blocks TB1, TB2, TB3, and TB4 for Pulse/Frequency/Digital I/O.
TB1

P3 Pin Number and Description

D0

10

P3 Digital Port Bit 0

D1

9

P3 Digital Port Bit 1

D2

8

P3 Digital Port Bit 2

D3

7

P3 Digital Port Bit 3

D4

6

P3 Digital Port Bit 4

D55

P3 Digital Port Bit 5

D64

P3 Digital Port Bit 6

D7

3

P3 Digital Port Bit 7

DGND

*

Digital Ground, Common

+5V

20

Expansion, +5 Volt Power

TB2

P3 Pin Number and Description

D829

P3 Digital Port Bit 8

D928

P3 Digital Port Bit 9

D10

27

P3 Digital Port Bit 10

D11

26

P3 Digital Port Bit 11

D12

25

P3 Digital Port Bit 12

D13

24

P3 Digital Port Bit 13

D14

23

P3 Digital Port Bit 14

D15

22

P3 Digital Port Bit 15

DGND

*

Digital Ground, Common

DGND

*

Digital Ground, Common

TB3

P3 – TB1

P3 – TB2

P3 Pin Number and Description

CH0 (DAC0)34

Analog Out; Analog DAC 0 Output

AGND

*

Analog Ground, Common; intended for use with DACs

EXP 0 (DAC2)

32

Analog Out; Analog DAC 2 Output

AGND

*

Analog Ground, Common; intended for use with DACs

CH1 (DAC1)

33

Analog Out; Analog DAC 1 Output

A/O CLK

21

Analog Out Clock; External DAC Pacer Clock Input/
Internal DAC Pacer Clock Output

EXP 1 (DAC3)

31

Analog Out; Analog DAC 3 Output

DGND

*

Digital Ground, Common

+15 V

19

Expansion, + 15 VDC

37Expansion, -15 VDC

-15 V
TB4

P3 – TB3

P3 Pin Number and Description

EXP 2

12

Reserved

EXP 3

13

Reserved

EXP 4

14

Reserved

TMR 0

15

P3 Timer 0 Output

TMR 1

16

P3, Timer 1 Output

CNT 3

35

P3 Counter 3 Input

CNT 2

17

P3 Counter 2 Input

CNT 1

36

P3 Counter 1 Input

CNT0

18

P3 Counter 0 Input

DGND

*

Digital Ground, Common* Refer to Ground Correlation Tables in the System Connections and Pinouts chapter.

pg. 10, DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series

938994

P3 – TB4DBK Option Cards and Modules

Using the P3 Header
CAUTION
Disconnect the DBK202, DBK203, DBK203A, DBK204, or DBK204c from power andfrom signal sources prior to connecting the CA-60 cable to the 40-pin header.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle
boards by their edges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure boards do not come into
contact with foreign elements such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.
Do not confuse connectors. Ensure that you only connect P1 I/Os to P1, P2 I/Os to P2,
and P3 I/Os to P3. Improper connection may result in equipment damage.

P3 40-Pin Header

If you need a DB37 connector
for P3, connect a CA-60 cableto this 40-pin header.

The P3 Corner Section of a DBK202

The P3 40-pin header can be used to obtain a DB37 type connector via a CA-60 cable.
To make a DB37 connector available for P3:
1.

Follow the preceding CAUTIONS and ensure power is removed from the system devices.

2.

Access the terminal blocks:a) DBK202 – access of the board is direct, or as determined by your own custom
enclosure.
b) DBK203 – Loosen the two thumbscrews on the front panel and slide the card
drawer free of the unit.
c) DBK203A – Remove the upper inside screw from each of the four corner brackets(see figure, page 2) and lift the cover plate from the unit.
d) DBK204 and DBK204c – Follow step 2b or 2c as applicable to your unit.

3.

Connect the CA-60 cable to the 40-pin header.

4.

Return the system to normal operation.

Reference Note:
There is no direct pin-to-pin correlation between the pins on the header and those on the
DB37 connector. For P3 pinout information refer to chapter 2, System Connections andPinouts.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

938994

DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series, pg. 11

Adding Resistor/Capacitor Filter Networks
WARNING
Disconnect the DBK202, DBK203, DBK203A, DBK204, or DBK204c from power andfrom signal sources prior to installing capacitors or resistors.

CAUTION
Ensure wire strands do not short power supply connections (+15 V, -15 V, +5 V, etc.) to
any terminal potential. Failure to do so could result in damage to DaqBook/2000 Series
devices, DaqBoard/2000 Series boards, or DaqBoard/2000c Series boards.
Do not exceed maximum allowable inputs (as listed in product specifications). There
should never be more than 30 V with reference to analog ground (AGND) or earth
ground.
Do not operate DBK202 on an exposed metal surface.
You must provide strain-relief (lead slack) to all leads leaving DBK202, /203, /203A,/204, or /204c. Use tie-wraps [not included] to secure strain-relief.
Always connect the CHASSIS terminal to earth ground. This will maximize static
protection.
You can install customized RC filter networks to improve the signal-to noise ratio when an unacceptablelevel of noise exists. DBK202, /203, /203A, /204, and /204c include sockets for installing RC filter
networks directly on the board.
The following table contains values that are typical for RC filter network components.

Typical One-Pole Low Pass Filter Values
for DBK202, DBK203, DBK203A, DBK204, and DBK204c

R
Ohms
510
510
510
510
510
510
510
510
470

pg. 12, DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series

C
µF
1
0.47
0.22
0.1
0.047
0.022
0.01
0.00470.0033938994fHertz (-3dB)
312
664
1419
3122
6643
14192
31223
66431
102666f
kHz (-3dB)
0.31
0.66
1.42
3.12
6.64
14.19
31.22
66.43
102.67

DBK Option Cards and Modules

An Example of Customer-Installed Capacitors and Filters for RC Networks on a DBK202
Prior to installing RC components, review the previous WARNING and CAUTION statements; then readover the following information regarding resistors and capacitors.

• Do not use RC filters in conjunction with additional DBK expansion accessories.
• Prior to installing a resistor to the filter network you must drill a 1/16” hole throughthe center pinhole [beneath the board’s silkscreen resistor symbol] as indicated in theabove figure. Failure to do so will short-circuit the resistor.
• Do not drill holes on the board for channels, unless those channels are to receive afilter network (see preceding statement).
• Resistors should be ¼ watt, film-type with up to 5% tolerance. Do not use wirewound resistor types.
• A resistor value of 510 Ω is recommended. Do not exceed 510 Ω.
• Capacitors used are to be of the film dielectric type (e.g., polycarbonate or
NPO ceramic), above 0.001 µF.
• RECOMMENDED: For reduction of both Common Mode Noise and Differential
Mode Noise, use one capacitor between Channel High and AGND; and use a second
capacitor between Channel Low and AGND.
• For reduction of Differential Noise [when no reduction of Common Mode Noise isneeded] position a capacitor across the respective Channel High and Channel Low.
• When in Differential Mode, using capacitors between Channel High, Channel Low,
and AGND may cause a slight degradation of wideband Common Mode rejection.
• When making a RC filter network, always install a wire jumper between the relevant
FILT CAP LO and AGND. FILT CAP LO terminals are located on TB9 and TB10.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

938994

DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series, pg. 13

pg. 14, DBK202, DBK203, and DBK204 Series

938994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK205

P4 to 12-Slot Screw Terminal Adapter
For DaqBoard/2003 and cPCI DaqBoard/2003c
Not Applicable to DaqBook/2000 Series Devices
Overview ….. 1
Connections …… 2

Note:

DBK205 provides a 12-slot screw terminal for DaqBoard/2003 and cPCI DaqBoard/2003c.
This product is not used for LogBook applications.
Reference Notes:
In regard to calculating system power requirements refer to the DBK Basics section.
Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
For a quick comparison of all DBK200 Series boards, refer to the DBK200 Series Matrix. The
matrix is located just before the DBK200 section.
Refer to the DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series User’s Manual(p/n 1033-0901) for information pertaining to those products, as needed.

Overview
DaqBoard/2003 and cPCI DaqBoard/2003c boards communicate [external from the host PC] through a
100-pin P4 connector. The DBK205 provides 12 screw-terminal connections on one terminal block (TB1),
as follows:
•
•
•
•
•

four analog outputs (DAC0, DAC1, DAC2, and DAC3)
one digital ground (DGND)
five analog grounds (AGND)
one external clock (CLK)
one external trigger (XTTL)DBK205
P4 to 12-Slot Screw Terminal Adapter Board
Note: The signal lines on DBK205’s P4 connector correspond with P3-associated pins on the P4
connector of DaqBoard/2003 and cPCI DaqBoard/2003c.
Note: The P1, P2, and P3 connectors discussed in association with DaqBoard/2000 Series and /2000c
Series boards are subset connectors of the 100-pin P4 connector that is located on those boards.
Chapter 3, System Connections and Pinouts, includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK205, pg. 1

Although a 3-foot, 100-conductor ribbon cable (part number CA-195) is typically used toconnect a DaqBoard/2000 Series or /2000c Series board with a P4 adapter, the DBK205
adapter board can connect directly to the DaqBoard’s P4 connector.
Be sure to align the P4 orientation indicators () prior to mating the P4 connectors.

Connections
The DBK205 can be connected directly to the 100-pin P4 connector on the DaqBoard/2003, or /2003c.

CAUTION
Turn off power to the host PC and externally connected equipment prior to connecting
cables or signal lines to the DBK205. Electric shock or damage to equipment can result
even under low-voltage conditions.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle
boards by their edges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure that boards do not come into
contact with foreign elements such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.

Be sure to align the P4 orientation indicators () prior to mating the P4 connectors.

DBK205
Terminations
TB1-1 AGND
TB1-2 DAC0
TB1-3 AGND
TB1-4 DAC1
TB1-5 AGND
TB1-6 DAC2
TB1-7 AGND
TB1-8 DAC3
TB1-9 AGND
TB1-10 XTTL
TB1-11 CLK
TB1-12 DGND

Note: DBK205 connects directly to
DaqBoard/2003’s or /2003c’s
P4 connector.

DBK205 Adapter

DBK205, pg. 2

DaqBoard/2003 Block Diagram

987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK206

P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter Board
For Analog I/O, Digital I/O, & Pulse/Frequency
Overview …… 1
Connections …… 1

Note:

DBK206 provides: P1, P2, and P3 connectors and corresponding screw-terminal blocks
for use with DaqBook/2000 Series Devices, DaqBoard/2000 Series Boards,
and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series Boards.
This product is not used for LogBook applications.
Reference Notes:
In regard to calculating system power requirements refer to the DBK Basics section.
Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
For a quick comparison of all DBK200 Series boards, refer to the DBK200 Series Matrix.
The matrix is located just before the DBK200 section.
Refer to the DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series User’s Manual(p/n 1033-0901) or the DaqBook/2000 Series User’s Manual (p/n 1103-0901)
for information pertaining to those products, as needed.

Overview
DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series boards communicate [external from the host PC]
through a 100-pin P4 connector. The DBK206 provides a P1, P2, and P3 connector and corresponding
screw-terminal blocks. P1 is used for ANALOG I/O, P2 for DIGITAL I/O, and P3 for
PULSE/FREQUENCY (Digital and Counter/Timer) I/O.

DBK206, P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Adapter with Screw-Terminals
Note: The P1, P2, and P3 connectors discussed in association with DaqBook/2000 Series devices
DaqBoard/2000 Series boards and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series boards are subset connectors of the
100-pin P4 connector that is located on those boards. Chapter System Connections and Pinouts,
includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4.

Connections
The DBK206 is suitable for both analog and digital expansion. Signal connection to a DaqBook/2000
Series device, DaqBoard/2000 Series board, or to a cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series board can be made as
follows:•

With cables connected to P1, P2, and P3 connectors, as applicable.

•

With signal wires connected to the appropriate screw-terminal blocks (TB1 through TB12).
Note that the DBK206 board’s silkscreen clearly identifies all screw terminals.

•

With a combination of the above two methods.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK206, pg. 1

Regardless of which method is used, the DBK206 connects to the 100-pin P4 connector of a
DaqBook/2000 Series device, DaqBoard/2000 Series board, or a cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series board. The
connection is made via a CA-195 cable. Note that DBK206 contains mounting holes that allow the board
to be secured inside a user-provided enclosure (not shown).

CAUTION
Turn off power to the host PC and externally connected equipment prior to connecting
cables or signal lines to the DBK. Electric shock or damage to equipment can result
even under low-voltage conditions.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle
boards by their edges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure boards do not come into contact
with foreign elements such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.
Do not confuse connectors. Ensure that you only connect P1 I/Os to P1,P2 I/Os to P2, and P3 I/Os to P3. Improper connection may result in equipment
damage.
The illustrations and actual board silkscreen are the only references you should need to make proper
connections.
A list of connection tips follows:
1.

Ensure power is removed from the device(s) to be connected.

2.

Observe ESD precautions when handling the board and making connections.

3.

Do not make redundant connections. For example, for ANALOG IN you can use the P1(DB37) connector or Terminal Blocks TB9 through TB12. You would not use both sets of
ANALOG IN connectors.

Example of a DBK206 Connected to Analog and Digital DBK Cards
Through P1 and P2, Respectively
Be sure to align the P4 orientation indicators () prior to mating the P4 connectors.

4.
DBK206, pg. 2

The DBK206 100-pin P4 connector connects to the DaqBoard/2000 Series P4 connector via a
CA-195 Cable.
987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

5.

To obtain maximum protection from static, connect the CHASSIS terminal to earth ground.

6.

For connections to DB37 connectors:• P1 connects to an analog DBK card or module’s P1 connector via a CA-37 cable.

7.

DBK Option Cards and Modules•

P2 connects to a Digital DBK card or module’s P2 connector via a CA-37 cable.

•

P3 connects to a Pulse/Frequency DBK card or module’s P3 connector via a CA-37
cable.

In regard to Screw-Terminal Block Connections:•

When tightening terminal block screws, tighten them snug, but do not over-tighten.

•

The DBK206 includes 12 terminal blocks. Each block contains 10 screw-terminal
connectors.

•

The DBK206 silkscreen provides labels for each terminal block (TB1 throughTB12) and for each of the block’s associated screw-terminals.

•

TB9, TB10, TB11, and TB12 are used for ANALOG IN and provide a connection
option to the P1 (DB37) connector.

•

TB5, TB6, TB7, and TB8 are used for DIGITAL I/O and provide a connection
option to the P2 (DB37) connector.

•

TB1, TB2, TB3, and TB4 are used for Pulse/Frequency/Digital I/O and provide aconnection to the P3 (DB37) connector.

•

The following pages correlate the DBK206 terminal block connectors with theassociated pins of the P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors. Note that the
System Connections and Pinouts chapter contains additional pin-outs, and includes
references to the 100-pin P4 connector.

987594

DBK206, pg. 3

Correlation to P1 – TB11, TB10, TB9, and TB12 for Analog I/O.
TB11
TTL TRIG
A/I CLK

P1 Pin Number and Description
25
TTL Trigger, Digital IN, External TTL Trigger Input
20
A/I Clock, External ADC Pacer Clock Input/
Internal ADC Pacer Clock Output
EXP 5
5
Expansion 5. Digital OUT, external GAIN select bit 1
EXP 6
6
Expansion 6. Digital OUT, external GAIN select bit 0
EXP 7
3
Expansion 7. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 3
EXP 8
22
Expansion 8. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 2
EXP 9
4
Expansion 9. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 1
EXP 1023
Expansion 10. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 0
EXP 11
26
Expansion 11. Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH)
AGND*
Analog Common
TB10
P1 Pin Number and Description
SGND
19
Signal Ground, Sense Common
POSREF
9
Positive Reference, Analog +5 V reference
SE15
11
CH 15 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 7 LO IN (Differential Mode)
SE7
30
CH 7 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 7 HI IN (Differential Mode)
SE14
12
CH 14 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 6 LO IN (Differential Mode)
SE6
31
CH 6 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 6 HI IN (Differential Mode)
SE13
13
CH 13 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 5 LO IN (Differential Mode)
SE5
32
CH 5 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 5 HI IN (Differential Mode)
SE12
14
CH 12 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 4 LO IN (Differential Mode)
SE4
33
CH 4 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 4 HI IN (Differential Mode)
TB9
P1 Pin Number and Description
SGND
19
Signal Ground, Sense Common
NEGREF
8
Negative Reference, Analog -5 V reference
SE11
15
CH 11 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 3 LO IN (Differential Mode)
SE3
34
CH 3 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 3 HI IN (Differential Mode)
SE10
16
CH 10 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 2 LO IN (Differential Mode)
SE2
35
CH 2 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 2 HI IN (Differential Mode)
SE917
CH 9 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 1 LO IN (Differential Mode)
SE1
36
CH 1 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 1 HI IN (Differential Mode)
SE818
CH 8 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 0 LO IN (Differential Mode)
SE0
37
CH 0 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 0 HI IN (Differential Mode)
TB12
P1 Pin Number and Description
AGND*
Analog Common
AGND*
Analog Common
AGND*
Analog Common
AGND*
Analog Common
AGND*
Analog Common
AGND*
Analog Common+ 15 V
21
Expansion, +15 V Power- 15 V
2
Expansion, -15 V Power
AGND*
Analog Common+5V
1
Expansion, +5 V Power* Refer to Ground Correlation Tables in the System Connections and Pinouts chapter.

DBK206, pg. 4987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Correlation to P2 – TB5, TB6, TB7, and TB8 for Digital I/O.
TB7
P2 Pin Number and Description
C029
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 0; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 0
C1
28
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 1; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 1
C2
27
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 2; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 2
C3
26
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 3; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 3
C4
25
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 4; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 4
C524
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 5; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 5
C623
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 6; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 6
C7
22
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 7; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 7
DGND*
Digital Common
DGND*
Digital Common
TB8
P2 Pin Number and Description
B7
3
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 7; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 0 Out
B6
4Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 6; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 1 Out
B5
5Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 5; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 2 Out
B4
6Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 4; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 3 Out
B37Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 3; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 4 Out
B2
8Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 2; or P2 Expansion RESET Output
B1
9
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 1; or P2 Expansion WRITE Output
B0
10
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 0; or P2 Expansion READ Output
DGND*
Digital Common
DGND*
Digital Common
TB5
P2 Pin Number and Description
DGND*
Digital Common
DGND*
Digital Common
A730
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 7; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 15
A6
31
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 6; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 14
A532
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 5; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 13
A433
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 4; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 12
A3
34
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 3; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 11
A2
35
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 2; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 10
A1
36
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 1; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 9
A037
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 0; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 8
TB6
P2 Pin Number and Description+5 V
18
Expansion +5 V Power+5 V
20
Expansion +5 V Power
DGND*
Digital Common
DGND*
Digital Common
DGND*
Digital Common
DGND*
Digital Common
DGND*
Digital Common
DGND*
Digital Common
DGND*
Digital Common
DGND*
Digital Common* Refer to Ground Correlation Tables in the System Connections and Pinouts chapter.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK206, pg. 5

Correlation to P3 – TB1, TB2, TB3, and TB4 for Pulse/Frequency/Digital I/O.
TB1
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
DGND
DGND
TB2
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
DGND
+5V
TB4
EXP 2
EXP 3
EXP 4
TMR 0
TMR 1
CNT 3
CNT 2
CNT 1
CNT0
DGND
TB3
DAC0
AGND
DAC2
AGND
DAC1
A/O CLK

P3 Pin Number and Description
29
P3 Digital Port Bit 828
P3 Digital Port Bit 927
P3 Digital Port Bit 10
26
P3 Digital Port Bit 11
25
P3 Digital Port Bit 12
24
P3 Digital Port Bit 13
23
P3 Digital Port Bit 14
22
P3 Digital Port Bit 15*
Digital Common*
Digital Common
P3 Pin Number and Description
10
P3 Digital Port Bit 0
9
P3 Digital Port Bit 1
8
P3 Digital Port Bit 2
7
P3 Digital Port Bit 3
6
P3 Digital Port Bit 4
5
P3 Digital Port Bit 5
4
P3 Digital Port Bit 6
3
P3 Digital Port Bit 7*
Digital Common
20
Expansion, +5 Volt PowerP3 Pin Number and Description
12
Reserved
13
Reserved
14
Reserved
15
P3 Timer 0 Output
16
P3, Timer 1 Output
35
P3 Counter 3 Input
17
P3 Counter 2 Input
36
P3 Counter 1 Input
18
P3 Counter 0 Input*
Digital Common
P3 Pin Number and Description
34
Analog Out; Analog DAC 0 Output*
Analog Common
32
Analog Out; Analog DAC 2 Output*
Analog Common
33
Analog Out; Analog DAC 1 Output
21
Analog Out Clock; External DAC Pacer Clock Input/
Internal DAC Pacer Clock Output
DAC3
31
Analog Out; Analog DAC 3 Output
DGND*
Digital Common+15 V
19
Expansion, + 15 VDC-15 V
37
Expansion, -15 VDC* Refer to Ground Correlation Tables in the System Connections and Pinouts chapter.

DBK206, pg. 6987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK207 and DBK207/CJC

5B Carrier Boards
For 5B-Compatible Analog Input Modules

Overview …… 1
Warnings, Cautions, and Tips ……. 3
Power Considerations …… 4
External Ground Connection …… 4
Channel Configuration …… 5
5B Module Connection …… 5
Terminal Block Connection …… 6
Connecting DBK207 or DBK207/CJC to a Daq Device …… 7
Software Setup …… 7
DBK207 and DBK207/CJC – Specifications …… 8Note:

The DBK207 and DBK207/CJC each provide: (a) two P1 connectors, (b) footprints for sixteen 5B
Modules, (c) 16 terminal blocks. In addition, DBK207/CJC provides Cold Junction Compensation.
The DBK207 and DBK207/CJC each include a 100-pin P4 connector for use with DaqBoard/2000
Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series Boards, and DaqBook/2000 Series devices.
This product is not used for LogBook applications.
Reference Notes:
In regard to calculating system power requirements refer to the DBK Basics section.
For information regarding a related product with a different form-factor, refer to the
DBK44, 2-Channel 5B Signal-Conditioning Card section of this manual.
Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
For a quick comparison of all DBK200 Series boards, refer to the DBK200 Series Matrix.
The matrix is located just before the DBK200 section.
Refer to the DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series User’s Manual(p/n 1033-0901) or the DaqBook/2000 Series User’s Manual (p/n 1103-0901) for information
pertaining to those products, as needed.

Overview
The DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series boards communicate [external from the hostPC] through a 100-pin P4 connector. The P1, P2, and P3 connectors discussed in association with
DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series boards are subset connectors of the 100-pin P4
connector that is located on those boards. Chapter System Connections and Pinouts, includes pinouts for
P1, P2, P3, and P4.

DBK207/CJC Carrier Board for 5B Compatible Modules

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK207 and DBK207/CJC, pg. 1

WARNING
Ensure that hard-wire emergency over-ride circuitry exists for all applications thatmake use of dangerous switch-loads. Do not operate such switch-loads unlessemergency over-ride circuitry is present.
The DBK207 and DBK207/CJC are carrier boards for 5B-compatible analog input modules. These options
each include two P1 connectors for analog expansion, a 5 VDC power terminal, and 16 signal terminal
blocks. DBK207 and DBK207/CJC are typically installed in NEMA-type panels; however, they may beinstalled on DIN rails. Separate mounting instructions are included with Rack Mount Kit (part no.
Rack-DBK-3) and with DIN-rail Mount Kit (part no. DIN-DBK-1).
DBK207 and DBK207/CJC allow Daq-based acquisition systems to use various combinations of sixteen
5B signal-conditioning modules. 5B modules can accommodate a variety of signals, including low-level
thermocouple and strain-gage signals. Configuration options are flexible. You can select the type of signal
attached to each channel. One Daq device can support up to 16 DBK207 [or DBK207/CJC] boards,
providing a maximum of 256 isolated, analog input channels. Note that Daq devices scan the channels at
the same 10 µs/channel rate as other DBKs (256 scans in 2.56 ms in a full system).
Each user-installed 5B module offers 500 V isolation from the system and between channels. Both
DBK207 and DBK207/CJC include 16 screw-terminal blocks for signal inputs. In addition, theDBK207/CJC includes cold junction compensators (CJCs) for use with thermocouple 5B modules.
Sockets are provided for user-installed AC1362 current-sense resistor modules, as discussed in
5B Module Connection on page 5 of this section.

Note 1: CJC is applicable to DBK207/CJC.
CJC does not apply to DBK207.
Note 2: Current requirement is dependent
upon the 5B modules used as
discussed in Power Considerations.
Note 3: JP2 provides a means of obtaining
an external earth ground. See Power
Considerations for details.

DBK207 and DBK207/CJC Block Diagram

DBK207 and DBK207/CJC, pg. 2987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Warnings, Cautions, and Tips
WARNING
Ensure that hard-wire emergency over-ride circuitry exists for all applications thatmake use of dangerous switch-loads. Do not operate such switch-loads unlessemergency over-ride circuitry is present.

CAUTION
Turn off power to the host PC and externally connected equipment prior to connecting
cables or signal lines to the DBK. Electric shock or damage to equipment can result
even under low-voltage conditions.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle
boards by their edges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure boards do not come into contact
with foreign elements such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.
Do not confuse connectors. Ensure that you only connect P1 I/Os to P1,P2 I/Os to P2, and P3 I/Os to P3. Improper connection may result in equipment
damage.
1.

Ensure that hard-wire emergency over-ride circuity exists for all applications that make use of
dangerous switch-loads. Do not operate such switch-loads unless emergency over-ride circuitry ispresent.

2.

Provide raceways (protective wiring routes) for all external I/O wiring.

3.

Keep external I/O wiring away from ribbon cables.

4.

Keep external I/O wiring away from low-voltage signal wiring.

5.

Provide appropriate strain-relief and physical restraint to ensure that the wiring is held securely in theintended position, and without strain.

6.

Ensure that all wiring with >50V potential is identified by the appropriate color codes and thatwarning labels are clearly visible.

7.

Provide physical protection for the interface board. The level of protection is dependent upon theboard’s operating environment.

Partial DBK207/CJC

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK207 and DBK207/CJC, pg. 3

Power
The DBK207 and DBK207/CJC require +5 VDC from a regulated DC power supply. External power
attaches to the DBK207 [DBK207/CJC] via on-board screw terminal connections.

Power Requirements:
Voltage: +5 V regulated DC
Current: Dependent upon 5B Models used.
• SC-5B38 series modules each require 200 mA.
• SC-5B43 series modules require up to 200 mA.
• All other analog input 5B modules require 30 mA, unless otherwise specified.

On-Board Power Connections for +5 Volts

CAUTION
External power supplied to DBK207 or DBK207/CJC must not exceed +5 VDC.
Neither DBK207 nor DBK207/CJC regulate the external power input.

External Ground Connection
For optimum 5B module operation, the 5B must have one [and only one] earth ground. Accordingly, theDBK207 [DBK207/CJC] must be configured to provide its earth ground, if such a ground is not present on
the power supply.

JP2 Shown in OPEN Default
If the 5 VDC power supply provides output that is isolated from earth ground, then the jumper on JP2
should be placed in the CONN position. This will tie the 5V return on the power supply to the DBK207[DBK207/CJC] ground system.
If the 5 VDC power supply is already referenced to earth ground, then the JP2 jumper should be placed toOPEN. This will prevent multiple earth ground connections and the resultant ground loop. Note that theOPEN position is JP2’s default setting.

DBK207 and DBK207/CJC, pg. 4987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Channel Configuration
Up to 16 DBK207 [DBK207/CJC] boards can be connected to a Daq-based acquisition
system. Since this is a daisy-chain interface, each module must appear unique and use a
different analog input channel to the Daq device. To configure the board’s channel, youmust set the JP1 jumper to your chosen channel as follows.
1.

Locate the 16×2-pin header (labeled JP1). Note the 16 jumper locations labeled
CH0 through CH15 to match the Daq device’s main channel.

2.

Place the JP1 jumper on the channel you wish to use. Only one jumper is used per
board.

5B Module Connection
DBK207 and DBK207/CJC analog input is processed through user-installed 5B signal-conditioning
modules. Different 5B modules are used with different transducer and signal sources. To install themodules:
1.

Remove all power from the DBK207 [DBK207/CJC].

2.

Match the footprint of the module with the footprint on the printed circuit board.

3.

Gently place the module into the footprint, and screw it down.

4.

Record the channel the module was placed in.

When installing current input modules (SC-5B32 series), be sure to install the currentsense resistor (SC-AC-1362 shipped with the SC-5B32) in the resistor socket near the
input screw-terminal block for the desired channel.

AC1362 Current Sense Resistor Install Location

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK207 and DBK207/CJC, pg. 5

Terminal Block Connection
WARNING
Shock Hazard. De-energize circuits connected to the DBK207, or DBK207/CJC beforechanging the wiring or configuration. Dangerous voltages may be present.

Input signals (and excitation leads) are wired to DBK207 [DBK207/CJC] via 16 four-contact terminal
blocks that connect to corresponding 5B modules. The following figures depict various connection
scenarios.

Connection Scenarios for 5B Modules
DBK207 and DBK207/CJC, pg. 6987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Connecting DBK207 or DBK207/CJC to a Daq Device
DBK207 and DBK207/CJC can be connected to the P4 connector of a DaqBook/2000 Series device or a
DaqBoard/2000 Series board via a CA-195 cable or can be connected through the P1 connector of an
applicable DBK200 series adapter board via CA-37-1 accessory ribbon cables.

Software Setup
Reference Notes:oDaqView users - Refer to chapter 3, DBK Setup in DaqView.
o
LogView users - Not Applicable.

DaqView software versions preceding 7.7 do not provide complete software support
for the DBK207 or the DBK207/CJC carrier boards. If your version of DaqView
precedes version 7.7, you must uninstall it, then install a more recent version of
DaqView.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK207 and DBK207/CJC, pg. 7

DBK207 and DBK207/CJC – Specifications
Name/Function:
DBK207 – Carrier Board for 5B-Compatible Analog Input Modules
DBK207/CJC – Carrier Board (with Cold Junction Compensation) for
5B-Compatible Analog Input Modules
Module Capacity: 16, input only, 5B modules
Cable (optional): CA-37-×
DC Input Fuse: 3A, reset type
Power Requirement: 5 VDC, regulated.
Operating Environment:
Temperature: 0°C to 70°C
Relative Humidity: 95% RH, non-condensing
Connectors:
P4 – 100-pin connector provides for connection to DaqBook/2000 Series device,
DaqBoard/2000 Series board and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series
P4 connector via a CA-195 cable.
P1 – Two P1 (DB37) connectors provide for analog expansion via CA-37-x cable.
Screw Terminals – 16 sets of 4-connector blocks provide wire connection for+E, -E, +, and -.
Isolation (DC or AC Peak):
Signal Inputs to Daq Device: 500 V
Input Channel-to-Channel: 500 V
CJC: Cold Junction Compensation, applicable to DBK207/CJC.
Not Applicable to DBK207.

DBK207 and DBK207/CJC, pg. 8987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK208

Relay Carrier Board
For Opto-22 Compatible Solid-State-Relays
Overview …… 1
Warnings, Cautions, and Tips …… 3
Power …… 4
External Power Watchdog …… 5
Operation …… 5
Software Setup …… 7
DBK208 – Specifications …… 9Note:

The DBK208 provides: (a) two P2 connectors, (b) footprints for sixteen optically-isolated SolidState-Relay (SSR) Modules, and (c) 16 dual-screw terminal blocks. DBK208 includes a 100-pin P4
connector for use with DaqBook/2000 Series Devices, DaqBoard/2000 Series Boards, and /2000c
Series Boards.
This product is not used with:
LogBook
DaqBook/100 Series devices
DaqBoard/100 (ISA-type) Series devices
Reference Notes:
In regard to calculating system power requirements refer to the DBK Basics section.
Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
For a quick comparison of all DBK200 Series boards, refer to the DBK200 Series Matrix.
The matrix is located just before this DBK200 section.
Refer to the DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series User’s Manual(p/n 1033-0901) or the DaqBook/2000 Series User’s Manual (p/n 1103-0901) for information
pertaining to those products, as needed.

Overview

DBK208 Carrier Board for Opto-22 Compatible Solid-State-Relays
DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series boards communicate [external from the host PC]
through a 100-pin P4 connector. The P1, P2, and P3 connectors discussed in association with these boards
are subset connectors of the 100-pin P4 connector. Chapter System Connections and Pinouts, includes
pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4.
The information included in this section, when combined with that found in the related DBK option cards
and modules subsections should enable you to set up your desired configuration.
DBK208 is a two-bank carrier board for optically-isolated Solid-State-Relay (SSR) modules. Each banksupports up to eight digital I/O modules. The banks can be independently set as “input” or “output” via
jumpers (JP0 for Bank 0, and JP1 for Bank 1). The I/O modules are industry standard Opto-22 compatible,
5-volt logic level modules.
DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK208, pg. 1

WARNING
Ensure that hard-wire emergency over-ride circuitry exists for all applications thatmake use of dangerous switch-loads. Do not operate such switch-loads unlessemergency over-ride circuitry is present.
Note 1: DBK208 is not used with DaqBoard/2003.
Note 2: DBK208 can be used with DaqBook/200 and Daqboard/200 (ISA-type) series devices;
but should not be used with DaqBook/100 or DaqBoard/100 (ISA-type) series devices.

DBK208 Block Diagram
DBK208 boards are typically installed in NEMA-type panels; however, they may alternatively be installedon DIN rails. Separate mounting instructions are included with Rack Mount Kit (part no. Rack-DBK-3)
and with DIN-rail Mount Kit (part no. DIN-DBK-1).
DBK208 is controlled digitally from the Daq device (DaqBook or DaqBoard) through one of twoconnectors, as follows:
DaqBook/200 Series Devices – control is through the 37-pin P2 digital port of the DaqBook and one of two DBK208
P2 connectors.
DaqBoard/200 Series boards [ISA-type] - control is through the 37-pin P2 digital port of the DaqBoard and one of
the DBK208 P2 connectors.
DaqBook/2000 Series Devices, DaqBoard/2000 Series boards, and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series boards – control
originates in the board’s 100-pin P4 connector. Connection of these boards to DBK208 can be made directly or
indirectly as follows:

DBK208, pg. 2•

Direct connection can be made from the 2000 series board’s 100-pin P4 connector to a DBK208’s P4
connector via a CA-195 cable.

•

Indirect connection can be made using one of the DBK200 Series P4-adapters that includes a 37-pin P2
connector (DBK201, DBK202, DBK203, DBK204, DBK206, DBK209, or another DBK208). CA-37
cables are used to connect from P2 to P2.

987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Note that a single Daq-based data acquisition system can support up to 16 DBK208 boards, providing a
total of 256 channels. DBK208 boards contain two DB37 P2 connectors for the purpose of daisy-chaining
to other DBK208s or to other P2-supported devices.
The following illustration is an example of a Data Acquisition System that includes two DBK208 boardsfor digital I/O. The two DBK208 boards are daisy-chained to a DBK209 P2 connector. The DBK209 isconnected to a DaqBoard/2000 Series board via a CA-195 cable.

Warnings, Cautions, and Tips
WARNING
Ensure that hard-wire emergency over-ride circuitry exists for all applications thatmake use of dangerous switch-loads. Do not operate such switch-loads unlessemergency over-ride circuitry is present.

CAUTION
Turn off power to the host PC and externally connected equipment prior to connecting
cables or signal lines to the DBK. Electric shock or damage to equipment can result
even under low-voltage conditions.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle
boards by their edges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure boards do not come into contact
with foreign elements such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.
Do not confuse connectors. Ensure that you only connect P1 I/Os to P1,P2 I/Os to P2, and P3 I/Os to P3. Improper connection may result in equipment
damage.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK208, pg. 3

1.

Provide raceways (protective wiring routes) for all external I/O wiring.

2.

Keep external I/O wiring away from ribbon cables.

3.

Keep external I/O wiring away from low-voltage signal wiring.

4.

Provide appropriate strain-relief and physical restraint to ensure that the wiring is held securely in theintended position, and without strain.

5.

Ensure that all wiring with >50V potential is identified by the appropriate color codes and thatwarning labels are clearly visible.

6.

Provide physical protection for the I/O interface board. The level of protection is dependent upon theboard’s operating environment.

Partial DBK208

PowerThe DBK208 requires an external isolated 5 volt DC supply
with at least 0.25 amp current capacity. External power attaches
to the DBK208 via on-board screw terminal connections. The
board contains capacitors to filter input noise from the power
supply.
Over-current protection is provided by an on-board 0.5 amp
reset fuse in series with the 5 volt supply. Protection fromover-voltage and reverse polarity power conditions is provided
by a 6.8V zener diode.

DBK208, pg. 4987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

External Power Watchdog
The External Power Watchdog is governed by the setting of the JP2 jumper. This jumper allows the user
to determine the behavior of the digital output latches in the event of a loss and recovery of the external
power supply.
With the jumper in the ENABLE position, the loss of external power will cause the output latches to bereset into a high-impedance condition. Even with a recovery of the external power, all output modules will
be disabled until a write is done to the data bus. This setting is useful in an application that requires a
serial enabling of output loads.
With the jumper in the DISABLE position, the loss of external power will have no effect on the state orcontinued control of the output latches. That is, data that is written to the output modules will continue tobe latches as normal. A recovery of the external power would then cause the output modules to reflect thecurrent state of the output latches. This setting is useful in the case where the operator halts the transfer ofdata and turns off the external power on purpose and then wants the system to assume the same state uponrecovery of the external power.
The setting of the JP2 jumper has no effect on input modules with regards to external power. While a lossof external power will result in corruption of the data being read, the data bus will be valid again
immediately upon the recovery of the external power. The default setting of the JP2 jumper is the
ENABLE position.

Operation
The DBK208 P2 expansion protocol makes use of a 4-bit dip switch (S1) to configure the board’s
addresses. Addresses are seen as XXXX + 0 for Bank 0’s set of eight modules and as XXXX + 1 for Bank
1’s set of eight modules, where the four Xs represent the DIP switch settings of 16 8 4 and 2. With all
four S1 micro-switches OFF (open), the first system board (designate as “0”) has Bank 0 registered as 0
and Bank 1 registered as 1. With S1’s micro-switch “2” closed, we would see Bank 0 registered as 2 andBank 1 registered as 3. The following table portrays the addressing scheme and includes DaqView
designations.
The following breakdown is provided to indicate the relationship of DaqView channels to DBK208 boards
and banks. More detailed information follows.

Simplified Channel-to-DBK208 Relationship

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK208, pg. 5

DBK208
Board #

Switch S1 Configurations

Address

Designation in DaqView(see notes 2 & 3)

16

8

4

2

Bank 0Bank 1

Expanded Digital I/O in
Async Digital I/O window

0

OFF

OFF

OFF

OFF

0

1

P2 0-A

P2 0-B

1

OFF

OFF

OFF

ON

2

3

P2 0-CP2 0-D

2

OFF

OFF

ON

OFF

4

5

P2 1-AP2 1-B

3

OFF

OFF

ON

ON

6

7

P2 1-CP2 1-D

4

OFF

ON

OFF

OFF

8

9

P2 2-AP2 2-B

5

OFF

ON

OFF

ON

10

11

P2 2-CP2 2-D

6

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

12

13

P2 3-A

P2 3-B

7

OFF

ON

ON

ON

14

15

P2 3-CP2 3-D

8

ON

OFF

OFF

OFF

16

17

P2 4-A

P2 4-B

9

ON

OFF

OFF

ON

18

19

P2 4-CP2 4-D

10

ON

OFF

ON

OFF

20

21

P2 5-A

P2 5-B

11

ON

OFF

ON

ON

22

23

P2 5-CP2 5-D

12

ON

ON

OFF

OFF

24

25

P2 6-A

P2 6-B

13

ON

ON

OFF

ON

26

27

P2 6-CP2 6-D

14

ON

ON

ON

OFF

28

29

P2 7-A

P2 7-B

15

ON

ON

ON

ON

30

31

P2 7-CP2 7-D

Channel

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

Notes: (1) Switch S1 settings are made physically on the DBK208 boards and are checked in DaqView (see thefollowing screen capture). The software aspect is detailed on the following page.
(2) The Digital Option Cards External Connection section of DaqView’s Configure System Hardware
window lists 8 channels (0 through 7) as shown in the following screen image.
(3) Each of the 8 channels can represent 2 DBK208 boards. For example, as seen in the table, System Board
0 and System Board 1 would both show up in DaqView’s channel 0.
(4) In the Async Digital I/O window, each active channel (representing 2 boards) has divisions of A, B, C,
and D. A represents Bank 0 of the first board. B represents Bank 1 of the first board.
C represents Bank 0 of the second board. D represents Bank 1 of the second board.

(5) Banks are selected to be “Input” or “Output” via jumpers. Jumper JP0 applies to Bank 0, JP1 applies toBank 1.

Logic outputs provide signals for clocking data to registers for the Opto-22 SSR type modules. On-board
jumpers (JP0 and JP1) are used to set the banks for “input” or “output.” The banks can be set
independently, however, all modules within a bank will have the same setting. For example, JP0 could be
set to “Input,” configuring all 8 modules of Bank 0 to Input; and JP1 could be set to “Output,” configuring
all Bank 1 modules to “Output.”
Each Opto-22 module has a 2-connector terminal block for signal connections.

DBK208, pg. 6987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Software Setup
Note: DBK208 is not applicable to LogBook or LogView.

To use DBK208 from within DaqView, you must first configure the DaqView software to match the
hardware setup.

1.

From DaqView’s main window, select the Device pull-down menu.

2.

Select Configure Hardware Settings.
The Digital Option Cards External Connection section of DaqView’s Configure System Hardware
window lists 8 channels (0 through 7) as shown in the following screen image.

3. Under Digital Option cards (on right side of screen), select DBK208. A DBK208 Configuration
Settings window will appear. The window includes a “Switch Settings” section (see following figure).
4.

Select the S1 switch settings that apply to your configuration. In the above screen example
DaqView’s Digital Channel 0 consists of two boards. Note that no more than two DBK208 boards are
permitted per DaqView Channel. Both S1 check boxes are selected when two boards are used in achannel.

5.

Check (or uncheck) JP-0 and JP-1 to match your hardware. A checked jumper indicates that theassociated bank is digital Input. An unchecked jumper indicates Output. The first board in thechannel has its banks designated as P2 0-A and P2 0-B. The second board’s banks are designated as
P2 0-C and P2 0-D.
6. After S1, JP-0, and JP-1 settings are complete, click the OK button.
7. Select the Digital I/O icon from DaqView’s main window toolbar. The Async Digital I/O window willappear.
With the P2 Digital I/O tab selected in the Async Digital I/O window, each active channel(representing 2 boards) has divisions of A, B, C, and D.

DBK Option Cards and Modules•“A” represents the 8-bit Bank 0 of the first board.

•“B” represents the 8-bit Bank 1 of the first board.

•“C” represents the 8-bit Bank 0 of the second board.

•“D” represents the 8-bit Bank 1 of the second board.

987594

DBK208, pg. 7

Switch Settings

For Digital Output

The switch settings must
agree with those on theactual DBK208 board.
Refer to pages 5 and 6 ofthis section for configuration details.

Ensure the JP0 and JP1
boxes are checked for eachport configured as Digital
Output.

For Digital Input

Ensure the JP0 and JP1
boxes are not checked foreach port configured as
Digital Input.

Configure System Hardware and DBK208 Configuration Settings Windows

Async Digital I/O Window – P2 Digital I/O Tab Selected
In the above screen shot of the Digital I/O Window, channel 0 represents two DBK208 boards. The
first board consists of banks A and B, the second board consists of banks C and D. In this example all
four banks are seen as Input. The input determination was made by the physical positions of hardware
jumpers (JP0 and JP1) and software selections for JP-0 and JP-1, i.e., that for Digital Input they were
not checked.
Note: When Output is selected, hexadecimal values must be entered in the “O” block for theapplicable bank.
8.

DBK208, pg. 8

Upon completion of the configuration click the Execute button.

987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK208 – Specifications
Name/Function: Carrier Board for Opto-22 Compatible Solid-State-Relays
Module Capacity: 16, Opto-22 Solid-State-Relays
Cable (optional): CA-37-×
DC Input Fuse: 0.5A, re-set type
Power Requirement: 5 VDC, regulated. 0.25 amp minimum.
Operating Environment:
Temperature: 0°C to 70°C
Relative Humidity: 95% RH, non-condensing
Connectors:
P4 – 100-pin connector provides for connection to a DaqBook/2000 Series device’s,
DaqBoard/2000 Series board’s or cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series board’s
P4 connector via a CA-195 cable.
P2 – Two P2 (DB37) connectors provide for digital expansion via CA-37-x cable.
Screw Terminals – 16 sets of 2-connector blocks for I/O signals.
Isolation:
Channel-to-System: 500 V
Channel-to-Channel: 500 V

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK208, pg. 9

DBK208, pg. 10987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK209

P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Mini-Adapter Board
For Analog I/O, Digital I/O, & Pulse/Frequency
Overview …… 1
Connections …… 2
DBK209 Dimensional Drawing …… 3

Note:

DBK209 connects to a P4 connector via cable and provides P1, P2, and P3 connectors.
This product is not used for LogBook applications.
Reference Notes:
In regard to calculating system power requirements
refer to the DBK Basics section.
Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4.
Refer to pinouts applicable to your system, as needed.
For a quick comparison of all DBK200 Series boards,
refer to the DBK200 Series Matrix. The matrix islocated just before the DBK200 section.
Refer to the DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI
DaqBoard/2000c Series User’s Manual(p/n 1033-0901) or the DaqBook/2000 Series User’s
Manual (p/n 1103-0901) for information pertaining tothose products, as needed.

DBK209
P4-to-P1/P2/P3 Mini-adapter Board

Overview
DaqBoard/2000 Series and /2000c Series Boards communicate [external from the host PC] through a
100-pin P4 connector. Typically a DBK200 Series P4-adapter is used to provide one or more DB37
connectors (P1, P2, P3). The DBK200 Series also includes a few panel-mount card options that connect
directly to the P4 connector via a cable.
The DBK209 is a mini-adapter board suitable for both analog and digital expansion. The board provides
three DB37 connectors (P1, P2, and P3). DBK209 connects to DaqBook/2000 Series Device,
DaqBoard/2000 Series Board or /2000c Series Board P4 connector via a CA-195 cable.
Other than the form factor, DBK209 is identical to DBK201.
Note: The P1, P2, and P3 connectors discussed in association with DaqBook/2000 Series devices,
DaqBoard/2000 Series boards and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series boards are subset connectors of the
100-pin P4 connector that is located on those boards. Chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts,
includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

909094

DBK209, pg. 1

Connections
CAUTION
Turn off power to the host PC and externally connected equipment prior to connecting
cables or signal lines to the DBK. Electric shock or damage to equipment can result
even under low-voltage conditions.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle
boards by their edges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure boards do not come into
contact with foreign elements such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.
Do not confuse connectors. Ensure that you only connect P1 I/Os to P1, P2 I/Os to P2,
and P3 I/Os to P3. Improper connection may result in equipment damage.
Be sure to align the P4 orientation indicators () prior to mating the P4 connectors.

The following illustration and the actual board silkscreen are the only references you should need to makeproper connections.

Using a DBK209 to Connect an Analog and a Digital DBK Card to DaqBoard/2000

DBK209, pg. 2909094

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Connection tips:•

Ensure power is removed from the device(s) to be connected.

•

Observe ESD precautions when handling boards and making connections.

•P1 is used for ANALOG I/O.

•

P2 is used for DIGITAL I/O.

•

P3 is used for Pulse/Frequency (Digital and Counter/Timer) I/O.

•

P4 (100-pin connector) connects to the DaqBook/2000 Series device’s,
DaqBoard/2000 Series board’s, or cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series board’s P4 connector via a
CA-195 Cable.

DBK209 Dimensional Drawing

DBK Option Cards and Modules

909094

DBK209, pg. 3

DBK209, pg. 4909094

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK21032 Channel Digital I/O Carrier Board
for GrayhillTM 70M-Series Mini-Modules
Overview …… 1
Warnings, Cautions, and Tips …… 4
Power …… 5External Power Watchdog …… 5
Setting Module Banks to Input or Output …… 5
Setting the Local Address …… 6
Software Setup …… 7
Specifications …… 10

Note:

The DBK210 provides: (a) two P2 connectors, (b) one P1 connector, (c) footprints for 32 opticallyisolated Grayhill 70M-Series mini-modules, (d) a 100-pin P4 connector for use with DaqBook/2000
Series Devices and DaqBoard/2000 Series Boards, and (e) 4 removable screw terminal blocks. Eachblock supports 8 mini-modules.
This product is not used with:
LogBook
DaqBook/100 Series devices
DaqBoard/100 (ISA-type) Series devices
Reference Notes:
Refer to the DBK Basics section of this manual in regard to calculating system power
requirements.
Chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts, includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4
connectors.
Refer to the pinouts that are applicable to your system, as needed.
For a quick comparison of all DBK200 Series boards, refer to the DBK200 Series Matrix.
The matrix is located just before the DBK200 section of this manual.
Refer to the DaqBoard/2000 Series and cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series User’s Manual(p/n 1033-0901) or the DaqBook/2000 Series User’s Manual (p/n 1103-0901) for information
pertaining to those products, as needed.

Overview

DBK210 Carrier Board for Grayhill 70M-Series Mini-Modules
The information included in this section, when combined with that found in related DBK sections, should
enable you to set up your desired configuration.
It is important to note that the DaqBoard/2000 Series boards communicate [external from the host PC]
through a 100-pin P4 connector. The P1, P2, and P3 connectors discussed in association with these boards
are subset connectors of the 100-pin P4 connector. DaqBook/2000 Series devices have both a P4
connector and a set of P1, P2, and P3 connectors on the unit. The System Connections and Pinouts chapter
includes pinouts for both types of devices, i.e., DaqBoards and DaqBooks.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK210, pg. 1

DBK210 is a four-bank carrier board for optically-isolated Grayhill 70M-Series mini-modules. Each banksupports up to eight digital I/O modules. Each bank can be independently set to input or output. The
settings are made via micro-switches on S1 (see next two figures). The Grayhill 70M-Series I/O modules
are industry standard, 5-volt logic level modules.

WARNING
Ensure that hard-wire emergency over-ride circuitry exists for all applications thatmake use of dangerous switch-loads. Do not operate such switch-loads unlessemergency over-ride circuitry is present.
Note 1: DBK210 is not used with DaqBoard/2003.
Note 2: DBK210 can be used with DaqBook/200 series and Daqboard/200 series devices;
but should not be used with DaqBook/100 series or DaqBoard/100 series devices.

DBK210 Block Diagram

S1 DetailThe S1 settings for the Banks and the Local Addresses must match the associated settingsin DaqView. This is explained in the Software Setup section, which begins on page 7.

Note: S1 functionality is explained in the following three sections: External Power Watchdog (pg. 5),
Setting Module Banks to Input or Output (pg. 5), and Setting the Local Addresses (pg. 6).
DBK210, pg. 2987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK210 boards are typically installed in NEMA-type panels; however, they can be installed on DIN rails.
Separate mounting instructions are included with Rack Mount Kit (part no. Rack-DBK-3) and with DINrail Mount Kit (part no. DIN-DBK-1).
DBK210 is controlled digitally from the Daq device (DaqBook or DaqBoard) as follows:
DaqBook/200 Series Devices – control is through the 37-pin P2 digital port of the DaqBook and one of
two DBK210 P2 connectors.
DaqBoard/200 Series boards [ISA-type] - control is through the 37-pin P2 digital port of the DaqBoardand one of the DBK210 P2 connectors.
DaqBook/2000 Series Devices – control is achieved by either of the following two methods, but not bothat once:•

Connect a CA-37-x cable to the P2 connector on the DaqBook/2000 Series device; thenconnect the free end of the cable to one of the two P2 connectors on the DBK210.

•

Connect a CA-195 cable to the P4 connector on the DaqBook/2000 Series device; thenconnect the free end of the cable to the P4 connector on the DBK210.

DaqBoard/2000 Series boards – control is through the board’s 100-pin P4 connector. Connection ofthese boards to DBK210 can be made directly or indirectly as follows:•

Direct connection can be made from a /2000 Series board’s 100-pin P4 connector to a
DBK210’s P4 connector via a CA-195 cable.

•

Indirect connection can be made using one of the DBK200 Series P4-adapters that includes a
37-pin P2 connector (DBK201, DBK202, DBK203, DBK204, DBK206, DBK209, or another
DBK210). CA-37 cables are used to connect from the P2 connector of the adapter device tothe P2 of the DBK210.

A single Daq-based data acquisition system can support up to 8 DBK210 boards, providing a total of 256
channels. The following figure represents a 64 channel digital I/O system using two DBK210s.
DBK210 boards contain three DB37 connectors, as follows: two P2 connectors for daisy-chaining to other
DBK210s or to other P2-supported devices; one P1 connector for convenient access to the analog input
channels of a 2000 Series DaqBook or a 2000 Series DaqBoard.

DBK210 System in a NEMA Enclosure
In the above figure, the upper DBK210 is connected to a DaqBoard/2000 Series board that has been
installed in an industrial PC. The connection is made from the P4 connector on the installed DaqBoard to
the P4 connector on one of the two DBK210 boards. A 100-conductor CA-195 ribbon cable is used. The
two DBK210s are daisy-chained from a P2 connector on one board to a P2 connector on the other. Eachboard has a P1 connector making it possible for analog expansion.
DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK210, pg. 3

Warnings, Cautions, and Tips
WARNING
Ensure that hard-wire emergency over-ride circuitry exists for all applications thatmake use of dangerous switch-loads. Do not operate such switch-loads unlessemergency over-ride circuitry is present.

CAUTION
Turn off power to the host PC and externally connected equipment prior to connecting
cables or signal lines to the DBK. Electric shock or damage to equipment can result
even under low-voltage conditions.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle
boards by their edges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure boards do not come into
contact with foreign elements such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.
Do not confuse connectors. Ensure that you only connect P1 I/Os to P1,P2 I/Os to P2, and P3 I/Os to P3. Improper connection may result in equipment
damage.

1.

Provide raceways (protective wiring routes) for all external I/O wiring.

2.

Keep external I/O wiring away from ribbon cables.

3.

Keep external I/O wiring away from low-voltage signal wiring.

4.

Provide appropriate strain-relief and physical restraint to ensure that the wiring is held securely in theintended position, and without strain.

5.

Ensure that all wiring with >50V potential is identified by the appropriate color codes and thatwarning labels are clearly visible.

6.

Provide physical protection for the I/O interface board. The level of protection is dependent upon theboard’s operating environment.
Status LED
P1 Connector for
Analog Expansion(DB37)

Grayhill Min-ModuleP4 100-pin
Connector
P2 Connectors for
Digital Expansion(DB37)

Terminal Block

Power Terminal (5VDC)

Switch S1

Chassis Ground

Partial DBK210

DBK210, pg. 4987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Power
The DBK210 requires an external isolated 5 volt DC power
supply with at least 0.600 amp current capacity. External power
attaches to the DBK210 via on-board screw terminal connections.
The board contains capacitors to filter input noise from the power
supply.
Over-current protection is provided by an on-board 3.0 amp
resettable fuse (F32), which is in series with the 5 volt supply.
Protection from over-voltage and reverse polarity power
conditions is provided by a 6.8V zener diode (D32).

Connecting an External 5 VDC Supply

Set via S1, Switch 1

External Power Watchdog
The External Power Watchdog is governed by the position of
micro-switch 1 on switch S1. The feature allows the user to set
the desired behavior of the digital output latches in the event of aloss and recovery of the external power supply.
With micro-switch 1 in the Enable position, a loss of external
power will cause the output latches to be reset into a highimpedance condition. Even with a recovery of the external
power, all output modules will be disabled until a write is done tothe data bus. This setting is useful in an application that requires
a serial enabling of output loads.

With micro-switch 1 in the Disable position, a loss of external power will have no effect on the state orcontinued control of the output latches. That is, data that is written to the output modules will continue tobe latched as normal. A recovery of the external power would then cause the output modules to reflect thecurrent state of the output latches. This setting is useful in the case where the operator halts the transfer ofdata and turns off the external power on purpose and then wants the system to assume the same state uponrecovery of the external power.
The position of micro-switch 1 has no effect on input modules in regard to external power. While a loss ofexternal power will result in corruption of the data being read, the data bus will be valid again immediately
upon the recovery of the external power.

Setting Module Banks to Input or Output

Set via S1, Switches 2, 3, 4, & 5

Four of the S1 micro-switches (2, 3, 4, and 5) are used to individually set the digital I/O module banks to
input or output mode. The following table indicates the associations between the micro-switches, banks,and channels.
MicroSwitch

AffectedBank

Affected
Channels2

D

24 thru 31

3C

16 thru 23

4B

8 thru 15

5A

0 thru 7

All eight channels for a given bank must be of the same type, i.e., digital input or digital output. However,the banks themselves can be set to input or output, regardless of how the other banks are set. For example,
Bank A could be set to digital input and banks B, C, and D could be set to digital output.
The S1 settings for the Banks must match the associated settings in DaqView.
This is explained in the Software Setup section, which begins on page 7.
DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK210, pg. 5

Set via S1, Switches 6, 7, & 8

Setting the Local Address

Up to eight DBK210 boards can be used in a single Daq system. However, each board contains four
module banks and each bank must have a unique address. This is accomplished with three micro-switches(6, 7, and 8) on switch S1 and a fixed set of two digits for each bank.
To illustrate, addresses are seen as follows where XXX represents a binary format; e.g., 000; 001, etc as
determined by micro-switches 6, 7, and 8, since each can independently be set to “0”or to “1.”Bank A, Channels 0 through 7: XXX 00
Bank B, Channels 8 through 15: XXX01
Bank C, Channels 16 through 23: XXX10
Bank D, Channels 24 through 32: XXX11

Assuming we were using three DBK210 boards, for a total of 96 channels, we could use the following
address scheme:
1st DBK210 board, micro-switch 6 set to 0, 7 set to 0, and 8 set to 0, resulting in 000.
2nd DBK210 board, micro-switch 6 set to 0, 7 set to 0, and 8 set to 1, resulting in 001.
3rd DBK210 Board, micro-switch 6 set to 0, 7 set to 1, and 8 set to 0, resulting in 010.
In this example the three boards would have addressing as follows:
DBK210, 1st Board

DBK210, 2nd Board

DBK210, 3rd Board

Bank/Chs

Address

Bank/Chs

Address

Bank/Chs

Address

Bank A
Chs 0 thru 7

00000

Bank A
Chs 0 thru 7(32 thru 39)

00100

Bank A
Chs 0 thru 7(64 thru 71)

01000

Bank BChs 8 thru 15

00001

Bank BChs 8 thru 15(40 thru 47)

00101

Bank BChs 8 thru 15(72 thru 79)

01001

Bank CChs 16 thru 23

00010

Bank CChs 16 thru 23(48 thru 55)

00110

Bank CChs 16 thru 23(80 thru 87)

01010

Bank DChs 24 thru 31

00011

Bank DChs 24thru31(56 thru 63)

00111

Bank DChs 24 thru 31(88 thru 95)

01011

Example of Local Addresses for Three DBK210s in a Common Daq System

The Local Address must be unique for each board in the Daq system. In addition, theboard’s address must match the address setting in DaqView. The DaqView aspect is
explained in the Software Setup section, which begins on page 7.

DBK210, pg. 6987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Software Setup
Note: DBK210 is not applicable to LogBook or LogView.

To use DBK210 from within DaqView, you must first configure the DaqView software to match the
hardware setup.
1.

From DaqView’s main window, select the Device pull-down menu.

2.

Select Configure Hardware Settings.
The Digital Option Cards External Connection section of DaqView’s Configure System Hardware
window lists 8 channels (0 through 7) as shown in the following screen image.

3. Select DBK210 from the pull-down list in the Digital Option Cards panel. As seen in the following
figure, the panel is on the right side of screen.

Selecting DBK210 in the Configure System Hardware Window
4. Click <OK>. A DBK210 Configuration Settings window will appear (following figure).

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK210, pg. 7

5.

Set S1 micro-switches to agree with the actual settings of the switches on the DBK210 boards. Use“OFF” to obtain a setting of “0” for each switch and use “ON” to obtain a setting of “1.” A detailed
explanation of address settings is provided on 6.

DBK210 Configuration Settings
6.

Independently set the four banks P20-A, P20-B, P20-C, and P20-D. A checked box indicates that theassociated bank is Digital Output. An unchecked box indicates Digital Input.
7. After S1 and the bank Input / Output settings are complete, click the <OK> button.
8. Select the Digital I/O icon from DaqView’s main window toolbar. The Async Digital I/O window willappear (following figure).
With the P2 Digital I/O tab selected in the Async Digital I/O window, each active channel has
divisions for the four banks (A, B, C, and D).

Async Digital I/O Window – P2 Digital I/O Tab Selected
In the above screen shot, channel 0 represents one DBK210 board with its four banks: A, B, C, and D.
In this example all four banks are seen as Input. The input determination was made by the physicalpositions of micro-switches 2, 3, 4, and 5 on switch S1. Because the 4 banks are set as input, theDBK210 Configuration Settings dialog box shows the Input / Output boxes as “unchecked.”
When Output is selected, hexadecimal values must be entered in the “O” block for the applicable bank.
9.

DBK210, pg. 8

Upon completion of the configuration click the <Execute> button.

987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DaqView’s Channel Setup Tab
In the above figure the 4 Banks for one DBK210 card are listed in the CH column as:
P2 0-A, P2 0-B, P2 0-C, and P2 0-D.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK210, pg. 9

DBK210 – Specifications
Name/Function: Carrier Board for GrayhillTM 70M-Series Mini-Modules
Module Capacity: 32 Grayhill 70M-Series Mini-Modules per board
Cable (optional): CA-37-×
DC Input Fuse: 3.0A, resettable type
DC Input Connector: Non-removable screw terminal, (+5 VDC, GND)
Power Requirement: 5 VDC, ±5%. 0.600 amp minimum.
Operating Environment:
Temperature: 0°C to 70°C
Relative Humidity: 95% RH, non-condensing
Connectors:
P1 – One P1 (DB37) connector provides for Analog input expansion via a CA-37-x cable.
P2 – Two P2 (DB37) connectors provide for digital expansion via a CA-37-x cable.
P4 – 100-pin connector provides for connection to the P4 connector of a DaqBook/2000
Series device, DaqBoard/2000 Series board, or cPCI DaqBoard/2000c Series board.
P4-to-P4 connection is made via a CA-195 cable.
Screw Terminals – 4 removable screw-terminal blocks. Each block has 16 connections for 8
mini-modules, i.e., 2 connections (+/-) per module.
Isolation:
Channel-to-System: 250 V
Channel-to-Channel: 250 V

Note: Specifications are subject to change without notice.

DBK210, pg. 10987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK213

Screw-Terminal & Expansion Card Module

3-Card Slot, Includes P1/P2/P3/P4 compatibility for Analog I/O, Digital I/O, & Pulse/Frequency
Overview …… 1
Connection Tips…… 2
Installing DBK Cards …… 3
System Examples …… 4
Using the Screw-Terminal Blocks …… 6
Adding RC Filter Networks …… 10
Specifications …… 12
Reference Notes …… 13
DBK213 Front Panel

Upper Slots for Terminal Board Wiring Pass-ThroughLower Slots for Housing up to 3 DBK options, 1 per slot

The DBK213 module is compatible with the following products:• DaqBook/2000 Series • DaqBoard/2000 Series • DaqLab • DaqScan

Overview
The DBK213 module includes:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

P1, male DB37 connector for Analog I/O.
P2, male DB37 connector for Digital I/O.
P3, male DB37 connector for Pulse/Frequency (Digital and Counter/Timer) I/O.
P4, 100-pin connector. Provides same signal connection as P1, P2, and P3 combined.
Three slots for housing optional DBK cards. The DB37 connector of each card will extend out
through the rear panel where it can be secured with hex nuts.
12 on-board screw-terminal blocks (accessible after removal of cover)
The terminal blocks [TB1 through TB12] tie in to P1, P2, P3, and P4 and provide for easy signal
connection.
Three front panel slots for wiring pass-through.
On-board socket locations for custom RC Filter networks (accessible after removal of cover).

DBK213 Rear Panel
The upper section includes P1, P2, P3 and P4 connectors. The lower section
has 3 openings for pass-through of DB37 connectors from optional DBK cards.

The three DB37 connectors can be used as direct connections points for I/O signals, or signals can beconnected to each 37-pin connector via a DBK card or module. The lower section of the DBK213 includes
three built-in expansion slots for housing card options.
The unit includes screw-terminal access to all analog and digital I/O from the host data acquisition device.
Related to the screw-terminals are 3 front panel upper slots for routing all I/O wiring.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

969294

DBK213, pg. 1

Connection Tips
CAUTION
Turn off power to the host PC and externally connected equipment prior to connecting
cables or signal lines to DBKs. Electric shock or damage to equipment can result evenunder low-voltage conditions.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle
boards by their edges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure boards do not come into
contact with foreign elements such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.
Do not confuse connectors. Ensure that you only connect P1 I/Os to P1, P2 I/Os to P2,
and P3 I/Os to P3. Improper connection may result in equipment damage.
When using P4, e.g., for a DaqBoard/2000, be sure to align the P4 orientation
indicators [white arrows] prior to mating the P4 connectors.

1.

Ensure power is removed from the device(s) to be connected.

2.

Observe ESD precautions when handling the board and making connections.

3.

Do not make redundant connections. For example, for ANALOG IN you could use
the P1 (DB37) connector or Terminal Blocks TB9 through TB12. You would not use bothsets of ANALOG IN connectors.

4.

You do not need to remove the cover unless you need to access a terminal block or customize
an RC filter network. Information regarding both tasks follows shortly. Note that RC filter
networks are not to be made or used in association with additional DBK expansion options.

5.

DBK213’s 100-pin P4 connects to a DaqBoard/2000 Series board’s P4 via a CA-195
one-hundred conductor ribbon cable.
The DaqBoard/2000 Series boards communicate [external from the hostPC] through a 100-pin P4 connector. The P1, P2, and P3 connectors
discussed in association with these boards are subset connectors of the 100pin P4 connector. The System Connections and Pinouts chapters of the
product hardware manuals include pinouts.

DBK213, pg. 2

6.

Connections to the DB37 connectors are made via CA-37 cables or CA-255 cables:(a) P1 connects to an analog DBK card or module’s P1 connector.
(b) P2 connects to a Digital DBK card or module’s P2 connector.
(c) P3 connects to a Pulse/Frequency DBK card module’s P3 connector.

7.

Refer to the separate CE Cable Kit instructions that are included with the associatedCE cable kit.

969294

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Installing DBK Cards
P1

Front Panel with 3 Vacant Card Slots

P2

P3

Rear Panel View with No Card Installed
BeneathP3

BeneathP2

Beneath
P1

Rear Panel View with
Card Installed in Slot 2 Beneath P2

The DBK213 has three card slots which allow for the easy installation of DBK cards. To install a cardobserve the following CAUTION and then complete the few simple steps.

CAUTION
Turn off power to the host PC and externally connected equipment prior to connecting
cables or signal lines to DBKs. Electric shock or damage to equipment can result evenunder low-voltage conditions.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle
boards by their edges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure boards do not come into
contact with foreign elements such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.
1.

Refer to your specific DBK card instructions prior to installing the card. You may need to makephysical hardware configurations, for example, regarding channel assignments.

2.

Complete all DBK card configuration per your application and channel assignment needs.

3.

Make signal line connections on your DBK card as applicable. Screw-terminal connections and BNC
connections are typical.

4.

If hex nuts are present on your DBK card’s DB37 connector, remove them and put them aside forreuse in step 7.

5.

Using the lower card-edge-guide on the DBK213 front panel [and possibly the upper guide for highcards such as the DBK82], carefully slide the card into the desired slot such that the card’s DB37
connector goes to the rear panel of the DBK213. The following should be considered when choosing
a card slot.
oooAnalog I/O cards will connect to the DBK213’s P1 male DB37 connector.
Digital I/O cards will connect to the DBK213’s P2 male DB37 connector.
Pulse/Frequency (Digital and Counter/Timer) I/O will connect to the DBK213’s P3male DB37 connector.

6.

Push the DBK card until its DB37 connector extends through the rear panel of the DBK213.

7.

Using the hex nuts removed in step 4 (or replacement hex nuts if needed), secure the card at the rear
panel. Tighten the hex nuts snug, but do not over tighten.

8.

Repeat these steps for each remaining card.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

969294

DBK213, pg. 3

System Examples
Example 1:
DaqBoard/2000 • DBK7 Analog I/O Card • DBK25 Digital I/O Card

Notes regarding the above system example:

DBK213, pg. 4

1)

A CA-195 100-conductor ribbon cable connects the P4 connector of the DBK213 to the P4 connector of the
DaqBoard/2000 (which is installed in the host PC).

2)

In the illustration, DBK213 is housing a DBK7 (Analog I/O card) and a DBK25 (Digital I/O card).

3)

A CA-255 [or CA-37] cable is used to connect the DBK7’s DB37 P1 connector to the DBK213’s P1 connector.

4)

A CA-255 [or CA-37] cable is used to connect the DBK25’s DB37 P2 connector to the DBK213’s P2 connector.

969294

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Example 2:
DaqBoook/2001 • DBK7 • DBK80 • DBK82-------- (3 Analog I/O Cards)---------

Notes regarding the above system example:
1)

Either of two Ethernet cables can be used: CA-242 is a 1.5 ft cable; CA-242-7 is a 7 ft. cable.

2)

In the illustration, DBK213 is housing a DBK7, DBK80, and DBK82. Each is an analog card that will make use of P1
in regard to analog signal I/O.

3)

1 P1 Cable (back view, bottom cable): A CA-37-3 cable is being used to link together to DB37 connectors of all
three analog DBK cards.

4)

2 P1 Cable (back view, left cable): A CA-255-2T is being used to connect the other P1 cable and the DBK213’s P1
to the P1 connector of the DaqBook/2001.

5)

The DBK213’s P1 connector [rear panel, upper-left] connects to the internal screw-terminal board to which analog I/O
signals could be connected via wire. The wires would be routed out through the upper slots of the front panel.

6)

A CA-255 [or CA-37] cable is used to connect the DBK213’s P2 connector to the DaqBook/2001 P2 connector.

7)

The DBK213’s P2 connector connects to the internal screw-terminal board, to which digital I/O signals could beconnected via wire. The wires would be routed out through the upper slots of the front panel.

8)

In a different scenario, the DBK213’s P2 connector could be connected to digital DBK options instead of connecting
the P1 connector to analog DBK options as illustrated.

stnd

DBK Option Cards and Modules

969294

DBK213, pg. 5

Using the Screw-Terminal Blocks
You must remove the DBK213 module’s cover plate to access the screw terminal blocks. This is described in steps
1 and 2 below.
1.

Remove the top inward screws from each of the 4 mounting brackets. See following figure.
To remove the cover plate you
must first remove the top
inward screw from each of the
4 mounting brackets.

The Cover Plate is Secured by 4 Srews [2 Screws per-side]2.

After the 4 screws have been removed, carefully remove the cover plate.

3.

Make the wiring connections to the terminals. Refer to the board’s silkscreen and to
the pin correlations on the next few pages.

In general, the following terminal block-to-signal relationships apply:
DBK213
Terminal
BlocksUsed for . . .

Alternative

TB9
TB10
TB11
TB12

ANALOG I/O

P1 or P4*

TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8

DIGITAL I/O

P2 or P4*

TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4

PULSE/
FREQUENCY/
DIGITAL I/O

P3 or P4*

DBK213 Board
Note that the P3 DB37 Connector and its associated board cablehas been removed for clarity.
* P4 is used for connecting to DaqBoard/2000 Series devices.
4.

Tighten the terminal block screws snug; but do not over-tighten.

5.

After all terminal connections are made and verified correct, return the cover to the unit andsecure in place with the 4 screws removed earlier. Tighten snug, but do not over-tighten.
The following pages correlate the DBK213 terminal block connectors with the associated pins of
the P1, P2, and P3 DB37 connectors. Note that the System Connections and Pinouts chapter
contains additional pin-outs, and includes references to the 100-pin P4 connector.

DBK213, pg. 6969294

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Correlation to P1 – Pertains to Terminal Blocks TB9, TB10, TB11, and TB12 for Analog I/O.
TB9
DIFF
SE
0H
0
0L
8
1H
1
1L
9
2H
2
2L
10
3H
3
3L
11
FILT CAP LO
SGND
TB10
DIFF
SE
4H
4
4L
12
5H
5
5L
13
6H
6
6L
14
7H
7
7L
15
FILT CAP LO
SGND

P1 Pin Number and Description (see Note 1)
37
18
36
17
35
16
34
15
N/A
19

CH 0 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 0 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 8 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 0 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 1 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 1 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 9 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 1 LO IN (Differential Mode)CH 2 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 2 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 10 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 2 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 3 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 3 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 11 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 3 LO IN (Differential Mode)
For RC filter networks install a wire jumper between the relevant FILT CAP LO and
AGND. Note that there is no association between FILT CAP LO and P4.
Signal Ground, Sense Common; reference ground, not for general use.

P1 – TB9

P1 Pin Number and Description (see Note 1)
33
14
32
13
31
12
30
11
N/A
19

CH 4 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 4 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 12 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 4 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 5 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 5 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 13 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 5 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 6 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 6 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 14 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 6 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 7 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 7 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 15 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 7 LO IN (Differential Mode)
For RC filter networks install a wire jumper between the relevant FILT CAP LO and
AGND. Note that there is no association between FILT CAP LO and P4.
Signal Ground, Sense Common; reference ground, not for general use.

TB11
TTL TRIG
A/I CLK
EXP 5
EXP 6
EXP 7
EXP 8
EXP 9
EXP 10
EXP 11AGND

P1 Pin Number and Description
25
TTL Trigger, Digital IN, External TTL Trigger Input
20
A/I Clock, External ADC Pacer Clock Input/ Internal ADC Pacer Clock Output
5
Expansion 5. Digital OUT, external GAIN select bit 1
6
Expansion 6. Digital OUT, external GAIN select bit 0
3
Expansion 7. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 3
22
Expansion 8. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 2
4
Expansion 9. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 1
23
Expansion 10. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 026
Expansion 11. Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH)*
Analog Ground, Common

TB12
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
+ 15 V- 15 V
AGND+5V

P1 Pin Number and Description*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common
21
Expansion, +15 V Power
2
Expansion, -15 V Power*
Common Ground1
Expansion, +5 V PowerP1 – TB10

P1 – TB11

P1 – TB12*Refer to Ground Correlation Tables in the DBK Options Manual (457-0905), chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts.

Note 1: For TB9 and TB10, the filter network portion of the silkscreen is not shown. Instead, the DIFF and SE channel
identifiers have been moved next to the screws for ease in identification.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

969294

DBK213, pg. 7

Correlation to P2 – Pertains to Terminal Blocks TB5, TB6, TB7, and TB8 for Digital I/O.
TB5
DGND
DGND
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0

P2 Pin Number and Description*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common
30
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 7; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 15
31
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 6; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 14
32
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 5; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 13
33
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 4; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 12
34
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 3; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 11
35
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 2; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 10
36
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 1; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 9
37
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 0; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 8

TB6
+5 V
+5 V
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND

P2 Pin Number and Description
18
Expansion +5 V Power
20
Expansion +5 V Power*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common

TB7
DGND
DGND
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
C0

P2 Pin Number and Description*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common
22
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 7; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 7
23
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 6; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 6
24
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 5; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 5
25
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 4; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 4
26
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 3; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 3
27
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 2; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 2
28
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 1; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 1
29
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 0; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 0

TB8
DGND
DGND
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

P2 Pin Number and Description*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common
10
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 0; or P2 Expansion READ Output
9
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 1; or P2 Expansion WRITE Output
8
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 2; or P2 Expansion RESET Output
7
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 3; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 4 Out
6Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 4; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 3 Out
5Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 5; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 2 Out
4Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 6; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 1 Out
3Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 7; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 0 Out

P2 – TB5

P2 – TB6

P2 – TB7

P2 – TB8*Refer to Ground Correlation Tables in the DBK Options Manual (457-0905), chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts.

DBK213, pg. 8969294

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Correlation to P3 – Pertains to Terminal Blocks TB1, TB2, TB3, and TB4 for Pulse/Frequency/Digital I/O.
TB1
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
DGND
+5V

P3 Pin Number and Description
10
P3 Digital Port Bit 0
9
P3 Digital Port Bit 1
8
P3 Digital Port Bit 2
7
P3 Digital Port Bit 3
6
P3 Digital Port Bit 4
5
P3 Digital Port Bit 5
4
P3 Digital Port Bit 6
3
P3 Digital Port Bit 7*
Digital Ground, Common
20
Expansion, +5 Volt Power

TB2
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
DGND
DGND

P3 Pin Number and Description
29
P3 Digital Port Bit 828
P3 Digital Port Bit 927
P3 Digital Port Bit 10
26
P3 Digital Port Bit 11
25
P3 Digital Port Bit 12
24
P3 Digital Port Bit 13
23
P3 Digital Port Bit 14
22
P3 Digital Port Bit 15*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common

TB3

P3 Pin Number and Description

CH0 (DAC0)34

Analog Out; Analog DAC 0 Output

AGND

*

Analog Ground, Common; intended for use with DACs

EXP 0 (DAC2)

32

Analog Out; Analog DAC 2 Output

AGND

*

Analog Ground, Common; intended for use with DACs

CH1 (DAC1)

33

Analog Out; Analog DAC 1 Output

A/O CLK

21

Analog Out Clock; External DAC Pacer Clock Input/
Internal DAC Pacer Clock Output

EXP 1 (DAC3)

31

Analog Out; Analog DAC 3 Output

DGND

*

Digital Ground, Common

+15 V

19

Expansion, + 15 VDC

37Expansion, -15 VDC

-15 V
TB4

P3 – TB1

P3 – TB2

P3 – TB3

P3 Pin Number and Description

EXP 2

12

Reserved

EXP 3

13

Reserved

EXP 4

14

Reserved

TMR 0

15

P3 Timer 0 Output

TMR 1

16

P3, Timer 1 Output

CNT 3

35

P3 Counter 3 Input

CNT 2

17

P3 Counter 2 Input

CNT 1

36

P3 Counter 1 Input

CNT0

18

P3 Counter 0 Input

DGND

*

Digital Ground, Common

P3 – TB4*Refer to Ground Correlation Tables in the DBK Options Manual (457-0905), chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

969294

DBK213, pg. 9

Adding Resistor/Capacitor Filter Networks
WARNING
Disconnect the DBK213 from power and signal sources prior to installing capacitors or
resistors.

CAUTION
Ensure wire strands do not short power supply connections (+15 V, -15 V, +5 V, etc.) to
any terminal potential. Failure to do so could result in damage to DaqBook/2000 Series
devices or DaqBoard/2000 Series boards.
Do not exceed maximum allowable inputs (as listed in product specifications). There
should never be more than 30 V with reference to analog ground (AGND) or earth
ground.
You must provide strain-relief (lead slack) to all leads leaving the module. Use tie-wraps[not included] to secure strain-relief.
Always connect the CHASSIS terminal to earth ground. This will maximize static
protection.
If a channel is not associated with a DBK expansion option you can install a customized RC filter network
to improve the signal-to noise ratio, assuming that an unacceptable level of noise exists. DBK213’s
internal board includes silk-screened sockets for installing RC filter networks. The following tablecontains values that are typical for RC filter network components.
Typical One-Pole Low Pass Filter
Valuesfor DBK213

R
Ohms

C
µF

510
510
510
510
510
510
510
510
470

1
0.47
0.22
0.1
0.047
0.022
0.01
0.00470.0033f
Hertz(-3dB)
312
664
1419
3122
6643
14192
31223
66431
102666

Do not use RC filters in conjunction with additional DBK expansion
accessories.

f
kHz(-3dB)
0.31
0.66
1.42
3.12
6.64
14.19
31.22
66.43
102.67

An Example of Customer-Installed
Capacitors and Filters for RC Networks
In this example Channels 0 and 8 are shown as Single-Ended.
Channel 1 is Differential, i.e., using 1H and 1L (channel High and Low).

The following three notes pertain to the above figure.
Note 1: The 3 horizontal capacitors [as oriented in the illustration] are optional filter capacitors.
Note 2: The vertical capacitor [as oriented in the illustration] is an optional isolation capacitor used for the
reduction of Differential noise. Such capacitor placement is not used in Single-Ended applications.
Note 3: If installing filter resistors, carefully drill out the indicated centers with a 1/16 inch drill-bit. Otherwise
the resistor will be short-circuited.

Prior to installing RC components, review the previous Warning and Caution
statements, then read over the following information regarding resistors andcapacitors.
DBK213, pg. 10969294

DBK Option Cards and Modules• Do not use RC filters in conjunction with additional DBK expansion accessories.
• Prior to installing a resistor to the filter network you must drill a 1/16” hole throughthe center pinhole [beneath the board’s silkscreen resistor symbol] as indicated in thepreceding figure. Failure to do so will short-circuit the resistor.
• Do not drill holes on the board for channels, unless those channels are to receive afilter network (see preceding statement).
• Resistors should be ¼ watt, film-type with up to 5% tolerance. Do not use wirewound resistor types.
• A resistor value of 510 Ω is recommended. Do not exceed 510 Ω.
• Capacitors used are to be of the film dielectric type (e.g., polycarbonate or
NPO ceramic), above 0.001 µF.
• RECOMMENDED: For reduction of both Common Mode Noise and Differential
Mode Noise, use one capacitor between Channel High and AGND; and use a second
capacitor between Channel Low and AGND.
• For reduction of Differential Noise [when no reduction of Common Mode Noise isneeded] position a capacitor across the respective Channel High and Channel Low.
• When in Differential Mode, using capacitors between Channel High, Channel Low,
and AGND may cause a slight degradation of wideband Common Mode rejection.
• When making a RC filter network, always install a wire jumper between the relevant
FILT CAP LO and AGND. FILT CAP LO terminals are located on TB9 and TB10.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

969294

DBK213, pg. 11

Specifications for DBK213
Operating Environment:

Temperature: -30°C to 70°C
Relative Humidity: 95% RH, non-condensing

Connectors:
P1: male DB37 connector for analog expansion or connection to primary acquisition device*
P2: male DB37 connector for digital expansion or connection to primary acquisition device*
P3: male DB37 connector for pulse/frequency/digital I/O, or connection to primary acquisition device*
P4: 100-pin connector for connection to a /2000 Series device that includes a P4 connector;
e.g., DaqBoard/2000.
Screw Terminals: 12 banks of 10-connector blocks

Dimensions:

285 mm W x 220 mm D x 45 mm H (11” x 8.5” x 2.7”)

Weight:1.45 kg (3.2 lbs)

Cables and Accessories:
Item Description

Part Number

Rack Mount Kit, p/n

RackDBK4100-conductor expansion cables; mate with P4 connectors:
3 ft., non-CE Compliant
CA-1953 ft., CE Compliant
CA-2096 ft., non-CE Compliant
CA-195-6
37-conductor cables; mate with DB37 connectors:
2 in., shielded T-cableCA-255-2T
4 in., shielded T cableCA-255-4T
8 in., shielded T cableCA-255-8T
37-conductor ribbon cableCA-37-X*DaqBook/2000 Series, DaqLab/2000 Series, DaqScan/2000 SeriesSpecifications subject to change without notice.

DBK213, pg. 12969294

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Reference Notes:
In regard to calculating system power requirements refer to the DBK Basics section.
Chapter 2 includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Refer to pinouts applicable to yoursystem, as needed.
For a quick comparison of all DBK200 Series boards, refer to the DBK200 Series
Matrix. The matrix is located just before the DBK200 section of this manual.
Refer to the documentation for your primary data acquisition device as needed.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

969294

DBK213, pg. 13

DBK213, pg. 14

969294

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK214

16-Connector BNC Interface Module

Includes P1/P2/P3/P4 compatibility for Analog I/O, Digital I/O, & Pulse/Frequency
Overview …… 1
Block Diagram …… 2
Connection Tips…… 3
System Examples …… 4
Using the Screw-Terminal Blocks …… 6
Adding RC Filter Networks …… 12
Specifications …… 14
Reference Notes …… 15
DBK214 Front Panel

Upper Slot for Terminal Board Wiring Pass-ThroughLower section of 16 BNC Connectors

The DBK214 module is compatible with the following products:• DaqBook/2000 Series • DaqBoard/2000 Series • DaqLab • DaqScan

Overview
The DBK214 module includes:
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o

P1, male DB37 connector for Analog Input.
P2, male DB37 connector for Digital I/O.
P3, male DB37 connector for Pulse/Frequency (Digital and Counter/Timer) I/O, andAnalog Output.
P4, 100-pin connector. Provides same signal connection as P1, P2, and P3 combined.
14 on-board screw-terminal blocks (accessible after removal of cover)
The terminal blocks tie in to P1, P2, P3, and P4 and provide for easy signal connection.
8 BNC connectors (BNC0 through BNC7) for Analog Input
8 BNC connectors (BNCA through BNCH), custom configured by user for accessing
Analog I/O, Digital I/O, or Counter/Timer signals.
On-board socket locations for custom RC Filter networks (accessible after removal of cover).

DBK214 Rear Panel
Upper section includes P2 and P3 DB37 connectors.
Lower section includes P1 DB37 connector and P4 100-pin connector.

The three DB37 connectors (P1, P2 and P3) can be used as direct connection points for I/O signals.
Optionally, convenient removable DB37 connectors [provided] can be used. Often signals are connected
to P1, P2, and/or P3 via cable and a DBK card or module.
The DBK214 provides BNC and screw-terminal access to all analog and digital I/O from the host dataacquisition device. Related to the screw-terminals is a front panel slot for routing all I/O wiring.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967894

DBK214, pg. 1

DBK214 Block Diagram* Accessory Kit p/n 1139-0800 includes jumper wires and a screw driver.

DBK214, pg. 2967894

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Connection Tips
CAUTION
Turn off power to the host PC and externally connected equipment prior to connecting
cables or signal lines to DBKs. Electric shock or damage to equipment can result evenunder low-voltage conditions.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle
boards by their edges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure boards do not come into
contact with foreign elements such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.
Do not confuse connectors. Ensure that you only connect P1 I/Os to P1, P2 I/Os to P2,
and P3 I/Os to P3. Improper connection may result in equipment damage.
When using P4, e.g., for a DaqBoard/2000, be sure to align the P4 orientation
indicators [white arrows] prior to mating the P4 connectors.

1.

Ensure power is removed from all device(s) to be connected.

2.

As soon as the DBK214 cover is removed, verify that the Host
Power LED is “Off.” See figure at right for location.

3.

Observe ESD precautions when handling the board and making
connections.

4.

Do not make redundant connections. For example, for
ANALOG IN you could use the P1 (DB37) connector,
or Terminal Blocks TB9 through TB12, or BNC connectors.
Redundant connections must be avoided.

5.

You do not need to remove the cover unless you need to access a terminal block, customize
an RC filter network, or set a BNC channel to Single-Ended mode or to Differential mode
(via Jumpers J0 through J7). Information regarding these tasks follows shortly. RC filter
networks are not to be made or used in association with additional DBK expansion
options.

6.

DBK214’s 100-pin P4 typically connects to a DaqBoard/2000 Series board’s P4 via a CA195
one-hundred conductor ribbon cable.
The DaqBoard/2000 Series boards communicate [external from the hostPC] through a 100-pin P4 connector. The P1, P2, and P3 connectors
discussed in association with these boards are subset connectors of the 100pin P4 connector. The System Connections and Pinouts chapters of the
product hardware manuals include pinouts.

7.

Connections to the DB37 connectors are made via CA-37 cables or CA-255 cables:(a) P1 connects to an analog DBK card or module’s P1 connector.
(b) P2 connects to a Digital DBK card or module’s P2 connector.
(c) P3 connects to a Pulse/Frequency DBK card module’s P3 connector.

8.

Refer to the separate CE Cable Kit instructions that are included with the associated CE cablekit. Refer to the Declaration of Conformity in regard to meeting CE requirements.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967894

Location of DBK214’s
Host Power LED

DBK214, pg. 3

System Examples
Example 1:

DBK214 Connected to a DaqBoard/2000

Note regarding the above system example:
A CA-195 100-conductor ribbon cable connects the P4 connector of the DBK214 to the P4 connector of the
DaqBoard/2000 (which is installed in the host PC).

DBK214, pg. 4967894

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Example 2:

DBK214 Connected to a DaqBook/2001

Notes regarding the above system example:
1)

Either of two Ethernet cables can be used: CA-242 is a 1.5 ft cable; CA-242-7 is a 7 ft. cable.

2)

A CA-255 [or CA-37] cable is being used to connect the DBK214’s P1 connector to the P1 connector of the
DaqBook/2001.

3)

The DBK214’s P1 connector [rear panel, lower-left] connects to the internal screw-terminal board to which analog I/O
signals could be connected via wire. The wires would be routed out through the upper slots of the front panel. In
addition, BNC connectors (for channels 0 through 7) connect [through the printed circuit board] to the P1 terminal
blocks.

4)

A CA-255 [or CA-37] cable is used to connect the DBK214’s P2 connector to the DaqBook/2001 P2 connector.

5)

The DBK214’s P2 connector connects to the internal screw-terminal board, to which digital I/O signals could beconnected via wire. The wires would be routed out through the upper slots of the front panel.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967894

DBK214, pg. 5

Using the Screw-Terminal Blocks
You must remove the DBK214 module’s cover plate to access the screw terminal blocks.
This is described in steps 1 and 2 below.
1.

Remove the top inward screws from each of the 4 mounting brackets. See following figure.
To remove the cover plate you
must first remove the top
inward screw from each of the
4 mounting brackets.

The Cover Plate is Secured by 4 Srews [2 Screws per-side]2.

After the 4 screws have been removed, carefully remove the cover plate.

3.

As soon as the DBK214 cover is removed, verify that the Host Power LED is “Off.” Seefollowing figure for location.

Host Power LED Location

DBK214, pg. 64.

Make the wiring connections to the terminals. Refer to the board’s silkscreen and to
the pin correlations on the next few pages.

5.

Tighten the terminal block screws snug; but do not over-tighten.

6.

After all terminal connections are made and verified correct, return the cover to the unit andsecure in place with the 4 screws removed earlier. Tighten snug, but do not over-tighten.

967894

DBK Option Cards and Modules

In general, the following terminal block-to-signal relationships apply:
DBK214
Terminal
BlocksUsed for . . .

Alternative

TB9
TB10

ANALOG INPUT

P1, P4*
BNC 0 thru 7

TB11
TB12

ANALOG INPUT

P1, P4*

TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8

DIGITAL I/O

P2 or P4*

TB13**
TB14**ANALOG INPUTBNC Channels
0 thru 7**

P1, P4*
TB9,TB10

TB15
TB16(Note 1)USER
CONFIGURABLEB
NC Channels
A thru H(See Note 1)

PULSE/
FREQUENCY/
DIGITAL I/O
ANALOG OUTPUT

P3 or P4*

TB1
TB2
TB3
TB4

*

DBK214 Board
Notes: (1) The P2 and P3 DB37 Connectors and their associated“device-internal” cables are not shown.
(2) DBK214 does not make use of P5 [top center].

P4 is used for connecting to DaqBoard/2000 Series devices.

** TB13 and TB14 are “virtual” terminal blocks which are routed in the printed circuit board to TB9 and TB10. The TB13 and TB14
silk-screened locations on the DBK214 board do not have physical screw terminal blocks.

Note 1:

TB15 and TB16 are used for optional user-configured BNC connectors A through H. These connectors can be configured
on a per-channel basis as Analog [Input or Output], Digital I/O, or Counter/Timer. When BNC A through H are used, theuser must route wires from the “BNC routing terminal blocks” (TB15 and TB16) to the appropriate functional TB
termination points.
Accessory Wire Kit, p/n 1139-0800 includes jumper wires and a screwdriver.

The following pages correlate the DBK214 terminal block connectors with the associated pins of the P1, P2, and P3
DB37 connectors. Note that chapter 2 of the DBK Options Manual (457-0905) contains additional pin-outs, andincludes references to the 100-pin P4 connector. Also note that hardware manuals for the primary data acquisition
devices include pinout chapters.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967894

DBK214, pg. 7

Correlation to P1 – Pertains to Terminal Blocks TB9, TB10, TB11, and TB12 for Analog I/O.

Also see “Correlation to BNC Terminations (TB13 and TB14) on page DBK214-11.”

TB9
DIFF
SE
0H
0
0L
8
1H
1
1L
9
2H
2
2L
10
3H
3
3L
11
FILT CAP LO
SGND
TB10
DIFF
SE
4H
4
4L
12
5H
5
5L
13
6H
6
6L
14
7H
7
7L
15
FILT CAP LO
SGND

P1 Pin Number and Description
37
18
36
17
35
16
34
15
N/A
19

CH 0 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 0 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 8 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 0 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 1 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 1 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 9 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 1 LO IN (Differential Mode)CH 2 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 2 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 10 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 2 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 3 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 3 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 11 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 3 LO IN (Differential Mode)
For RC filter networks install a wire jumper between the relevant FILT CAP LO and
AGND. Note that there is no association between FILT CAP LO and P4.
Signal Ground, Sense Common; reference ground, not for general use.

P1 – TB9(Note 2)P1 Pin Number and Description
33
14
32
13
31
12
30
11
N/A
19

CH 4 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 4 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 12 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 4 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 5 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 5 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 13 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 5 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 6 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 6 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 14 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 6 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 7 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 7 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 15 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 7 LO IN (Differential Mode)
For RC filter networks install a wire jumper between the relevant FILT CAP LO and
AGND. Note that there is no association between FILT CAP LO and P4.
Signal Ground, Sense Common; reference ground, not for general use.

TB11
TTL TRIG
A/I CLK
EXP 5
EXP 6
EXP 7
EXP 8
EXP 9
EXP 10
EXP 11AGND

P1 Pin Number and Description
25
TTL Trigger, Digital IN, External TTL Trigger Input
20
A/I Clock, External ADC Pacer Clock Input/ Internal ADC Pacer Clock Output
5
Expansion 5. Digital OUT, external GAIN select bit 1
6
Expansion 6. Digital OUT, external GAIN select bit 0
3
Expansion 7. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 3
22
Expansion 8. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 2
4
Expansion 9. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 1
23
Expansion 10. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 026
Expansion 11. Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH)*
Analog Ground, Common

TB12
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
+ 15 V- 15 V
AGND+5V

P1 Pin Number and Description*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common
21
Expansion, +15 V Power
2
Expansion, -15 V Power*
Common Ground1
Expansion, +5 V PowerP1 – TB10(Note 2)

P1 – TB11

P1 – TB12*Refer to Ground Correlation Tables in the DBK Options Manual (457-0905), chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts.

Note 2: For TB9 and TB10, the filter network portion of the silkscreen is not shown. Instead, the DIFF and SE channel
identifiers have been moved next to the screws for ease in identification.
DBK214, pg. 8967894

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Correlation to P2 – Pertains to Terminal Blocks TB5, TB6, TB7, and TB8 for Digital I/O.
TB5
DGND
DGND
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0

P2 Pin Number and Description*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common
30
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 7; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 15
31
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 6; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 14
32
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 5; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 13
33
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 4; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 12
34
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 3; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 11
35
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 2; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 10
36
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 1; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 9
37
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port A, Bit 0; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 8

TB6
+5 V
+5 V
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND

P2 Pin Number and Description
18
Expansion +5 V Power
20
Expansion +5 V Power*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common

TB7
DGND
DGND
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
C0

P2 Pin Number and Description*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common
22
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 7; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 7
23
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 6; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 6
24
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 5; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 5
25
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 4; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 4
26
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 3; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 3
27
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 2; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 2
28
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 1; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 1
29
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port C, Bit 0; or P2 Expansion Data Bit 0

TB8
DGND
DGND
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

P2 Pin Number and Description*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common
10
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 0; or P2 Expansion READ Output
9
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 1; or P2 Expansion WRITE Output
8
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 2; or P2 Expansion RESET Output
7
Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 3; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 4 Out
6Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 4; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 3 Out
5Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 5; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 2 Out
4Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 6; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 1 Out
3Digital I/O: P2, Digital Port B, Bit 7; or P2 Expansion Address Bit 0 Out

P2 – TB5

P2 – TB6

P2 – TB7

P2 – TB8*Refer to Ground Correlation Tables in the DBK Options Manual (457-0905), chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967894

DBK214, pg. 9

Correlation to P3 – Pertains to Terminal Blocks TB1, TB2, TB3, and TB4 for Pulse/Frequency/Digital I/O.
TB1
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
DGND
+5V

P3 Pin Number and Description
10
P3 Digital Port Bit 0
9
P3 Digital Port Bit 1
8
P3 Digital Port Bit 2
7
P3 Digital Port Bit 3
6
P3 Digital Port Bit 4
5
P3 Digital Port Bit 5
4
P3 Digital Port Bit 6
3
P3 Digital Port Bit 7*
Digital Ground, Common
20
Expansion, +5 Volt Power

TB2
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
DGND
DGND

P3 Pin Number and Description
29
P3 Digital Port Bit 828
P3 Digital Port Bit 927
P3 Digital Port Bit 10
26
P3 Digital Port Bit 11
25
P3 Digital Port Bit 12
24
P3 Digital Port Bit 13
23
P3 Digital Port Bit 14
22
P3 Digital Port Bit 15*
Digital Ground, Common*
Digital Ground, Common

TB3

P3 Pin Number and Description

P3 – TB1

P3 – TB2

CH0 (DAC0)34

Analog Out; Analog DAC 0 Output

AGND

*

Analog Ground, Common; intended for use with DACs

EXP 0 (DAC2)

32

Analog Out; Analog DAC 2 Output

AGND

*

Analog Ground, Common; intended for use with DACs

CH1 (DAC1)

33

Analog Out; Analog DAC 1 Output

A/O CLK

21

Analog Out Clock; External DAC Pacer Clock Input/
Internal DAC Pacer Clock Output

EXP 1 (DAC3)

31

Analog Out; Analog DAC 3 Output

DGND

*

Digital Ground, Common

+15 V

19

Expansion, + 15 VDC

37Expansion, -15 VDC

-15 V
TB4

P3 – TB3

P3 Pin Number and Description

EXP 2

12

Reserved

EXP 3

13

Reserved

EXP 4

14

Reserved

TMR 0

15

P3 Timer 0 Output

TMR 1

16

P3, Timer 1 Output

CNT 3

35

P3 Counter 3 Input

CNT 2

17

P3 Counter 2 Input

CNT 1

36

P3 Counter 1 Input

CNT0

18

P3 Counter 0 Input

DGND*
Digital Ground, Common
P3 – TB4*Refer to Ground Correlation Tables in the DBK Options Manual (457-0905), chapter 2, System Connections and Pinouts.

DBK214, pg. 10967894

DBK Option Cards and Modules

P1 Correlation to Analog Input BNC Terminations – BNC Ch 0 through BNC Ch 7

“Virtual” Terminal Blocks TB13 and TB14 for ANALOG INPUT connect to TB9 and TB10 through the printed circuit board.
TB13 (“Virtual” Terminal Block)
BNC CH
DIFF
SE
BNC0+
0H
0
BNC00L
8
BNC1+
1H
1
BNC11L
9
BNC2+2H
2
BNC22L
10
BNC3+
3H
3
BNC0+
3L
11
AGND
AGND

N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A

TB14 (“Virtual” Terminal Block)
BNC CH
DIFF
SE
BNC4+
4H
4
BNC44L
12
BNC5+
5H
5
BNC55L
13
BNC6+
6H
6
BNC66L
14
BNC7+
7H
7
BNC7+
7L
15
AGND
AGND

N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A

P1 Pin Number and Description
Pin
SE = Single Ended ; DIFF = Differential
37
CH 0 IN (SE) / CH 0 HI IN (DIFF)18
CH 8 IN (SE) / CH 0 LO IN (DIFF)
36
CH 1 IN (SE) / CH 1 HI IN (DIFF)17
CH 9 IN (SE) / CH 1 LO IN (DIFF)
35
CH 2 IN (SE) / CH 2 HI IN (DIFF)
16
CH 10 IN (SE) / CH 2 LO IN (DIFF)34
CH 3 IN (SE) / CH 3 HI IN (DIFF)
15
CH 11 IN (SE) / CH 3 LO IN (D DIFF)**

J0

TB13 does not physically exist on
DBK214. A silkscreen of TB13 ispresent as a visual aid to signal
routing and configuration.

J1
J2
J3

Analog Ground
Analog Ground

P1 Pin Number and Description
Pin
SE = Single Ended ; DIFF = Differential
33
CH 4 IN (SE) / CH 4 HI IN (DIFF)
14
CH 12 IN (SE) / CH 4 LO IN (DIFF)
32
CH 5 IN (SE) / CH 5 HI IN (DIFF)13
CH 13 IN (SE) / CH 5 LO IN (DIFF)
31
CH 6 IN (SE) / CH 6 HI IN (DIFF)
12
CH 14 IN (SE) / CH 6 LO IN (DIFF)30
CH 7 IN (SE) / CH 7 HI IN (DIFF)
11
CH 15 IN (SE) / CH 7 LO IN (DIFF)**

Jumper Used

N/A
N/A
Jumper Used

Analog Ground
Analog GroundJ4

A header located beneath TB14 andTB16 is used to set the BNC
channels to Single-Ended or to
Differential. Simply place channel’s
2-pin jumper in the appropriate
position (SE or DIFF).
TB14 does not physically exist on
DBK214. A silkscreen of TB14 ispresent as a visual aid to signal
routing and configuration.

J5
J6
J7
N/A
N/A

A header located beneath TB14 andTB16 is used to set the BNC
channels to Single-Ended or to
Differential. Simply place channel’s
2-pin jumper in the appropriate
position (SE or DIFF).

Correlation to Custom BNC Terminations – BNC Ch A through BNC Ch H
Pertains to Terminal Blocks TB15 and TB16 for Custom Configuration on a per-channel basis.
TB15 (“Routing” Terminal Block)
BNC CH
Description
BNCA+
BNCABNCB+BNCBBNCC+BNCCBNCD+
BNCD+
AGND
AGND

BNC channels A through D are configured on a per-channel basis by the user. TB15 is a routing
terminal block used to connect BNCs (A thru D) to the desired signals, which are selected via a second
DBK214 terminal block. For example: a user could run a wire from BNCA+ to TB4 screw terminal“TMR0” and BNCA- to TB4 DGND to create a BNC timer connection.
Accessory Wire Kit, p/n 1139-0800 includes jumper wires and a screwdriver.
Analog Ground *Analog Ground *TB15

TB16 (“Routing” Terminal Block)
BNC CH
Description
BNCA+
BNCABNCB+BNCBBNCC+BNCCBNCD+
BNCD+
AGND
AGND

BNC channels E through H are configured on a per-channel basis by the user. TB16 is a routing
terminal block used to connect BNCs (E thru H) to the desired signals, which are selected via a second
DBK214 terminal block.
Customizing is as described for BNCA through BNCD above.
Accessory Wire Kit, p/n 1139-0800 includes jumper wires and a screwdriver.
Analog Ground *Analog Ground *DBK Option Cards and Modules

TB16

967894

DBK214, pg. 11

Adding Resistor/Capacitor Filter Networks
WARNING
Disconnect the DBK214 from power and signal sources prior to installing capacitors or
resistors.

CAUTION
Ensure wire strands do not short power supply connections (+15 V, -15 V, +5 V, etc.) to
any terminal potential. Failure to do so could result in damage to DaqBook/2000 Series
devices or DaqBoard/2000 Series boards.
Do not exceed maximum allowable inputs (as listed in product specifications). There
should never be more than 30 V with reference to analog ground (AGND) or earth
ground.
You must provide strain-relief (lead slack) to all leads leaving the module. Use tie-wraps[not included] to secure strain-relief.
Always connect the CHASSIS terminal to earth ground. This will maximize static
protection.
If a channel is not associated with a DBK expansion option you can install a customized RC filter network
to improve the signal-to noise ratio, assuming that an unacceptable level of noise exists. DBK214’sinternal board includes silk-screened sockets for installing RC filter networks. The following tablecontains values that are typical for RC filter network components.
Typical One-Pole Low Pass Filter
Valuesfor DBK214

R
Ohms

C
µF

510
510
510
510
510
510
510
510
470

1
0.47
0.22
0.1
0.047
0.022
0.01
0.00470.0033f
Hertz(-3dB)
312
664
1419
3122
6643
14192
31223
66431
102666

Do not use RC filters in conjunction with additional DBK expansion
accessories.

f
kHz(-3dB)
0.31
0.66
1.42
3.12
6.64
14.19
31.22
66.43
102.67

An Example of Customer-Installed
Capacitors and Filters for RC Networks
In this example Channels 0 and 8 are shown as Single-Ended.
Channel 1 is Differential, i.e., using 1H and 1L (channel High and Low).

The following three notes pertain to the above figure.
Note 1: The 3 horizontal capacitors [as oriented in the illustration] are optional filter capacitors.
Note 2: The vertical capacitor [as oriented in the illustration] is an optional isolation capacitor used for the
reduction of Differential noise. Such capacitor placement is not used in Single-Ended applications.
Note 3: If installing filter resistors, carefully drill out the indicated centers with a 1/16 inch drill-bit. Otherwise
the resistor will be short-circuited.

Prior to installing RC components, review the previous Warning and Caution
statements, then read over the following information regarding resistors andcapacitors.
DBK214, pg. 12967894

DBK Option Cards and Modules• Do not use RC filters in conjunction with additional DBK expansion accessories.
• Prior to installing a resistor to the filter network you must drill a 1/16” hole throughthe center pinhole [beneath the board’s silkscreen resistor symbol] as indicated in thepreceding figure. Failure to do so will short-circuit the resistor.
• Do not drill holes on the board for channels, unless those channels are to receive afilter network (see preceding statement).
• Resistors should be ¼ watt, film-type with up to 5% tolerance. Do not use wirewound resistor types.
• A resistor value of 510 Ω is recommended. Do not exceed 510 Ω.
• Capacitors used are to be of the film dielectric type (e.g., polycarbonate or
NPO ceramic), above 0.001 µF.
• RECOMMENDED: For reduction of both Common Mode Noise and Differential
Mode Noise, use one capacitor between Channel High and AGND; and use a second
capacitor between Channel Low and AGND.
• For reduction of Differential Noise [when no reduction of Common Mode Noise isneeded] position a capacitor across the respective Channel High and Channel Low.
• When in Differential Mode, using capacitors between Channel High, Channel Low,
and AGND may cause a slight degradation of wideband Common Mode rejection.
• When making a RC filter network, always install a wire jumper between the relevant
FILT CAP LO and AGND. FILT CAP LO terminals are located on TB9 and TB10.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967894

DBK214, pg. 13

Specifications for DBK214
Operating Environment:

Temperature: -30°C to 70°C
Relative Humidity: 95% RH, non-condensing

Connectors:
P1: male DB37 connector for analog expansion or connection to primary acquisition device*
P2: male DB37 connector for digital expansion or connection to primary acquisition device*
P3: male DB37 connector for pulse/frequency/digital I/O, analog output, or connection to primaryacquisition device*
P4: 100-pin connector for connection to a /2000 Series device that includes a P4 connector;
e.g., DaqBoard/2000.
Screw Terminals: 14 banks of 10-connector blocks
Wire Size: 12 to 28 AWG

Dimensions:

285 mm W x 220 mm D x 45 mm H (11” x 8.5” x 2.7”)

Weight:1.36 kg (3 lbs)

Cables and Accessories:
Item Description

Part Number

Rack Mount Kit, p/n

RackDBK4100-conductor expansion cables; mate with P4 connectors:
3 ft., non-CE Compliant
CA-1953 ft., CE Compliant
CA-2096 ft., non-CE Compliant
CA-195-6
37-conductor cables; mate with DB37 connectors:
2 in., shielded T-cableCA-255-2T
4 in., shielded T cableCA-255-4T
8 in., shielded T cableCA-255-8T
37-conductor ribbon cableCA-37-X
Accessory Wire Kit
Includes jumper wires and ascrewdriver.

1139-0800*DaqBook/2000 Series, DaqLab/2000 Series, DaqScan/2000 SeriesSpecifications subject to change without notice.
DBK214, pg. 14

967894

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Reference Notes:
In regard to calculating system power requirements refer to the DBK Basics section.
Chapter 2 of the DBK Options Manual includes pinouts for P1, P2, P3, and P4. Referto pinouts applicable to your system, as needed.
For a quick comparison of all DBK200 Series boards, refer to the DBK200 Series
Matrix. The matrix is located just before the DBK200 section of this manual.
Refer to the user manual for the primary data acquisition device as needed. The user’s
manuals include device specific pinouts.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

967894

DBK214, pg. 15

DBK214, pg. 16

967894

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK215

16-Connector BNC Connection Module

With 68-Pin SCSI Adaptability for Analog I/O, Digital I/O, & Pulse/Frequency
Overview …… 1
Block Diagram …… 2
Connection Tips…… 3
System Examples …… 4
Using the Screw-Terminal Blocks …… 5
Adding RC Filter Networks …… 11
Specifications …… 13
DBK215 Front Panel

Upper Slot for Terminal Board Wiring Pass-ThroughLower section of 16 BNC Connectors

The DBK215 module is compatible with the following products:• DaqBoard/500 Series • DaqBoard/1000 Series • DaqBoard/3000USB Series

Overview

DBK215 Rear Panel

Includes a 68-pin SCSI connector designated as P5.

The DBK215 module includes:oooo

BNC Access to 16 inputs or outputs (on front panel)
on-board screw-terminal blocks*
on-board socket locations for custom RC Filter networks*
68-pin SCSI connector (on rear panel)* The top cover plate must be removed to access the terminal blocks andthe RC filter network section of the board.

The DBK215’s 68-pin SCSI connector (P5) connects to another SCSI connector on the main device, e.g.,
DaqBoard/500, /1000, or /3000USB Series board. Connection between the DBK215 and the board is madevia a CA-G55, CA-G56, or CA-G56-6 cable. Cable descriptions are provided on page 2.
The DBK215 provides BNC and screw-terminal access to all analog and digital I/O from the host dataacquisition device. Related to the screw-terminals is a front panel slot for routing all I/O wiring.

Reference Note:
DBK215 is intended for DaqBoard/500, /1000, and /3000USB Series applications. Refer toproduct-specific documentation for detailed information. For information concerningsimilar16 channel BNC connectivity/interface boards, designed for use with other products,
refer to the DBK213 and DBK214 sections of the DBK Options manual (p/n 457-0905).

DBK Option Cards and Modules

897994

DBK215 pg. 1

DBK215 Block Diagram* Accessory Kit p/n 1139-0800 includes jumper wires and a screw driver.

Note that the 68-pin SCSI (P5) connector typically connects to a DaqBoard/500, /1000, or/3000USB Series board SCSI connector via a CA-G55, CA-G56, or CA-G56-6 cable.
oooDBK215, pg. 2

CA-G55 is a 3-foot long cable.
CA-G56 is a 3-foot long shielded cable.
CA-G56-6 is a 6-foot long shielded cable.

897994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Connection Tips
CAUTION
Turn off power to the host PC and externally connected equipment prior to connecting
cables or signal lines to DBKs. Electric shock or damage to equipment can result evenunder low-voltage conditions.
Take ESD precautions (packaging, proper handling, grounded wrist strap, etc.)
Use care to avoid touching board surfaces and onboard components. Only handle
boards by their edges (or ORBs, if applicable). Ensure boards do not come into
contact with foreign elements such as oils, water, and industrial particulate.
1.

Ensure power is removed from all device(s) to be connected.

2.

As soon as the DBK215 cover is removed, verify that the Host
Power LED is “Off.” See figure at right for location.

3.

Observe ESD precautions when handling the board and making
connections.

4.

You do not need to remove the cover unless you need toaccess a terminal block, customize an RC filter network,or set a BNC channel to Single-Ended mode or to Differential
mode (via Jumpers J0 through J7). Information regarding thesetasks follows shortly.

5.

DBK215’s 68-pin SCSI (P5) connector typically connects to a DaqBoard/500, /1000, or/3000USB Series board via a CA-G55, CA-G56, or CA-G56-6 cable.
o
o
o

6.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Location of DBK215’s
Host Power LED

CA-G55 is a 3-foot long cable.
CA-G56 is a 3-foot long shielded cable.
CA-G56-6 is a 6-foot long shielded cable.

Refer to the separate CE Cable Kit instructions that are included with the associated CE cablekit. Refer to the Declaration of Conformity in regard to meeting CE requirements.

897994

DBK215 pg. 3

System Example

DBK215 Connection to a DaqBoard/500 Series or DaqBoard/1000 Series Board**Note: DaqBoard/3000USB Series boards reside external to the host PC and are connected to the PC
via USB cable.

Notes regarding the above system example:

DBK215, pg. 4

1)

Any of three 68-conductor SCSI ribbon cables can be used.
o CA-G55 is a 3-foot long cable.
o CA-G56 is a 3-foot long shielded cable.
o CA-G56-6 is a 6-foot long shielded cable.

2)

Signal lines connect to front panel BNC connectors or to the internal screw-terminal board.

3)

When signal lines are connected to terminal blocks (instead of the BNC connectors) the wires arerouted out through the upper slot of the front panel.

897994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Using the Screw-Terminal Blocks
You must remove the DBK215 module’s cover plate to access the screw terminal blocks.
This is described in steps 1 and 2 below.
1.

Remove the top inward screws from each of the 4 mounting brackets. See following figure.
To remove the cover plate you
must first remove the top
inward screw from each of the
4 mounting brackets.

The Cover Plate is Secured by 4 Srews [2 Screws per-side]2.

After the 4 screws have been removed, carefully remove the cover plate.

3.

As soon as the DBK215 cover is removed, verify that the Host Power LED is “Off.”See following figure for location.

Host Power LED Location

4.

Make the wiring connections to the terminals. Refer to the board’s silkscreen and to
the pin correlations on the next few pages.

5.

Tighten the terminal block screws snug; but do not over-tighten.

6.

After all terminal connections are made and verified correct, return the cover to the unit andsecure in place with the 4 screws removed earlier. Tighten snug, but do not over-tighten.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

897994

DBK215 pg. 5

In general, the following terminal block-to-signal relationships apply:
DBK215
Terminal
BlocksUsed for . . .

Alternative

TB9
TB10

ANALOG INPUT

BNC 0 thru 7

TB11
TB12

ANALOG INPUT

N/A

TB5
TB6
TB7
TB8

DIGITAL I/O

N/A

TB13**
TB14**ANALOG INPUTBNC Channels
0 thru 7**

TB9,TB10

TB15
TB16(Note 1)USER
CONFIGURABLEB
NC Channels
A thru H(See Note 1)

TB1
TB2

-- Not Used---

N/A

TB3
TB4

PULSE/
FREQUENCY
ANALOG OUTPUT

N/A

DBK215 Board* P4 is used for connecting to DaqBoard/2000 Series devices.
** TB13 and TB14 are “virtual” terminal blocks which are routed in the printed circuit board to TB9 and TB10. The
TB13 and TB14 silk-screened locations on the DBK215 board do not have physical screw terminal blocks.
Note 1:

TB15 and TB16 are used for optional user-configured BNC connectors A through H. These connectors canbe configured on a per-channel basis as Analog [Input or Output], Digital I/O, or Counter/Timer. When
BNC A through H are used, the user must route wires from the “BNC routing terminal blocks” (TB15 andTB16) to the appropriate functional TB termination points.
Accessory Wire Kit, p/n 1139-0800 includes jumper wires and a screwdriver.

The following pages correlate the DBK215 terminal block connectors with the 68-pin SCSI connector.

DBK215, pg. 6897994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Analog I/O Correlation to 68-pin SCSI

Also see “Correlation to BNC Terminations (TB13 and TB14) on page DBK215-10.”
TB9
DIFF
SE
0H
0
0L
8
1H
1
1L
9
2H
2
2L
10
3H
3
3L
11
FILT CAP LO
SGND
TB10
DIFF
SE
4H
4
4L
12
5H
5
5L
13
6H
6
6L
14
7H
7
7L
15
FILT CAP LO
SGND

Pin Number and Description
68
34
33
66
65
31
30
63
N/A
62

CH 0 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 0 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 8 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 0 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 1 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 1 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 9 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 1 LO IN (Differential Mode)CH 2 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 2 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 10 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 2 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 3 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 3 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 11 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 3 LO IN (Differential Mode)
For RC filter networks install a wire jumper between the relevant FILT CAP LO and
AGND. Note that there is no association between FILT CAP LO and P4.
Signal Ground, Sense Common; reference ground, not for general use.

P1 – TB9(Note 2)

Pin Number and Description
28
61
60
26
25
58
57
23
N/A
62

CH 4 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 4 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 12 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 4 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 5 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 5 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 13 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 5 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 6 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 6 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 14 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 6 LO IN (Differential Mode)
CH 7 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 7 HI IN (Differential Mode)
CH 15 IN (Single-Ended Mode) / CH 7 LO IN (Differential Mode)
For RC filter networks install a wire jumper between therelevant FILT CAP LO and AGND.
Signal Ground, Sense Common; reference ground, not for general use.

TB11
TTL TRIG
A/I CLK
EXP 5
EXP 6
EXP 7
EXP 8
EXP 9
EXP 10
EXP 11AGND

Pin Number and Description
6
TTL Trigger, Digital IN, External TTL Trigger Input
2
A/I Clock, External ADC Pacer Clock Input/ Internal ADC Pacer Clock Output
Expansion 5. Digital OUT, external GAIN select bit 1
N/A
Expansion 6. Digital OUT, external GAIN select bit 0
N/A
Expansion 7. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 3
N/A
Expansion 8. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 2
N/A
Expansion 9. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 1
N/A
Expansion 10. Digital OUT, external ADDRESS, select bit 0
N/A
Expansion 11. Simultaneous Sample and Hold (SSH)
N/A*
Analog Ground, Common

TB12
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
AGND
+ 15 V- 15 V
AGND+5V

Pin Number and Description*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common*
Analog Ground, Common
Expansion, +15 V Power
N/A
Expansion, -15 V Power
N/A*
Common Ground
19
Expansion, +5 V Power*The following SCSI Pins connect to Analog Common: 24, 27, 29, 32, 55, 56, 59, 64, and 67.

P1 – TB10(Note 2)

P1 – TB11

P1 – TB12

Note 2: For TB9 and TB10, the filter network portion of the silkscreen is not shown. Instead, the DIFF and SE channel
identifiers have been moved next to the screws for ease in identification.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

897994

DBK215 pg. 7

Digital I/O Correlation to 68-pin SCSI
TB5
DGND
DGND
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
A0

Pin Number and Description**
Digital Ground, Common**
Digital Ground, Common
49
Digital I/O: Port A, Bit 7
15
Digital I/O: Port A, Bit 6
50
Digital I/O: Port A, Bit 5
16
Digital I/O: Port A, Bit 4
51
Digital I/O: Port A, Bit 3
17
Digital I/O: Port A, Bit 2
52
Digital I/O: Port A, Bit 1
18
Digital I/O: Port A, Bit 0

TB6
+5 V
+5 V
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND
DGND

Pin Number and Description
19
Expansion +5 V Power
19
Expansion +5 V Power**
Digital Ground, Common**
Digital Ground, Common**
Digital Ground, Common**
Digital Ground, Common**
Digital Ground, Common**
Digital Ground, Common**
Digital Ground, Common**
Digital Ground, Common

TB7
DGND
DGND
C7
C6
C5
C4
C3
C2
C1
C0

Pin Number and Description**
Digital Ground, Common**
Digital Ground, Common
41
Digital I/O: Port C, Bit 7
7
Digital I/O: Port C, Bit 6
42
Digital I/O: Port C, Bit 5
8
Digital I/O: Port C, Bit 4
43
Digital I/O: Port C, Bit 3
9Digital I/O: Port C, Bit 2
44
Digital I/O: Port C, Bit 1
10
Digital I/O: Port C, Bit 0

TB8
DGND
DGND
B0
B1
B2
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7

Pin Number and Description**
Digital Ground, Common**
Digital Ground, Common
14
Digital I/O: Port B, Bit 0
48
Digital I/O: Port B, Bit 1
13
Digital I/O: Port B, Bit 2
47
Digital I/O: Port B, Bit 3
12
Digital I/O: Port B, Bit 4
46
Digital I/O: Port B, Bit 5
11
Digital I/O: Port B, Bit 6
45
Digital I/O: Port B, Bit 7

P2 – TB5

P2 – TB6

P2 – TB7

P2 – TB8* The following SCSI Pins connect to Analog Common: 24, 27, 29, 32, 55, 56, 59, 64, and 67.
** The following SCSI Pins connect to Digital Common: 35, 36, 40, and 53.

DBK215, pg. 8897994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Pulse/Frequency Correlation to 68-pin SCSI
TB1
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
DGND
+5V

Pin Number and Description
N/A P3 Digital Port Bit 0
N/A P3 Digital Port Bit 1
N/A P3 Digital Port Bit 2

TB2
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
DGND
DGND

Pin Number and Description
N/A P3 Digital Port Bit 8
N/A P3 Digital Port Bit 9
N/A P3 Digital Port Bit 10

TB3

Pin Number and Description

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A

P3 Digital Port Bit 3
P3 Digital Port Bit 4
P3 Digital Port Bit 5
P3 Digital Port Bit 6
P3 Digital Port Bit 7
Digital Ground, Common
Expansion, +5 Volt PowerP3 Digital Port Bit 11
P3 Digital Port Bit 12
P3 Digital Port Bit 13
P3 Digital Port Bit 14
P3 Digital Port Bit 15
Digital Ground, Common
Digital Ground, Common

TB1 is NOT USED

P3 – TB1 (not used)

TB2 is NOT USED

CH0 (DAC0)22

Analog Out; Analog DAC 0 Output

AGND

*

Analog Ground, Common; intended for use with DACs

EXP 0 (DAC2)

N/A

Analog Out; Analog DAC 2 Output

AGND

*

Analog Ground, Common; intended for use with DACs

CH1 (DAC1)

21

Analog Out; Analog DAC 1 Output

A/O CLK

1

Analog Out Clock; External DAC Pacer Clock Input/
Internal DAC Pacer Clock Output

EXP 1 (DAC3)

N/A

Analog Out; Analog DAC 3 Output

DGND

**

Digital Ground, Common

+15 V

N/A

Expansion, + 15 VDC

N/AExpansion, -15 VDC

-15 V
TB4

P3 – TB2 (not used)

P3 – TB3

Pin Number and Description

EXP 2

N/A

Reserved

EXP 3

N/A

Reserved

EXP 4

N/A

Reserved

TMR 0

3

P3 Timer 0 Output

TMR 1

37

P3, Timer 1 Output

CNT 3

38

P3 Counter 3 Input

CNT 2

4

P3 Counter 2 Input

CNT 1

39

P3 Counter 1 Input

CNT0

5

P3 Counter 0 Input

DGND

**

Digital Ground, Common

P3 – TB4* The following SCSI Pins connect to Analog Common: 24, 27, 29, 32, 55, 56, 59, 64, and 67.
** The following SCSI Pins connect to Digital Common: 35, 36, 40, and 53.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

897994

DBK215 pg. 9

Correlation to Analog Input BNC Terminations – BNC 0 through BNC 7“Virtual” Terminal Blocks TB13 and TB14 for ANALOG INPUT connect to TB9 and TB10 through the printed circuit board.
TB13 (“Virtual” Terminal Block)
BNC CH
DIFF
SE
BNC0+
0H
0
BNC00L
8
BNC1+
1H
1
BNC11L
9
BNC2+2H
2
BNC22L
10
BNC3+
3H
3
BNC0+
3L
11
AGND
AGND

N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A

TB14 (“Virtual” Terminal Block)
BNC CH
DIFF
SE
BNC4+
4H
4
BNC44L
12
BNC5+
5H
5
BNC55L
13
BNC6+
6H
6
BNC66L
14
BNC7+
7H
7
BNC7+
7L
15
AGND
AGND

N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A

68-Pin SCSI Connector, Pin Number and Description
Pin
SE = Single Ended ; DIFF = Differential Jumper Used68
CH 0 IN (SE) / CH 0 HI IN (DIFF)
J0
34
CH 8 IN (SE) / CH 0 LO IN (DIFF)
33
CH 1 IN (SE) / CH 1 HI IN (DIFF)
J1
66
CH 9 IN (SE) / CH 1 LO IN (DIFF)
65
CH 2 IN (SE) / CH 2 HI IN (DIFF)
J2
31
CH 10 IN (SE) / CH 2 LO IN (DIFF)30
CH 3 IN (SE) / CH 3 HI IN (DIFF)
J3
63
CH 11 IN (SE) / CH 3 LO IN (D DIFF)**

Analog Ground
Analog Ground

TB13 does not physically exist on
DBK215. A silkscreen of TB13 ispresent as a visual aid to signal
routing and configuration.

A header located beneath TB14 andTB16 is used to set the BNC
channels to Single-Ended or to
Differential. Simply place channel’s
2-pin jumper in the appropriate
position (SE or DIFF).

N/A
N/A

68-Pin SCSI Connector, Pin Number and Description
Pin
SE = Single Ended ; DIFF = Differential Jumper Used28
CH 4 IN (SE) / CH 4 HI IN (DIFF)
J4
61
CH 12 IN (SE) / CH 4 LO IN (DIFF)60
CH 5 IN (SE) / CH 5 HI IN (DIFF)
J5
26
CH 13 IN (SE) / CH 5 LO IN (DIFF)25
CH 6 IN (SE) / CH 6 HI IN (DIFF)
J6
58
CH 14 IN (SE) / CH 6 LO IN (DIFF)57
CH 7 IN (SE) / CH 7 HI IN (DIFF)
J7
23
CH 15 IN (SE) / CH 7 LO IN (DIFF)**

Analog Ground
Analog Ground

TB14 does not physically exist on
DBK215. A silkscreen of TB14 ispresent as a visual aid to signal
routing and configuration.

A header located beneath TB14 andTB16 is used to set the BNC
channels to Single-Ended or to
Differential. Simply place channel’s
2-pin jumper in the appropriate
position (SE or DIFF).

N/A
N/A

Correlation to Custom BNC Terminations – BNC A through BNC H

Pertains to Terminal Blocks TB15 and TB16 for Custom Configuration on a per-channel basis.
TB15 (“Routing” Terminal Block)
BNC CH
Description
BNCA+
BNCABNCB+BNCBBNCC+BNCCBNCD+
BNCD+
AGND
AGND

BNC channels A through D are configured on a per-channel basis by the user. TB15 is a routing
terminal block used to connect BNCs (A thru D) to the desired signals, which are selected via a second
DBK215 terminal block. For example: a user could run a wire from BNCA+ to TB4 screw terminal“TMR0” and BNCA- to TB4 DGND to create a BNC timer connection.
Accessory Wire Kit, p/n 1139-0800 includes jumper wires and a screwdriver.
Analog Ground *Analog Ground *TB15

TB16 (“Routing” Terminal Block)
BNC CH
Description
BNCA+
BNCABNCB+BNCBBNCC+BNCCBNCD+
BNCD+
AGND
AGND

BNC channels E through H are configured on a per-channel basis by the user. TB16 is a routing
terminal block used to connect BNCs (E thru H) to the desired signals, which are selected via a second
DBK215 terminal block.
Customizing is as described for BNCA through BNCD above.
Accessory Wire Kit, p/n 1139-0800 includes jumper wires and a screwdriver.
Analog Ground *Analog Ground *TB16* The following SCSI Pins connect to Analog Common: 24, 27, 29, 32, 55, 56, 59, 64, and 67.
DBK215, pg. 10897994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Adding Resistor/Capacitor Filter Networks
WARNING
Disconnect the DBK215 from power and signal sources prior to installing capacitors or
resistors.

CAUTION
Ensure wire strands do not short power supply connections to any terminal potential.
Failure to do so could result in damage to equipment.
Do not exceed maximum allowable inputs (as listed in product specifications). There
should never be more than 30 V with reference to analog ground (AGND) or earth
ground.
You must provide strain-relief (lead slack) to all leads leaving the module. Use tie-wraps[not included] to secure strain-relief.
Always connect the CHASSIS terminal to earth ground. This will maximize static
protection.
If a channel is not associated with a DBK expansion option you can install a customized RC filter network
to improve the signal-to noise ratio, assuming that an unacceptable level of noise exists. DBK215’s
internal board includes silk-screened sockets for installing RC filter networks. The following tablecontains values that are typical for RC filter network components.
Typical One-Pole Low Pass Filter
Valuesfor DBK215

R
Ohms

C
µF

510
510
510
510
510
510
510
510
470

1
0.47
0.22
0.1
0.047
0.022
0.01
0.00470.0033f
Hertz(-3dB)
312
664
1419
3122
6643
14192
31223
66431
102666

Do not use RC filters in conjunction with additional DBK expansion
accessories.

f
kHz(-3dB)
0.31
0.66
1.42
3.12
6.64
14.19
31.22
66.43
102.67

An Example of Customer-Installed
Capacitors and Filters for RC Networks
In this example Channels 0 and 8 are shown as Single-Ended.
Channel 1 is Differential, i.e., using 1H and 1L (channel High and Low).

The following three notes pertain to the above figure.
Note 1: The 3 horizontal capacitors [as oriented in the illustration] are optional filter capacitors.
Note 2: The vertical capacitor [as oriented in the illustration] is an optional isolation capacitor used for the
reduction of Differential noise. Such capacitor placement is not used in Single-Ended applications.
Note 3: If installing filter resistors, carefully drill out the indicated centers with a 1/16 inch drill-bit. Otherwise
the resistor will be short-circuited.

Prior to installing RC components, review the previous Warning and Caution
statements, then read over the following information regarding resistors andcapacitors.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

897994

DBK215 pg. 11

• Do not use RC filters in conjunction with additional DBK expansion accessories.
• Prior to installing a resistor to the filter network you must drill a 1/16” hole throughthe center pinhole [beneath the board’s silkscreen resistor symbol] as indicated in thepreceding figure. Failure to do so will short-circuit the resistor.
• Do not drill holes on the board for channels, unless those channels are to receive afilter network (see preceding statement).
• Resistors should be ¼ watt, film-type with up to 5% tolerance. Do not use wirewound resistor types.
• A resistor value of 510 Ω is recommended. Do not exceed 510 Ω.
• Capacitors used are to be of the film dielectric type (e.g., polycarbonate or
NPO ceramic), above 0.001 µF.
• RECOMMENDED: For reduction of both Common Mode Noise and Differential
Mode Noise, use one capacitor between Channel High and AGND; and use a second
capacitor between Channel Low and AGND.
• For reduction of Differential Noise [when no reduction of Common Mode Noise isneeded] position a capacitor across the respective Channel High and Channel Low.
• When in Differential Mode, using capacitors between Channel High, Channel Low,
and AGND may cause a slight degradation of wideband Common Mode rejection.
• When making a RC filter network, always install a wire jumper between the relevant
FILT CAP LO and AGND. FILT CAP LO terminals are located on TB9 and TB10.

DBK215, pg. 12897994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

Specifications for DBK215
Operating Environment:

Temperature: -30°C to 70°C
Relative Humidity: 95% RH, non-condensing

Connectors:
P5: 68-Pin SCSI
Screw Terminals: 14 banks of 10-connector blocks
Wire Size: 12 TO 28 AWG

Dimensions:

285 mm W x 220 mm D x 45 mm H (11” x 8.5” x 2.7”)

Weight:1.36 kg (3 lbs)

Cables and Accessories:
Item Description

Part Number

Rack Mount Kit, p/n

RackDBK4

68-conductor expansion cables; mate with P5 (SCSI, 68-pin) connectors:
3 ft., non-shielded
CA-G553 ft., shielded
CA-G566 ft., shielded
CA-G56-6
Accessory Wire Kit
Includes jumper wires and ascrewdriver.

1139-0800

Specifications subject to change without notice.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

897994

DBK215 pg. 13

DBK215, pg. 14897994

DBK Option Cards and Modules

DBK601 through DBK609

Termination Panels

For use with DaqBook/260, DBK60, and LogBook/360
Reference Notes:
DaqBook/260 users – refer to the DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series User’s Manual(p/n 457-0906) for installation instructions.
DBK60 users – refer to the DBK60 document module that is included in the DBK Option Cards &Modules User’s Manual (p/n 457-0905).
LogBook/360 users – refer to the LogBook User’s Manual (p/n 461-0901) for installation
instructions.
The rear panels of the DaqBook/260, DBK60, and the LogBook/360 are each customized through the use of
three termination panels. The three panels can be a combination of the following 600-series DBKs.

15

K
17

K

K

23

K

CHROM +
ALUMEL -

K
19

K

24

CHROM +
ALUMEL -K

CHROM +
ALUMEL -

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

+

1

-

+ 2

-

5

6

7

8

5

6

7

8

+

3

-

+ 4

-

9

10

11

12

9

10

11

12

+ 5

-

+ 6

-

13

14

15

16

13

14

15

16

+ 7

-

+ 8

-

16

CHROM +
ALUMEL -18

CHROM +
ALUMEL -1

CHROM +
ALUMEL -

20

K

25

K

CHROM +
ALUMEL -CHROM +
ALUMEL -K

26

K

CHROM +
ALUMEL -CHROM +
ALUMEL -21

CHROM +
ALUMEL -K

27

K

CHROM +
ALUMEL -

A

A

B

B

C

C

A

A

B

B

C

C

22

CHROM +
ALUMEL -28

K

CHROM +
ALUMEL -DBK605-R
DBK605-S
DBK605-T

DBK600 Series Termination Panels

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard! To avoid possible injury and equipment damage, turn off power
to devices and connected equipment prior to setup.

The signal inputs, from DBK cards, connect directly to the 600-series termination panels, with exception of the
DBK601 (blank panel) and the DBK607 (strain relief clamp). In the case of the DBK601 (blank panel), there
are no connections. In regard to DBK607, wires pass through a slot in the panel, and are clamped.
The remaining 600-series DBKs have different ways in which DBK cards connect to the termination panels(see following figure). Some points to note:•

Single-ended connections use analog common.

•

Differential connections require the proper polarity, typically red-to-red for high (+) andblack-to-black for low (-).

•

For thermocouples, red is generally the low side.

•

The T/C connector and wire type must match the T/C type used.

DBK Option Cards and Modules

987594

DBK601 thru DBK609

1

WARNING
Electrical Shock Hazard! To avoid possible injury and equipment damage, turn off power todevices and connected equipment prior to setup.

BNC Connector

Safety Jack Connector(Single-ended use)

T/C Connector
High (+)_
Termination Panel(internal side)

Low (-) connects toanalog common(not shown).

Low (-)
Red+

Safety Jack Connectors(Differential use)

Red
High (+)

Red
High (+)

Termination PanelRed(internal side)

High (+)

Black
Low (-)

Termination Panel( external side)

Termination Panel(internal side)Black
Low (-)DBK Cards Connect to the Termination Panels in Various Ways

Reference Notes:
DaqBook/260 users – refer to the DaqBook/100 Series & /200 Series User’s Manual(p/n 457-0906) for installation instructions.
DBK60 users – for installation instructions, refer the DBK60 document module that isincluded in the DBK Option Cards & Modules User’s Manual (p/n 457-0905).
LogBook/360 users – refer to the LogBook User’s Manual (p/n 461-0901) for installation
instructions.
Refer to DBK document modules, as applicable, for information regarding the DBK cards that
integrate with your LogBook or DaqBook system.

2

DBK601 thru DBK609

987594

DBK Option Cards and Modules